解脫道論 義疏通講 · 冊11
五方便總標與色陰General Outline of the Five Means and the Aggregate of Form
全文五層 →Full five layers →〈五通品〉說完神通,〈分別慧品〉把慧先立起來、先切開;到這裡,論文開卷第十,進〈五方便品〉。前一品說慧是什麼、有幾種,這一品開始說慧要用在哪裡。
本段是品首單元,一段之內辦兩件事:先把整品的綱目一次標完,再開講綱目的第一項。
先把所見說在前頭:論文末句自報「此二十六所造色及四大,成三十色」〔T32 446a28–29〕——而回到前面的標列逐目去數,只數得出二十四目。 差的兩目不在別處,就在標列裡的「無常揣食處色」〔T32 445c25〕這一串字上:逐釋處把它分作三目講——「是色敗壞,所謂色無常」〔T32 446a25–26〕、「以氣味眾生得立,此謂氣味揣食」〔T32 446a26–27〕、「色依界及意識界起,此謂界處色」〔T32 446a27–28〕。二十四減一加三,正得二十六。
這件事要緊的地方不在算術,在於它決定了本段該怎麼讀:標列不是這份清單的權威,逐釋才是。標列是提綱,提綱可以擠、可以連寫;真正一目一目落實的,是後面那一長串以「此謂」領起的收句。本編照原字錄標列、照原字錄逐釋,不代為斷句、不代為補目——但把兩邊的數並排放著,讀者自己看得見這半步的錯開。
一段之內兩件事
先看第一件。「於是初坐禪人,樂脫老死」〔T32 445c12〕起句,一口氣連下五個「樂」字:樂脫老死、樂除生死因、樂除無明闇、樂斷愛繩、樂得聖慧。然後才是正題——「於五處當起方便」〔T32 445c13–14〕,五處逐目列出:「所謂陰方便、入方便、界方便、因緣方便、聖諦方便」〔T32 445c14–15〕。
這五個名目不是隨手一列。它們就是整部〈五方便品〉的目次。本論後文,陰方便講到〔T32 448c24〕收,入方便講到〔T32 449c24〕收,界方便講到〔T32 450a16〕收,因緣方便講到〔T32 451c27〕收,聖諦方便講到〔T32 453b27〕收;五個收完,這一品也就完了。品首一句標五目,其後全品逐目答之——這是本論最乾淨的一次「標即是目錄」。
第二件事從「問:云何陰方便?答:五陰」〔T32 445c15〕開始。五陰逐目:「五陰,色陰、受陰、想陰、行陰、識陰」〔T32 445c15–16〕。而本段只講其中第一項,色陰;受、想、行、識四陰在後面幾個單元。
於是本段的體積分配是這樣的:總標兩句,五陰標目一句,其餘全部給了色陰。一品之綱用了三行,一陰之釋用了三十行。
四大:四問四答,一個模子
色陰之下先分兩支:「問:云何色陰?答:四大、四大所造色」〔T32 445c16–17〕。
四大的釋法極整齊。地界作「堅性堅相,此謂地界」〔T32 445c18〕,水火風三界依同一式各出一句,一律以「云何」發問、以「此謂」收句。四問四答,一個模子,不出一個譬喻。
這種整齊在本論裡並不常見。前面品八講四無量、講不淨、講隨念,動輒連下數譬;到了這裡,四大是骨架,論文就只給骨架,不添肉。
標列與逐釋,處處錯開半步
四大之後是所造色。標列從「云何四大所造色?眼入」〔T32 445c22〕起,一路頓號連下,到「無常揣食處色、眠色」〔T32 445c25〕止。然後逐釋,一目一目地講到「是諸界懈怠,此謂睡眠色」〔T32 446a28〕。
前面說過標二十四、釋二十六。而標與釋之間錯開的,不只是數。
其一,名目換了。 標列第五個色目作「增長色」〔T32 445c24–25〕,而逐釋處作「是諸入聚,此謂色聚。是色聚,此謂色相續」〔T32 446a24〕——標作「增長」,釋作「聚」。位置對得上,字面對不上。本編照錄不代正。
其二,同一個詞釋了兩個名。 「是色輕性此謂色輕,是色輕性此謂色軟」〔T32 446a21–22〕——兩句都作「色輕性」,前一句釋「色輕」,後一句釋「色軟」。校記在此:後一個「輕」字,宋、元、明、宮四本作「軟」。若從四本,則後句作「是色軟性此謂色軟」,二句各釋其名,齊整;從底本,則二句同以「輕性」立義而所立之名不同。本編從底本、誌而不改,並把四本之讀一併記下。三目收於「此三種是身不懈怠性」〔T32 446a23〕。
其三,標列末目的字也在兩歧之間。 標作「眠色」〔T32 445c25〕,而四本作「眼色」;逐釋處作「睡眠色」〔T32 446a28〕。逐釋這一句與底本的「眠」相承,本編從底本。
三處錯開,性質各不相同:一處是換詞,一處是校記所繫,一處是標與釋的相承。可核的只是這三處字面;它們是否同一個成因,本段自身不足以判。
五內入:先立其用,再說其身
五內入的釋法是本段最見工夫的地方,因為每一目都講兩遍。
第一遍立其用。「云何眼入?以是見色有對」〔T32 445c26〕、「依彼眼識起,此謂眼入」〔T32 445c26–27〕——以所知之境、以有對、以依之而某識起,三事立一入。耳鼻舌身四目照此式各出一句。
第二遍說其身。「復次依眼睛肉揣白黑眼珠三圓」〔T32 445c27〕以下:所依之處、形量之譬、初業所成、某大最多、四大所造清淨色。這一遍是解剖式的——眼在肉、血、風、痰、唾五重之內,「如半芥子,大如蟣子頭」〔T32 445c28–29〕;耳依膜而住,「如青豆莖」〔T32 446a04〕;鼻依細孔,「如拘毘陀羅形」〔T32 446a08〕;舌在舌肉之上兩指大,「如欝波羅花形」〔T32 446a11〕。
四個譬都取細小之物與植物之形,只狀形量,不說功能。而身入沒有譬——它用遮遣:「除毛髮爪齒,所餘不受」〔T32 446a14〕。身遍全身,無形可狀,於是論文改用減法。
第二遍裡還有一個逐目各異的欄位:某大最多。眼是「初業所成、四大所造、火大最多」〔T32 445c29〕,耳是「空大最多」〔T32 446a05〕,鼻是「風大最多」〔T32 446a08〕,舌是「水大最多」〔T32 446a12〕,身是「地大最多」〔T32 446a15〕。五入各偏一大,五大之中不用水火風地空之外者。可確定的是這份配當的字面;至於配當之所以然,論文不釋,本編不代為立說。
到了外四入,筆法忽然收緊:「是可見色,此謂色入」〔T32 446a16〕、「是有對聲,是謂聲入」〔T32 446a16–17〕——只出「可見」或「有對」一項,不再說所依、不再出譬。內五入與外四入之詳略如此懸殊,而本段並不出「觸入」一目。這也是照錄。
收句的形式,也不是一律的
外四入之後接著三類:二根、命根、二作。這一小段值得看它的收句怎麼寫。
女男二根不用收句:「是女性是女根、是男性是男根」〔T32 446a18〕——「是…是…」直接連成,不作以「此謂」領起的收句。命根回到常式:「是隨守護業所成色,此謂命根」〔T32 446a19〕。二作亦然:「是以身令現諸行名行,此謂身作」〔T32 446a19–20〕,口作依此。
再往下十二目,收句大體仍作「此謂」,卻也有例外。虛空界作「是色分別此謂虛空界」〔T32 446a21〕;輕、軟、堪受持三目講完,論文加一句合收:「此三種是身不懈怠性」〔T32 446a23〕——十二目之中唯這三目另有一句把它們攏在一起,其餘各目都是講完就過。而生、老、無常三目連下時,前二目作「是色令起,此謂色生」〔T32 446a24–25〕、「是令色熟,此謂色老」〔T32 446a25〕,到第三目忽然換字:「是色敗壞,所謂色無常」〔T32 446a25–26〕——「此謂」變成了「所謂」。
這些形式上的參差,本編一概照錄。它們可以確定的只有一件事:這份清單不是照一個模子填出來的。至於參差之所以然——是體例本如此,還是傳寫致之——論文自身不足以判,不代考定。
停一下:論文叫你回去看的那一句,字不一樣
四大講完、所造色未起之前,插著一句:「初坐禪人以二行取諸蓋」〔T32 445c20–21〕,接著說「如說觀四大,如是可知」〔T32 445c21–22〕。
這是一句明白的回指——論文自己告訴你,這裡不重複,回去看前面講「觀四大」的地方。回去看,那是品八的觀四大門,開於「問:云何觀四大」〔T32 438b25〕;而彼處同一個句式作「初坐禪人以二行取諸大」〔T32 438c03–04〕,其下逐問亦作「問:云何以略取諸大」〔T32 438c04〕。
一個字不一樣:此處作「蓋」,彼處作「大」。
在這裡停下來問一句:這一字之差,本段自身判得了嗎?
判不了。本段範圍內這一處沒有校記,宋、元、明、宮四本在此皆與底本同;也就是說,現存各本在此並不分歧,分歧的是本論的兩處自身。可核的只有三件事:本段作「蓋」、彼段作「大」、二處句式其餘全同。至於哪一處是原、哪一處是傳寫之變,抑或本無所謂變,論文不言、諸本不歧,本編誌其異而不代考定。
順帶一提,「觀四大」這個名目更早見於品七三十八行處之列,該列收於「斯謂三十八行處」〔T32 411a16〕。所以本段這一句回指,事實上把品七的列舉、品八的展開、品十一的取用三處串成一線。
為什麼只有眼入請了證人
五內入逐目講來,各說各的,唯獨眼入之後多出一句引據:「如大德舍利弗所說」〔T32 446a01〕,所引是「以眼識清淨,見諸色,或小或微,如牖柯喻」〔T32 446a01–02〕。
這件事有兩個可核的面。一是稱謂:「大德舍利弗」全論唯此一見;舍利弗之名全論四見(〔432a24〕〔441b16〕〔446a01〕〔461b24〕),而以「大德」冠之者只有這一處。二是分布:五內入之中只有眼入一目別引他說,耳鼻舌身四目都沒有。
而所引的那個譬——「牖柯」——全論也唯此一見,論文不更釋其形。
論文為什麼在此獨引、獨用此譬,本段不說。本編不由這一處的孤例推論引據之體例,也不代為解「牖柯」之形。
舌入那一目的句讀
還有一處底本形跡該誌下來。五內入的第一遍立義,四目都以「云何」起問而繫問號、句中用逗號、以「此謂」收句而繫句號;唯獨舌入一目,句中的逗號全成了句號,而句末的句號反成了問號——「云何舌入。以是知味」〔T32 446a09–10〕、「於是味有對。依舌識起。此謂舌入」〔T32 446a10〕,其收句作「此謂舌入?」〔T32 446a10〕。
一目之內,標點與其餘四目全反。範圍內無校記。可確定的是底本句讀如此;是否本應與餘四目一律,本編不代正、不代移。
帶走一個讀法
本段給的讀法很具體,而且出了本論仍然管用:
凡遇論文自報其數的清單,先數逐釋,再回頭校標列。
理由就在本段:標列可以連寫、可以擠,「無常揣食處色」六個字裡藏著三目;逐釋卻必須一目一句地落實,藏不住。所以逐釋是清單的實體,標列是它的影子。數影子會少,數實體才準。而當兩邊數不齊時,該做的不是替原文加頓號,是把兩邊的數並排記下來——本段的二十四與二十六,就是這樣並排放著的。
這一段在全論的位置
回頭看本段的位置:品十說完慧的分類,把工具擺上了桌;品十一開卷,先標五方便為全品之綱,再從第一項的第一陰講起。慧要有所緣,所緣就從色開始。
而色陰的講法,本段已經定了調:不談修觀的次第,只做清冊——四大四目、所造色二十六目、合為三十色。〈五方便品〉的整個前半,走的都是這個路子。這三十色之數,本論後文再見於〔446b05〕〔446c23〕〔451b01〕;本段是它第一次出現的地方。
帶走三件:一個所見——論文自報「成三十色」,而標列逐目只數得二十四;差的兩目藏在「無常揣食處色」一串字裡,逐釋處分作色無常、氣味揣食、界處色三目。一個讀法——凡遇自報其數之清單,先數逐釋、再校標列;標釋不齊時並排記下,不代原文斷句。一處停問——論文自指品八觀四大門,而此處作「取諸蓋」、彼處作「取諸大」;範圍內無校記、諸本不歧,故誌其異而不代考定。
還有兩件小事該記著:五內入皆二重釋,先立其用、再說其身,四目各繫形量之譬而身入獨以「除毛髮爪齒」遮遣;五目之中唯眼入別引大德舍利弗,而「大德舍利弗」與所引之「牖柯」全論各唯一見。
The Chapter on the Five Direct Knowledges has finished its treatment of supernormal knowledge, and the Chapter on the Analysis of Wisdom has first established and divided wisdom. The treatise now opens fascicle ten and enters the Chapter on Five Means. The preceding chapter asked what wisdom is and how many kinds it has; this chapter begins to say where wisdom is to be applied.
This is the opening unit of the chapter, and it does two things in one passage: it first states the outline of the whole chapter, then begins the first item in that outline.
The central observation can be stated at once: the final sentence reports, “these twenty-six derived forms, together with the four great elements, make thirty forms” 〔T32 446a28–29〕, yet the preceding heading list yields only twenty-four items. The two missing items are concealed in the string “impermanence-bolus-food-domain form” 〔T32 445c25〕. In the detailed explanation this becomes three entries: “the breaking down of form, namely the impermanence of form” 〔T32 446a25–26〕, “through flavor beings are sustained; this is called flavor as morsel food” 〔T32 446a26–27〕, and “form arises dependent on the elements and the consciousness element; this is called form as the domain of the elements” 〔T32 446a27–28〕. Twenty-four minus one plus three equals twenty-six.
What matters is not the arithmetic but the reading practice it establishes: the heading list is not the authority for this inventory; the individual explanations are. A heading can compress several items into one string. The later sequence, with one defining closure after another, is where each item becomes explicit. This edition preserves the list and the explanations without silently adding punctuation or entries, but places their two totals side by side so the half-step displacement remains visible.
Two Tasks within One Passage
The first begins with “At this point the beginning meditator aspires to escape aging and death” 〔T32 445c12〕 and repeats “aspires” five times: to escape aging and death, remove the cause of birth and death, dispel the darkness of ignorance, cut the cord of craving, and attain noble wisdom. Only then does the topic appear: “in five fields he should arouse a method” 〔T32 445c13–14〕. The five are “the method concerning the aggregates, sense bases, elements, conditionality, and noble truths” 〔T32 445c14–15〕.
These are not an incidental list. They are the table of contents for the entire Chapter on Five Means. The method concerning the aggregates closes at 〔T32 448c24〕, the sense bases at 〔T32 449c24〕, the elements at 〔T32 450a16〕, conditionality at 〔T32 451c27〕, and the noble truths at 〔T32 453b27〕. When all five close, the chapter closes. Its first sentence names five divisions; the remainder answers them in order. This is one of the treatise’s clearest instances in which an opening list is literally a table of contents.
The second task begins, “Question: What is the method concerning the aggregates? Answer: the five aggregates” 〔T32 445c15〕. They are listed as “form, feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness” 〔T32 445c15–16〕. This passage explains only the first, the aggregate of form. The other four follow in later units.
The distribution is therefore striking: two sentences for the chapter’s general outline, one sentence to list the aggregates, and all the remaining lines for form. The outline of a chapter occupies three lines; the explanation of one aggregate occupies thirty.
The Four Great Elements: Four Questions, Four Answers, One Pattern
The aggregate of form first divides in two: “Question: What is the aggregate of form? Answer: the four great elements and form derived from the four great elements” 〔T32 445c16–17〕.
The four elements are explained with exact regularity. Earth is “the nature and characteristic of hardness; this is called the earth element” 〔T32 445c18〕, and water, fire, and wind follow the same form. Each begins with “what is” and closes with “this is called.” Four questions, four answers, one pattern, and not one simile.
Such regularity is not constant in this treatise. Chapter Eight’s discussions of the immeasurables, foulness, and recollection readily unfold through similes. Here the four elements are a framework, and the treatise gives the framework without ornament.
Heading and Explanation Are Repeatedly Half a Step Apart
The list of derived form begins, “What is form derived from the four great elements? The eye base” 〔T32 445c22〕 and runs through “impermanence-bolus-food-domain form, sleep form” 〔T32 445c25〕. The detailed definitions then continue item by item through “the sluggishness of the elements is called sleep form” 〔T32 446a28〕.
The heading has twenty-four items while the explanations have twenty-six. Yet number is not their only displacement.
First, a name changes. The fifth item in the heading’s final group is “growth of form” 〔T32 445c24–25〕, whereas its explanation says, “the gathering of the bases is called a cluster of form; a cluster of form is called continuity of form” 〔T32 446a24〕. The positions correspond, but the wording does not. Both are retained.
Second, one phrase defines two names. “The nature of lightness in form is called lightness of form; the nature of lightness in form is called softness of form” 〔T32 446a21–22〕. Both sentences in the base read “nature of lightness,” though the first defines lightness and the second softness. The Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses read “softness” for the second occurrence. Their reading would make each sentence define its own term; the base makes one phrase define two. This edition follows the base and records the other reading. The three qualities close together: “these three are the nature of bodily freedom from sluggishness” 〔T32 446a23〕.
Third, the last item in the heading is itself divided among witnesses. The base has “sleep form” 〔T32 445c25〕, while all four witnesses have “eye form.” The explanation has “sleep form” 〔T32 446a28〕, agreeing with the base. This edition follows the base.
The three displacements are not of one kind: one changes a term, one attaches to a critical note, and one connects the heading to its later explanation. The wording of each can be established; the passage cannot establish that all three arose from one cause.
The Five Internal Bases: First Their Function, Then Their Body
The treatment of the five internal bases is the passage’s most carefully engineered section, because every item is explained twice.
The first account establishes function. “What is the eye base? Through it one sees visible form and is resistant in relation to visible form” 〔T32 445c26〕; “eye-consciousness arises dependent on it; this is called the eye base” 〔T32 445c26–27〕. Object known, resistance, and the consciousness that depends on it jointly establish one base. Ear, nose, tongue, and body follow the same sequence.
The second describes its body, beginning, “Further, it rests in the fleshly mass of the eye, within three circles of the white and black eyeball” 〔T32 445c27〕. It gives a bodily site, a comparison for shape and measure, production by the first kamma, a predominant element, and purified form. This account is almost anatomical. The eye lies within five layers of flesh, blood, wind, phlegm, and saliva and is “like half a mustard seed, as large as the head of a louse” 〔T32 445c28–29〕. The ear is “like the stem of a green bean” 〔T32 446a04〕, the nose “like the shape of a kovidāra” 〔T32 446a08〕, and the tongue “like the shape of an utpala flower” 〔T32 446a11〕.
All four similes use a plant or a minute object to indicate shape and measure; none explains function. The body base has no simile. It proceeds by exclusion: “excluding the hair of the head, body hair, nails, teeth, and the remainder that does not receive sensation” 〔T32 446a14〕. Because body-sensitivity extends throughout the body and offers no single shape, the text uses subtraction.
The second account contains another field that changes item by item: the predominant element. The eye is “produced by the first kamma, derived from the four great elements, with fire predominant” 〔T32 445c29〕; the ear has space predominant 〔T32 446a05〕, the nose wind 〔T32 446a08〕, the tongue water 〔T32 446a12〕, and the body earth 〔T32 446a15〕. The textual assignments are certain. The treatise does not explain why they are assigned in this way, so this edition does not supply a theory.
At the external bases the prose suddenly contracts: “what is visible is called the visible-form base” 〔T32 446a16〕; “what is resistant as sound is called the sound base” 〔T32 446a16–17〕. Only visibility or resistance is given, with no site and no simile. The contrast in scale between the five internal and four external bases is plain, and no tangible base is named in this passage. That too is simply retained.
Even the Closing Formula Is Not Uniform
After the four external bases come three groups: the two sex faculties, the life faculty, and two intimations. It is worth watching how each definition closes.
The female and male faculties use no separate closing formula: “what is female is the female faculty; what is male is the male faculty” 〔T32 446a18〕. The life faculty returns to the usual form: “form produced by protective kamma is called the life faculty” 〔T32 446a19〕. The two intimations do the same: “that which makes formations manifest through the body and is named an activity is called bodily intimation” 〔T32 446a19–20〕, with verbal intimation following in parallel.
The twelve remaining entries mostly use “this is called,” but not without exceptions. The space element is “the differentiation of form; this is called the space element” 〔T32 446a21〕. After lightness, softness, and adaptability, a single sentence gathers them: “these three are the nature of bodily freedom from sluggishness” 〔T32 446a23〕. Only these three among the twelve receive a collective closure. When arising, aging, and impermanence follow in sequence, the first two say “this is called the arising of form” 〔T32 446a24–25〕 and “this is called the aging of form” 〔T32 446a25〕; the third changes its formula to “the breaking down of form, namely the impermanence of form” 〔T32 446a25–26〕.
All these formal irregularities are preserved. They establish one thing only: this inventory was not filled out from a single rigid template. Whether the variation belongs to the original exposition or to transmission cannot be determined here.
Pause: The Sentence That Sends Us Back Has One Different Character
Between the elements and derived form stands a sentence: “the beginning meditator apprehends the hindrances in two ways” 〔T32 445c20–21〕, followed by “as explained in contemplating the four great elements, so it should be understood” 〔T32 445c21–22〕.
This is an explicit backward reference. The treatise tells the reader not to repeat the method here but to return to the earlier contemplation of the four great elements. That section begins, “Question: How does one contemplate the four great elements?” 〔T32 438b25〕. Yet the corresponding sentence there reads, “the beginning meditator apprehends the great elements in two ways” 〔T32 438c03–04〕, followed by “Question: How does one apprehend the great elements briefly?” 〔T32 438c04〕.
One character differs: the present passage has “hindrances”; the earlier one has “great elements.”
Pause here: can this passage decide the difference?
It cannot. There is no critical note at this point, and the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses agree with the base. The extant witnesses do not differ here; the two passages within the treatise do. Three facts can be checked: this passage says “hindrances,” the earlier passage says “great elements,” and all the remaining wording is parallel. Which is prior, or whether either is a transmissional change, is not stated. The edition records the difference without adjudicating it.
The title “contemplation of the four great elements” appears even earlier in Chapter Seven’s list of thirty-eight meditation subjects, which closes, “these are called the thirty-eight meditation subjects” 〔T32 411a16〕. The present reference therefore links a Chapter Seven list, its Chapter Eight expansion, and its Chapter Eleven reuse.
Why Does Only the Eye Base Call a Witness?
The five internal bases are explained in sequence, but only the eye base receives a separate authority: “as the Venerable Śāriputra said” 〔T32 446a01〕. The statement is, “with eye-consciousness purified, one sees various forms, whether small or minute, as in the simile of the window branch” 〔T32 446a01–02〕.
Two aspects can be verified. First, the title “Venerable Śāriputra” occurs only here in the entire treatise. Śāriputra’s name appears four times (〔432a24〕〔441b16〕〔446a01〕〔461b24〕), but only here with “Venerable.” Second, only the eye base among the five receives a separate attribution; ear, nose, tongue, and body do not.
The “window branch” in the quoted simile is likewise unique in the treatise, and no further explanation of its form is given.
Why this item alone receives the authority and this simile is not stated. No general account of citation practice is inferred from the isolated case, and the shape of the “window branch” is left open.
The Punctuation of the Tongue-Base Entry
One trace of the base punctuation should also remain visible. In the first explanation of the internal bases, four entries begin with “what is” followed by a question mark, use commas within the sentence, and end their “this is called” closure with a period. Only the tongue-base entry reverses the pattern. It reads, “What is the tongue base. Through it one knows taste” 〔T32 446a09–10〕 and “in relation to taste it is resistant. Tongue-consciousness arises dependent on it. This is called the tongue base” 〔T32 446a10〕, with the final closure punctuated as a question 〔T32 446a10〕.
Within this one entry, the punctuation is the reverse of the other four. There is no critical note here. The base punctuation can be established; whether it ought to be regularized cannot, and this edition does not silently move it.
A Reading Practice to Carry Away
This passage supplies a concrete practice that remains useful beyond the treatise:
When a text reports the number of items in a list, count the individual explanations first, then compare the heading list.
The reason is visible here. A heading can compress or run items together: the six characters of “impermanence-bolus-food-domain form” contain three later entries. Individual definitions, however, must be stated one by one. They cannot hide in the same way. Thus the explanations are the body of the inventory and the heading is its shadow. Counting the shadow yields too few; counting the body yields the reported number. When the two do not agree, the task is not to repunctuate the source but to record both totals side by side—twenty-four and twenty-six in this case.
The Place of This Passage in the Treatise
The preceding chapter finishes classifying wisdom and puts the instrument on the table. Chapter Eleven opens by naming five means as the outline of the whole chapter, then begins with the first aggregate under the first means. Wisdom requires an object, and the objects begin with form.
The discussion of form sets the tone for the first half of the chapter: it does not teach a sequence of contemplation but compiles an inventory—four great elements and twenty-six derived forms, together thirty. The number thirty recurs later at 〔446b05〕〔446c23〕〔451b01〕; this is its first occurrence.
Carry away three things. One observation: the treatise reports thirty forms, yet the heading list yields only twenty-four derived forms; the missing two are concealed in a single string that the explanations divide into impermanence of form, flavor as morsel food, and form as the domain of the elements. One reading practice: for a numbered inventory, count the individual explanations before checking the heading; where heading and explanation disagree, record both without repunctuating the source. One place to pause: the present passage says “apprehends the hindrances,” while its own reference in Chapter Eight says “apprehends the great elements.” With no variant here and all witnesses agreeing, the difference is recorded but not decided.
Remember two smaller details as well. Each internal base is explained twice—first by function, then by bodily site—and four receive similes of shape while the body base proceeds by exclusion. Only the eye base cites the Venerable Śāriputra; both that title and the “window branch” of the citation occur only here in the treatise.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · General Outline of the Five Means and the Aggregate of Form · Exposition · Summer 2026
色法差別、令起與聚Differences among Forms, Their Arising, and Clusters
全文五層 →Full five layers →上一單元排完三十色的清冊,這一單元問:四大與所造色,究竟差在哪裡?答完差別,論文立刻標出一套工具——「五行」,並就地用掉前兩件。
先把所見說在前頭:本段幾乎每一個目名都拖著一個數字,而那個數字不是序號,是那一聚所含之法的數目。
眼十、耳十、命根九、清淨八、清淨身作九、清淨口作七、輕口作十一——初讀最容易把它們讀成第十、第九、第八。不是的。眼十是「這十個法共生不相離」,所以叫眼十;命根九是九個法;清淨八是八個法。名字後面那個字是內容,不是位置。
一旦這樣讀,本段的整個結構就清楚了:它是一份帳。左邊是名目,右邊是數;而論文全部的工作,就是把三十色一次次重新裝箱,每裝一次就報一次數。
三杖與杖影:本段的分工圖
先看差別那一問。「四大依四大共生,四大所造色依四大生」〔T32 446b01–02〕——四大彼此互依而共生,所造色則依四大而生;反過來,所造色不作四大的所依,也不作別的所造色的所依。差別只在一個「依」字的方向。
然後論文給了一個很好的喻,而且是一個喻分兩層用:「如三杖得倚,如是四大可知」〔T32 446b03〕、「如三杖影倚,如是四大所造色可知,此謂差別」〔T32 446b04–05〕。
三根杖互相支著才立得住——這是四大。三根杖的影子也彼此相倚,可是影子不撐影子,影子撐在杖上——這是所造色。同一個物象,杖是一層,影是另一層;而影的所有結構都是杖給的。「三杖」這個喻在全論只出現兩次,就是這裡的一杖一影。
這個喻定了本段以下所有工作的分工:既然影全由杖出,那麼要看清「影」,就得追它從哪一支杖來、跟哪些影子綁在一起。追來處,就是「令起」;看綁在一起的,就是「聚」。
五行與它的前兩件
「於是坐禪人此三十色,以五行可知所勝」〔T32 446b05〕——三十色承上一單元的總計而來。五行逐目是「以令起、以聚、以生、以種種、以一」〔T32 446b06〕。本段只用前兩件,後三件在下面幾個單元。
令起:六個箱子,裝滿三十
第一件是令起,也就是按因緣分派。論文一連六組,句式全同:
九色是業因緣所起——眼耳鼻舌身五入、女男二根、命根、處色〔T32 446b07〕。二色是心因緣所起——「二色,心因緣所起,所謂身作、口作」〔T32 446b08–09〕。一色是時節心所起——「一色,時節心所起,所謂聲入」〔T32 446b09–10〕。四色是時心食因緣所起——色輕、色軟、色堪受持、眠色〔T32 446b10〕。十二色是四因緣所起〔T32 446b11〕。二色無有所起——「二色,無有所起,所謂色老、色無常」〔T32 446b13–14〕。
九加二加一加四加十二加二,正好三十。六個箱子裝完,一色不剩、一色不多。
而末尾還補一句:「復次生緣老、老緣無常」〔T32 446b14〕。老與無常既說「無有所起」,論文就另用緣起的相承把它們接上——不入六箱的因緣分派,另立一線。
上一單元的讀法,這裡立刻要用
第五組標作十二,可是把它逐目用頓號分開來數,只得七個詞。最後那一串是「色生揣食四界」〔T32 446b12–13〕。
又是同一種壓縮。上一單元的「無常揣食處色」六個字裡藏著三目;這裡的「色生揣食四界」六個字裡藏著六目——色生、揣食,加上四界(地水火風各一)。七減一加六,正得十二。
上一單元交出的讀法是:遇論文自報其數的清單,先數逐釋、再回頭校標列,兩邊不齊就並排記下、不代原文加頓號。這一單元第一次用它,就用上了。本編照原字錄,不代斷句、不代補目;而六組相加得三十這件事,本身就是這一組該讀作十二的旁證。
聚:二十七個箱子
第二件是聚,也就是看哪些色綁在一起共生。「九聚業所起,九聚心所起,六聚時節所起,三聚食所起」〔T32 446b15–16〕——九、九、六、三,四類相加二十七聚。
業所起的九聚逐目是「所謂眼十、耳十、鼻十、舌十、身十、女根十、男根十、處十、命根九」〔T32 446b17–18〕。這裡最好用來驗前面那條所見:九目之中八目綴「十」、一目綴「九」。若是序號,不會有兩個「十」,更不會第九個反而叫「九」。綴的是法數。
眼十裡的那一剎那
九聚之中,論文只詳釋一個,就是眼十;其餘「以廣可知」。而這一段詳釋是本段最深的地方。
先說十法:「此十法共生、不相離,此謂聚」〔T32 446b20–21〕,其目見「復依四界、色、香、味、觸、命根,眼清淨」〔T32 446b19–20〕。然後生、老、無常、虛空界四法與這聚共起〔T32 446b22〕。
接著論文開始數剎那。這一眼十到了老時,生出第二眼十;第二眼十到了老時,生出第三眼十。然後是那一句:「初十散壞,第二十老,第三十起,彼成一剎那」〔T32 446b27–28〕。
三個眼十,一個正在壞、一個正在老、一個正在起,三者合起來才算一個剎那。這不是三個剎那接成一串,是一個剎那裡同時有三重。
然後論文說了一句很老實的話:「彼間不可知,剎那輕速故,不現世間知」〔T32 446b28–29〕——這中間的接縫看不見,因為剎那太快,世間之知照不到。「剎那輕速」四個字在全論只出現這一次。
看不見,怎麼辦?論文不叫你去看接縫,改叫你看流:「見眼相續,如江流、如燈焰相續」〔T32 446b29–446c01〕。江水一直是同一條江嗎?燈焰一直是同一朵焰嗎?看得見的是相續,看不見的是一段一段。論文給的不是接縫的顯微鏡,是相續的兩個譬。「江流」這個喻全論只此一見;「燈焰」全論四見,本段是頭一次,後三次都在最末一品。
停一下:那個「七」,能改嗎
心所起的九聚,逐目是清淨八、清淨身作九、清淨口作七、清淨輕九、輕身作十、輕口作十一、清淨眼九、眼身作十、眼口作十一。
停在第三目上:「清淨口作七」〔T32 446c04〕。
同列的其他目,數字是九、十、十一;而校記記著:這個「七」字,宋、元、明、宮四本都作「十」。
在這裡停下來問一句:本編可以照四本改嗎?
不可以。可核的只有兩件事——底本作「七」,四本作「十」。至於哪個是原、哪個是後改,論文自身不作說明,本段也沒有第二處同名之目可以比對。照四本改,會把一個「並存的兩讀」變成一個「唯一的定讀」;而讀者從此再也看不見這裡曾經有過分歧。所以本編從底本作「七」,把四本之讀並記在考據裡,不代改字、不代考定。
同一個處理也用在別處:「彼十是名清淨八」〔T32 446c07〕——上一句才說「四界依界,色香味觸,此八法共生不相離」〔T32 446c06–07〕,下一句忽然作「彼十」,而範圍內沒有校記。照錄不代正。心所起一組的首目作「清淨八義」〔T32 446c03〕,而時節、食二組的首目都逕作「清淨八」〔T32 446c15·446c17〕,那個「義」字論文不更釋——也照錄不代刪。
清淨八的剎那,跟眼十不一樣
清淨八的詳釋值得與眼十對讀。四法隨它而起〔T32 446c09〕——請注意,眼十處作「彼聚共起」〔T32 446b22〕,這裡作「彼隨起」,二處字面不一,本編照錄。
而剎那的算法也換了:清淨八於壞時與第二心共起,第二清淨八起時初清淨已壞,於一剎那起;這不是展轉為聚。清淨輕九與清淨眼九六作聚,「非初壞、非第二起,無一剎那」。然後是本段唯一的一次自設問答:「何故?不一心二作令起」〔T32 446c13–14〕——因為一心不令二作同時起。
同樣講剎那,業所起的眼十是三重同時,心所起的清淨八卻沒有那個三重。論文把差別點出來,不再多說。
收尾:時節、食與命九天聚
時節所起的六聚是「清淨八、清淨聲九、清淨輕九、輕聲十、清淨眼九、眼聲十」〔T32 446c15–16〕,另加外聚二。食所起的三聚是清淨八、清淨輕九、清淨眼九。
最後一段轉向界地:「命九天聚,於欲界、於業處所成」〔T32 446c19–20〕;八聚以壽命而活;鼻、舌、身、男女根與輕等三及眠,於色界沒有命九天聚;「無想、梵天,於其身一切入,以是得活」〔T32 446c21–22〕。
「命九天聚」在本段出現兩次,而兩處的「天」字都帶校記,且見證還不一樣——前一處只有宮本作「無」,後一處宋元明宮四本乾脆沒有這個字。本編兩處都從底本,並把差異記下。
帶走三件:一個所見——本段目名所綴之數是法數不是序號(眼十=十法共生、清淨八=八法共生),讀成序號則全盤讀錯。一個讀法——承前單元:遇自報之數與逐目不齊,先數逐釋再校標列;本段「十二色」一組七詞而末串「色生揣食四界」須讀作六目,六組相加得三十即其旁證。一處停問——「清淨口作七」同列皆九、十、十一而四本作「十」:照四本改,就把並存的兩讀變成唯一的定讀,故從底本並記異讀。
還有兩件小事該記著:三杖與杖影一喻分兩層,杖是四大、影是所造色,影的結構全由杖出;眼十之三剎那同時(初壞·第二老·第三起)而接縫「不現世間知」,論文改以江流、燈焰二喻狀其相續。
The preceding unit completed an inventory of thirty forms. This unit asks how the four great elements differ from their derived forms, then introduces five ways of reading that inventory and immediately applies the first two.
The key observation is that nearly every cluster-name carries a number, and that number is not an ordinal. It is the number of qualities contained in the cluster.
Eye-ten, ear-ten, life-faculty-nine, pure-eight, pure-bodily-intimation-nine, pure-verbal-intimation-seven, and light-verbal-intimation-eleven are not tenth, ninth, or eighth items. Eye-ten is so named because “these ten qualities arise together and are inseparable”; life-faculty-nine has nine qualities; pure-eight has eight. The final number is content, not position.
Read this way, the structure becomes clear. The passage is an account book: a name stands on the left and a number on the right. Its work is to pack the same thirty forms into boxes again and again, reporting the contents each time.
Three Sticks and Their Shadows: A Diagram of the Passage
The opening answer says, “the four great elements arise together dependent on the four great elements; derived form arises dependent on the four great elements” 〔T32 446b01–02〕. The elements mutually support one another; derived form depends on them, but the relation does not reverse. The difference lies in the direction of one word: dependence.
The treatise then uses one image in two layers: “as three sticks can stand leaning together, so the four great elements should be understood” 〔T32 446b03〕; “as the shadows of three sticks lean together, so derived form should be understood; this is called the difference” 〔T32 446b04–05〕.
Three sticks stand only by supporting one another: the four elements. Their shadows also appear to lean together, but a shadow supports neither another shadow nor the sticks; its entire structure comes from the sticks. One image contains two levels—stick and shadow—and all the shadow’s structure is given by the sticks. “Three sticks” occurs only twice in the treatise, once for each level here.
This image assigns the work that follows. If all the shadows derive from the sticks, one must ask where each comes from and which others remain bound with it. Tracing its source is “what brings it forth”; seeing what stays bound is “cluster.”
Five Ways and the First Two
“With regard to these thirty forms, the meditator can know what distinguishes them in five ways” 〔T32 446b05〕. The thirty carry forward the previous unit’s total. The five ways are “through what brings them forth, through clusters, through birth, through varieties, and through unity” 〔T32 446b06〕. This unit applies only the first two.
What Brings Them Forth: Six Boxes Holding Thirty
The first way distributes form by its conditions. Six groups follow in the same syntax.
Nine forms are brought forth by kamma—the five internal bases, two sex faculties, life faculty, and domain form 〔T32 446b07〕. Two are brought forth by mind: “bodily and verbal intimation” 〔T32 446b08–09〕. One is brought forth by mind at a time: “the sound base” 〔T32 446b09–10〕. Four are brought forth by time, mind, and food: lightness, softness, adaptability, and sleep 〔T32 446b10〕. Twelve are brought forth by four conditions 〔T32 446b11〕. Two have nothing that brings them forth: “aging and impermanence of form” 〔T32 446b13–14〕.
Nine plus two plus one plus four plus twelve plus two is exactly thirty. Six boxes contain the whole inventory, with nothing left over.
One sentence is added: “Further, arising conditions aging, and aging conditions impermanence” 〔T32 446b14〕. Although aging and impermanence were said to have nothing that brings them forth, the text separately connects them through a succession of conditions, outside the sixfold distribution.
The Previous Unit’s Reading Practice Is Needed at Once
The fifth group announces twelve, but punctuation divides it into only seven expressions. Its final string is “arising-form-morsel-food-four-elements” 〔T32 446b12–13〕.
This is the same kind of compression seen one unit earlier. There “impermanence-bolus-food-domain form” concealed three items; here six characters conceal six: arising of form, morsel food, and the four elements. Seven minus one plus six equals twelve.
The preceding unit taught us to count the individual explanations before the heading and to record a discrepancy without silently repunctuating the source. Its first application is already here. The received string remains unchanged, while the fact that all six group totals add to thirty supplies evidence for the twelve-item reading.
Clusters: Twenty-Seven Boxes
The second way asks which forms arise bound together. “Nine clusters are brought forth by kamma, nine by mind, six by time, and three by food” 〔T32 446b15–16〕. Nine plus nine plus six plus three gives twenty-seven.
The nine kamma-born clusters are “eye-ten, ear-ten, nose-ten, tongue-ten, body-ten, female-faculty-ten, male-faculty-ten, domain-ten, and life-faculty-nine” 〔T32 446b17–18〕. This list proves that the suffix is not an ordinal: eight items carry “ten,” while the ninth carries “nine.” The suffix counts qualities.
One Moment inside the Eye-Ten
Only the eye-ten receives a detailed explanation; the rest are to be understood extensively from it.
First come the ten qualities: “these ten qualities arise together and are inseparable; this is called a cluster” 〔T32 446b20–21〕. Their names appear in “dependent on the four elements, visible form, odor, taste, touch, life faculty, and eye-purity” 〔T32 446b19–20〕. Four more qualities—arising, aging, impermanence, and space—arise together with the cluster 〔T32 446b22〕.
The text then counts a moment. When one eye-ten reaches aging it gives rise to a second; when the second reaches aging it gives rise to a third. “The first ten breaks apart, the second ten ages, and the third ten arises; together they make one moment” 〔T32 446b27–28〕.
Three eye-tens—one breaking, one aging, one arising—jointly constitute one moment. They are not three moments arranged in sequence but three levels within one moment.
The treatise then says plainly, “the interval cannot be known; because the moment is light and swift, it does not appear to worldly knowledge” 〔T32 446b28–29〕. The seam cannot be seen. “A moment is light and swift” occurs only here in the treatise.
What is offered in place of a visible seam? Continuity: “one sees the continuity of the eye like the flow of a river or the continuity of a lamp flame” 〔T32 446b29–446c01〕. What is seen is a flow, not its joints. The treatise offers no microscope for the seam, but two similes for continuity. “River flow” occurs only here; “lamp flame” occurs four times, first here and three times in the final chapter.
Pause: May the “Seven” Be Corrected?
The nine mind-born clusters include pure-eight, pure-bodily-intimation-nine, pure-verbal-intimation-seven, pure-lightness-nine, light-bodily-intimation-ten, light-verbal-intimation-eleven, pure-eye-nine, eye-bodily-intimation-ten, and eye-verbal-intimation-eleven.
Pause at the third: “pure-verbal-intimation-seven” 〔T32 446c04〕.
The neighboring suffixes are nine, ten, and eleven. A critical note records that all four Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses read “ten” instead of “seven.”
May the edition therefore change it to ten?
It may not. Two facts are verifiable: the base has seven and all four witnesses have ten. The treatise does not say which came first, and the same name does not recur for comparison. Changing it would turn two coexisting readings into one exclusive decision and erase the evidence of disagreement. The body therefore follows the base “seven,” while the witness reading is recorded without adjudication.
The same restraint governs “those ten are named the pure-eight” 〔T32 446c07〕. The immediately preceding sentence says, “these eight qualities arise together and are inseparable” 〔T32 446c06–07〕, yet no note explains “those ten.” It is preserved. The first mind-born item is “pure-eight meaning” 〔T32 446c03〕, while the time- and food-born lists say simply “pure-eight” 〔T32 446c15·446c17〕. The extra word “meaning” is not explained and is not deleted.
The Moment of the Pure-Eight Is Not the Moment of the Eye-Ten
The pure-eight should be read beside the eye-ten. Four qualities “arise following it” 〔T32 446c09〕; the eye-ten passage says they “arise together with the cluster” 〔T32 446b22〕. The difference in wording is retained.
Its account of a moment also changes. When a pure-eight breaks it arises with a second mind; when the second pure-eight arises, the first has broken. The pure-lightness-nine, pure-eye-nine, and six intimation clusters are “not the first breaking, not the second arising, and have no one moment.” The passage then inserts its only self-posed question: “Why? One mind does not bring forth two intimations” 〔T32 446c13–14〕.
The kamma-born eye-ten has three simultaneous levels; the mind-born pure-eight does not. The text marks the difference and goes no further.
Closing: Time, Food, and the Life-Nine-Heavenly Cluster
The six time-born clusters are “pure-eight, pure-sound-nine, pure-lightness-nine, light-sound-ten, pure-eye-nine, and eye-sound-ten” 〔T32 446c15–16〕, with two external clusters added. The three food-born clusters are pure-eight, pure-lightness-nine, and pure-eye-nine.
The close turns to realms: “the life-nine-heavenly cluster is formed in the sense realm and at the site of kamma” 〔T32 446c19–20〕; eight clusters live by longevity; the nose, tongue, body, sex faculties, the three beginning with lightness, and sleep have no such cluster in the form realm; “in nonperception and the Brahmā realm, everything enters the body, and by this it lives” 〔T32 446c21–22〕.
“Life-nine-heavenly cluster” occurs twice, and the character translated “heavenly” has different critical evidence at the two points: only the Palace witness reads “none” at the first, while all four witnesses omit it at the second. Both base readings and both sets of evidence are retained.
Carry away three things. One observation: a number suffixed to a cluster-name counts its qualities, not its ordinal position. One reading practice: where an announced total and the punctuated list disagree, count the realized items first; the twelve-form group contains a compressed six-item string, and the six group totals independently add to thirty. One place to pause: the base’s “pure-verbal-intimation-seven” is “ten” in all four witnesses. Replacing it would erase a genuine two-reading state, so both remain visible.
Remember two images as well. Three sticks and their shadows divide elements from derived form: all the shadow’s structure comes from the sticks. In the eye-ten, one moment contains a first ten breaking, a second aging, and a third arising; because the seam cannot appear to worldly knowledge, the treatise speaks instead of river flow and lamp flame.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Differences among Forms, Their Arising, and Clusters · Exposition · Summer 2026
色法之生、種種與一種The Birth, Varieties, and Unity of Form
全文五層 →Full five layers →上一單元用掉五行的前兩件——令起與聚。這一單元把剩下三件一次做完:以生、以種種、以一種;做完,色陰就收了。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段把多組自報之數排成可直接驗算的清單。
種種一行把一切色切了六次:大細、內外、命根不命根、受非受有壞、可見不可見三支、自性形相分別四支。六次切法所依的角度全不相同,可是每一次切完,把各支所報的數相加——十二加十八、五加二十五、八加二十二、九加九加十二、一加十一加十八、十九加七加三加一——六次都是三十。
而前面以生一行的十二個受生位,也一樣加得出來:胎生三十色是處十、身十、根十三聚;欲界化生滿根七十色是七聚各十;梵天四十九色是處十、眼十、耳十、身十再加命根九;無想天九色就是命根九一聚。連「除眼十」「除耳十」那些減法,減下來的數也一分不差。
這一段之所以值得慢讀,就在這裡:它把三十這個數,翻來覆去地驗了十八次。
以生:十二個位,一張出生時的清單
「問:云何以生?答:如男女入胎」〔T32 446c23〕——以生這一行,問的是受生那一剎那起幾個色。
答案是十二個位,從多到少排下來。胎生的男女,「於剎那生三十色起,所謂處十、身十、或女根十或男根十」〔T32 446c23–25〕;不男不女的少一聚,「不男不女二十色起」〔T32 446c25〕。到了欲界化生而諸根具足的,一下子跳到七十——「於欲界化生,滿根入男女,於生剎那七十色起」〔T32 446c25–26〕,因為眼耳鼻舌四聚一起現成。
然後論文開始做減法,而且做得極省:「或於惡趣化生生盲女人男人,於其生剎那六十色起,除眼十」〔T32 446c28–29〕——不重列其餘六聚,只說減掉哪一聚。生聾的同理。「生盲聾人五十色起,除眼十、耳十」〔T32 447a01–02〕,減兩聚。「及劫初人,於其生剎那六十色起,除男女根」〔T32 447a03–04〕。一路減到「或盲聾非男非女,四十色起」〔T32 447a06–07〕,這時才又重列一次:處十、身十、鼻十、舌十。
最後兩位換了界地。「梵天於其生剎那,四十九色起」〔T32 447a07–08〕——處十、眼十、耳十、身十,再加命根九。這是本段唯一不是十的倍數的數,因為命根那一聚本來就是九不是十。「無想天眾生於其生剎那,九色起,命根九」〔T32 447a09–10〕——只剩一聚。
十二個位排完,論文只說一句「如是以生可知」〔T32 447a10〕,不作結論、不作評價。它給的是一張表,不是一套教理。
以種種:六把刀,同一塊料
種種這一行的體例極整齊:先報一支的數與名,再綴一句「以某某義」點出判準。
第一切是粗細:「於是十二色大,內外色入,以有對義」〔T32 447a11–12〕、「餘十八色細,以無對義」〔T32 447a12〕——判準是有對無對。第二切是內外:「復二種色,所謂內、外」〔T32 447a12–13〕、「於是五色成內眼等五入,以有境界義」〔T32 447a13–14〕——判準是有無境界。第三切是根與非根:「復有二種色,命根、不命根」〔T32 447a14–15〕、「於是八色名根,五內、女根、男根、命根,以依義」〔T32 447a15–16〕——判準是依與不依。
第四切分三支:「一切色成三種,所謂受色、非受色、有壞色」〔T32 447a17–18〕,判準是業報所成與否,「餘十二色有壞,彼以二種義」〔T32 447a21〕。第五切也是三支:「復有三種色,所謂可見有對、非可見有對、不可見無對」〔T32 447a21–23〕,判準是見與觸。第六切分四支:「一切色成四種,所謂自性色、形色、相色、分別色」〔T32 447a26–27〕,判準是畢竟、變、有為相、聚分別。
六把刀的刀口各不相同,切的卻是同一塊料。這一點與品十說慧時的十一種分類同一手法——只是那裡切的是慧,這裡切的是色;而這裡多了一件那裡沒有的東西:每一次切完都報數,於是每一次都可以驗算。
讀法:拿加法讀這一段
前兩個單元交出的讀法是「先數逐釋、再校標列」,用在標與釋不齊的地方。到這一單元,同一件工具翻過來用:
凡見一組「幾色幾色」的分派,就把它加起來,對總數。
加得攏,說明壓縮處你讀對了;加不攏,就回查是否有一串字被當成了一個目。
本段正好給了一個現成的例子。第六切的第一支是「於是十九自性色」〔T32 447a27–28〕,而逐目作「餘十二大色,女根、男根、命根、水界揣食處色」〔T32 447a28–29〕以下。十二加女男命三根是十五,再加末目一是十六——差三個。差在「水界揣食處色」六個字上:須讀作水界、揣食、處色三目,十六加三,才是十九。
這已經是第三次了。11-01 的「無常揣食處色」藏三目、11-02 的「色生揣食四界」藏六目、這裡的「水界揣食處色」藏三目——三處都含「揣食」二字,三處都是把幾個色目連寫成一串。本編三處都照原字錄、不代加頓號;而三處都靠所報之數把它還原。
第四切裡還有一個小陷阱,不是壓縮,是句號。「九色不受,聲入、身作、口作色、輕色、軟色、堪受持色、老色」〔T32 447a19–20〕——數到這裡只有七目,而句子在此打了句號;下一句才是「無常及眠,非業報所成義」〔T32 447a20–21〕。七加二,才是九。目數跨過了一個句號。照錄不代移。
停一下:校本記了一個異讀,卻沒有採它
第六切的自性色,末目底本作「眠色」〔T32 447a29〕。而校本在此出了一條記錄:麗本作「眼色」。
在這裡停下來問一句:校本既然記了,本編要不要跟著改?
不改。而理由不在「異讀一律不從」這種籠統的規矩上,在一個很具體的分別上——校本記下一個異讀,與校本採用一個異讀,是兩件事。
這一條,校本只是把麗本之字記在旁邊,正文之字並未更動;也就是說,校本自己並沒有判定麗讀為是。這種地方本編照著正文走,把麗讀並記在考據裡。
另一種情形則相反:校本不只記,而且把正文之字換掉了,並註明所據之本。那時正文所呈之字已經不是大正之字,本編就從校本已定之讀,並在考據裡把大正原字、校本所改之字與其所據三項並列,明說「本文不從大正」。下一個單元正好有兩例——「柂」與「墯」二字,校本都已改了正文,大正原作「施」「墮」。
兩種處理看似一從一不從,其實是同一條規矩:以校本正文所呈之字為準,而把它與大正的異同全部攤在考據裡。本編不做的,是在讀者看不見的地方替校本多判一次,或替大正多爭一次。
(這條分別本身也提醒讀者一件事:見到「某本作某」的校記,先看它是「記」還是「改」。記與改,在校本裡是不同的動作。)
順帶記著另外兩處字面不齊:第五切標作「非可見有對」,而逐釋作「十一色不可見有對」〔T32 447a24〕——標與釋一字之差,照錄不代正。第六切之末,「一色,分別色,所謂虛空界,以聚分別義」〔T32 447b02–03〕之後接「於是自性色,彼成分別,餘無分別」〔T32 447b03–04〕——同一個「分別」,前句是一個色目的名字,後句是自性色的能,二處所指不一。
判準都掛在句尾那一綴上
六切之中還有一件事值得看:每一支的判準,都不在句首,在句尾。
「於是十二色大,內外色入,以有對義」〔T32 447a11–12〕——先報數、再列名,最後才用一個「以某某義」把判準交出來。細色是無對義,內色是有境界義、外色是無境界義,八根是依義、其餘二十二是無依義,受色是業報所成義。到第六切,自性色是「以畢竟義」,形色是「以變」,相色是「以有為相義」,分別色是「以聚分別義」。
讀這一行,眼睛要往句尾看。名目只告訴你分了幾堆,句尾那一綴才告訴你憑什麼分。若只讀名目,六切看起來像六張互不相干的表;一路讀句尾,才看得出六次用的是六個不同的準繩——有對、有境界、有依、有業報、可見可觸、畢竟不變。
而第六切的三支小目,論文列得特別實。「七形色,所謂身作口作色、輕色、軟色、堪受持色、受色、相續自性色,以變」〔T32 447a29–447b01〕——七目逐一數得出來,與所標相符;末目「相續自性色」這個名字,本段只出現這一次,論文不更釋。「三相色,色生、色老、色無常,以有為相義」〔T32 447b02〕,三目也與所標相符。「一色,分別色,所謂虛空界,以聚分別義」〔T32 447b02–03〕,只有一目。
兩處校記,與一段沒有譬喻的文字
本段的校記只有四條,除了前面說的「眠/眼」之外,另有兩條該記著。
一條在受生那一行:「滿根入男女,於生剎那」〔T32 446c26〕之處,宮本作「生於女」而底本作「女於生」——三個字全同,只是次序不同,而次序一動,句讀就跟著動。並錄不判,本文從底本。
另一條在最末那串判語裡:「有漏、有縛、有結、有流、有厄、有蓋」〔T32 447b06–07〕的「厄」字,宋、元、明、宮四本作「軛」。這一條有意思的地方在於——同一個字的同一種異讀,前面品十說世慧時也出現過〔T32 445a07〕,兩處的校記完全一樣。可核的只是這件事;至於是同一個傳寫習慣所致,還是各自為之,本編不代考定。
最後記一件否定的事實:本段一個譬喻也沒有。十二個受生位、六把刀、一串判語,全靠數目與判準推進,不借一個物象。這與前一單元的三杖、江流、燈焰恰成對照——同一品之內,相鄰兩段,一段全是喻,一段一喻不立。如實記之,不由此另立體例之說。
以一種:一串沒有數的判語
最後一行忽然變了臉。「問:云何以一種當分別?答:一切色非因非無因」〔T32 447b05–06〕——這一段不報數、不設分支、不逐項釋義,只是一串判語連下:非因非無因、因不相應,有緣有為、世所攝,「有漏、有縛、有結、有流、有厄、有蓋」〔T32 447b06–07〕、所觸有趣、有煩惱,無記無事、非心數、心不相應,「小欲界繫不定非乘」〔T32 447b08–09〕,不與樂共起、不與苦共起、不苦不樂共起,不令聚非不令聚,非學非非學,收於「非見所斷、非思惟所斷」〔T32 447b10–11〕。
前面兩行是把三十色拆開來看,這一行是把三十色合起來看——合起來看時,它們共有的性質是一長串「非」與「不」。
這裡有一條可核的線索值得記著:「有漏、有縛、有結、有流、有厄、有蓋」這一組詞幹,與品十說世慧時的九目〔T32 445a06–07〕是同一組;那裡列九目,這裡只用了幾個。同一組詞幹在兩品用而目數不齊,本編照錄不代補。
色陰到此為止
「如是以一種所勝可知。此謂色陰」〔T32 447b11–12〕——一句收住。
回頭看色陰這一整塊:從 11-01 的三十色清冊起,到 11-02 的令起與聚,到本段的生、種種、一種,五行走完、色陰講畢。五方便的第一項「陰方便」,才講完它的第一陰。受、想、行、識四陰在後面。
而色陰之所以佔這麼大的篇幅,本段自己不解釋。可核的只是體量:一陰用了三個單元,其餘四陰另有安排。
帶走三件:一個所見——種種一行把一切色切了六次(大細·內外·命根不命根·受非受有壞·可見三支·自性形相分別四支),六次各支相加皆為三十;以生一行十二位之數亦逐一可加。一個讀法——凡見一組「幾色幾色」的分派,加起來對總數;加不攏就回查是否有一串字被當成一個目(本段「水界揣食處色」藏三目,是本論第三次同形壓縮)。一處停問——校本記下麗本之「眼」卻未採它,本編要不要跟著改?不改:校本「記」一個異讀與「採」一個異讀是兩件事,記而未採者正文不動;已採者(例見下一單元之「柂」「墯」)正文所呈已非大正之字,本編從之並註「本文不從大正」。
還有兩件小事該記著:「九色不受」之九目跨過底本一個句號(七目在前、「無常及眠」二目在後),照錄不代移;第五切標作「非可見有對」而逐釋作「不可見有對」,一字之差照錄不代正。
The preceding unit used the first two of the five ways—what brings form forth and its clusters. This unit completes the remaining three in one sweep: through birth, through varieties, and through unity. Once they are complete, the aggregate of form closes.
The central observation can be stated first: the passage arranges many sets of self-reported numbers into lists that can be checked directly.
The varieties section cuts all form six times: gross and subtle, internal and external, faculty and nonfaculty, received and unreceived and vulnerable, three divisions by visibility and resistance, and four divisions into intrinsic and shaped and characteristic and differentiating form. The six cuts proceed from entirely different angles, yet after each one the reported numbers in its branches add up as follows: twelve plus eighteen, five plus twenty-five, eight plus twenty-two, nine plus nine plus twelve, one plus eleven plus eighteen, and nineteen plus seven plus three plus one—all six make thirty.
The twelve rebirth positions in the preceding birth section can likewise be added up. Thirty forms in womb birth comprise three clusters: domain-ten, body-ten, and one sex-faculty-ten. A complete spontaneous birth in the sense realm has seven clusters of ten. Brahmā has domain-ten, eye-ten, ear-ten, and body-ten, plus life-faculty-nine, making forty-nine. A being in the heaven of nonperception has one cluster, life-faculty-nine, making nine. Even the subtractions of “excluding eye-ten” and “excluding ear-ten” leave totals that agree exactly.
This is why the passage merits a slow reading: it tests the number thirty again and again, eighteen times in all.
Through Birth: Twelve Positions and One Rebirth Inventory
“Question: How through birth? Answer: when a male or female enters the womb” 〔T32 446c23〕—this way asks how many forms arise at the very instant of rebirth.
The answer lays out twelve positions, descending from more to fewer. For a womb-born male or female, “at that moment thirty forms arise: domain-ten, body-ten, and either female-faculty-ten or male-faculty-ten” 〔T32 446c23–25〕. One neither male nor female lacks one cluster: “for one neither male nor female, twenty forms arise” 〔T32 446c25〕. Complete spontaneous birth in the sense realm jumps at once to seventy—“for spontaneous birth in the sense realm, with the faculties complete and entering as male or female, seventy forms arise at the birth moment” 〔T32 446c25–26〕—because the eye, ear, nose, and tongue clusters are all present together.
The treatise then begins to subtract, and does so with great economy: “for a woman or man spontaneously born blind in a bad destination, sixty forms arise at the birth moment, excluding eye-ten” 〔T32 446c28–29〕. It does not relist the other six clusters, but says only which one is removed. Birth as deaf works in the same way. “One born blind and deaf has fifty forms, excluding eye-ten and ear-ten” 〔T32 447a01–02〕, removing two clusters. “And for a person at the beginning of an eon, sixty forms arise at the birth moment, excluding the sex faculty” 〔T32 447a03–04〕. The subtractions continue until “one blind, deaf, and neither male nor female has forty forms” 〔T32 447a06–07〕; only then are the remaining four clusters listed again: domain-ten, body-ten, nose-ten, and tongue-ten.
The last two positions move to other realms. “For a Brahmā, forty-nine forms arise at the birth moment” 〔T32 447a07–08〕—domain-ten, eye-ten, ear-ten, and body-ten, plus life-faculty-nine. This is the only number in the passage that is not a multiple of ten, because the life cluster has nine rather than ten. “For a being in the heaven of nonperception, nine forms arise at the birth moment: life-faculty-nine” 〔T32 447a09–10〕—only one cluster remains.
After setting out the twelve positions, the treatise says only, “thus through birth it can be known” 〔T32 447a10〕. It draws no conclusion and offers no evaluation. What it gives is a table, not a doctrine.
Through Varieties: Six Knives, One Material
The form of the varieties section is exact: first it reports the number and name of a branch, then appends a phrase such as “because of such-and-such criterion” to disclose the standard.
The first cut is gross and subtle: “here twelve forms are gross, the internal and external form bases, because they are resistant” 〔T32 447a11–12〕, while “the remaining eighteen forms are subtle because they are nonresistant” 〔T32 447a12〕. The criterion is resistance or nonresistance. The second cut is internal and external: “again, form is of two kinds, internal and external” 〔T32 447a12–13〕, and “here five forms are internal, the five bases beginning with the eye, because they have an objective domain” 〔T32 447a13–14〕. The criterion is the presence or absence of an objective domain. The third cut is faculty and nonfaculty: “again, form is of two kinds, faculty and nonfaculty” 〔T32 447a14–15〕, and “here eight forms are called faculties—the five internal, female, male, and life faculties—because they serve as supports” 〔T32 447a15–16〕. The criterion is serving or not serving as a support.
The fourth cut has three branches: “all form is of three kinds: received, unreceived, and vulnerable form” 〔T32 447a17–18〕. Its criterion is whether form is produced as karmic result, and “the remaining twelve forms are vulnerable, in two senses” 〔T32 447a21〕. The fifth cut likewise has three branches: “again, form is of three kinds: visible and resistant, nonvisible and resistant, and invisible and nonresistant” 〔T32 447a21–23〕. Its criterion is seeing and touching. The sixth cut has four branches: “all form is of four kinds: intrinsic, shaped, characteristic, and differentiating form” 〔T32 447a26–27〕. Its criteria are ultimacy, change, conditioned characteristic, and differentiation of clusters.
The six knives have different edges, yet they cut the same material. This is the same method used for the eleven classifications of wisdom in Chapter Ten—there the object cut is wisdom, here it is form. But here there is one thing not found there: every cut reports its numbers, so every cut can be checked by addition.
Reading Practice: Read This Passage with Addition
The first two units gave us the practice “count the individual explanations first, then check the heading list,” for places where heading and explanation do not agree. In this unit, the same tool is turned around:
Whenever a distribution says “so many forms, so many forms,” add them and compare the sum with the total.
If the sum works, the compression has been read correctly. If it does not, go back and ask whether a string of characters has been mistaken for a single item.
The passage supplies a ready example. The first branch of the sixth cut is “here nineteen are intrinsic forms” 〔T32 447a27–28〕, while the itemized text reads “the remaining twelve gross forms, female faculty, male faculty, life faculty, water-element-morsel-food-domain form” 〔T32 447a28–29〕 and continues below. Twelve plus the three female, male, and life faculties makes fifteen; adding the one final item makes sixteen—three short. The shortage lies in the six-character string “water-element-morsel-food-domain form”: it must be read as three items—water element, morsel food, and domain form. Sixteen plus three makes nineteen.
This is already the third occurrence. In 11-01, “impermanence-morsel-food-domain form” conceals three items; in 11-02, “arising-form-morsel-food-four-elements” conceals six; here, “water-element-morsel-food-domain form” conceals three. All three contain “morsel food,” and all three run several form-items together in a single string. This edition records all three in their original wording and does not add commas; in all three cases, the reported number restores their structure.
The fourth cut contains another small trap, this time not compression but a period. “Nine forms are unreceived: sound, bodily intimation, verbal-intimation form, lightness, softness, adaptability, and aging” 〔T32 447a19–20〕—at that point there are only seven items, and the sentence ends there. Only the next sentence gives “impermanence and sleep, because they are not produced as karmic result” 〔T32 447a20–21〕. Seven plus two makes nine. The inventory crosses a period. It is recorded as it stands; this edition does not move it.
Pause: The Critical Edition Records a Variant but Does Not Adopt It
In the sixth cut’s intrinsic forms, the final item in the base is “sleep form” 〔T32 447a29〕. The critical edition records a note here: the Korean witness reads “eye form.”
Pause here and ask: since the critical edition records it, should this edition change the body to follow it?
No. The reason is not a blanket rule such as “variant readings are never followed,” but a precise distinction: for a critical edition to record a variant and for it to adopt a variant are two different things.
In this case, the critical edition merely places the Korean character beside the text; it does not change the character in the body. In other words, the critical edition itself has not judged the Korean reading to be correct. At such a place, this edition follows the body and records the Korean reading alongside it in the apparatus.
The opposite case is different: the critical edition not only records a reading but replaces the body’s character and identifies the witness on which it relies. The character displayed in the body is then no longer the Taishō character. This edition follows the reading settled by the critical edition and, in the apparatus, places the Taishō character, the critical edition’s replacement, and its witness side by side, stating explicitly, “the body does not follow Taishō.” The next unit contains exactly two examples—“柂” and “墯.” In both, the critical edition has changed the body; Taishō originally reads “施” and “墮.”
The two treatments may look like following in one case and refusing to follow in the other, but they are one rule: follow the character displayed in the critical text, and expose in the apparatus every difference between it and Taishō. What this edition does not do is make one more decision for the critical edition, or mount one more defense of Taishō, somewhere the reader cannot see.
(This distinction itself also reminds the reader of something: on encountering a note that “a certain witness reads a certain form,” first ask whether the critical edition merely “records” it or actually “changes” the text. Recording and changing are different acts within a critical edition.)
Two other surface discrepancies should be remembered. The heading of the fifth cut has “nonvisible and resistant,” while the itemized explanation has “eleven forms invisible and resistant” 〔T32 447a24〕. The heading and explanation differ by one character in the source; both are recorded as they stand, and this edition does not correct them. At the end of the sixth cut, “one form, differentiating form, namely the space element, because it differentiates clusters” 〔T32 447b02–03〕 is followed by “here intrinsic form becomes differentiating; the rest has no differentiation” 〔T32 447b03–04〕. The same term “differentiating” first names a form-item and then names a capacity of intrinsic form; the two occurrences have different referents.
Every Criterion Hangs from the Phrase at the End
There is one more thing to see in the six cuts: the criterion for each branch is not at the beginning of its sentence, but at the end.
“Here twelve forms are gross, the internal and external form bases, because they are resistant” 〔T32 447a11–12〕—the sentence first reports the number, then gives the names, and only at the end discloses the criterion with a phrase such as “because of such-and-such criterion.” Subtle form is classified by nonresistance; internal form by having an objective domain; external form by not having one; the eight faculties by serving as supports; the remaining twenty-two by not serving as supports; and received form by being produced as karmic result. In the sixth cut, intrinsic form closes with “because of ultimacy,” shaped form with “because it changes,” characteristic form with “because it is a conditioned characteristic,” and differentiating form with “because it differentiates clusters.”
To read this passage, the eye must travel to the end of the sentence. The names tell you how many piles have been made; the final phrase tells you what made the cut. If only the names are read, the six cuts look like six unrelated tables. Reading the endings all the way through reveals six different standards—resistance, objective domain, support, karmic result, visibility and tangibility, and ultimacy and nonchange.
The treatise lists the smaller branches of the sixth cut with particular concreteness. “Seven shaped forms: bodily and verbal intimation, lightness, softness, adaptability, received form, and continuity-intrinsic-form, because they change” 〔T32 447a29–447b01〕—all seven can be counted individually, in agreement with the announced number. The final name, “continuity-intrinsic-form,” occurs only here in the passage, and the treatise does not explain it further. “Three characteristic forms: arising, aging, and impermanence of form, because they are conditioned characteristics” 〔T32 447b02〕 likewise contains three items, agreeing with its heading. “One form, differentiating form, namely the space element, because it differentiates clusters” 〔T32 447b02–03〕 contains only one.
Two Critical Notes, and a Passage without a Simile
The passage has only four critical notes. Besides the “sleep/eye” reading already discussed, two others should be kept in view.
One occurs in the birth section at “with the faculties complete, entering as male or female, at the birth moment” 〔T32 446c26〕. The Palace witness has the order “birth–at–female,” while the base has “female–at–birth”—the same three characters, only their order differs. Once the order changes, the segmentation changes with it. Both readings are recorded without adjudication; the body follows the base.
Another occurs in the final string of predicates. In “with influxes, bonds, knots, currents, peril, and hindrances” 〔T32 447b06–07〕, the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses read “yoke” for the base “peril.” What is interesting is that the same variant of the same character appeared earlier in Chapter Ten’s treatment of worldly wisdom 〔T32 445a07〕, and the critical notes at the two places are identical. That is all that can be checked. Whether both arose from the same scribal habit or each arose independently, this edition does not determine.
Finally, one negative fact should be recorded: not a single simile occurs in this passage. Twelve rebirth positions, six knives, and one string of predicates all proceed through numbers and criteria, without borrowing a single image. This contrasts with the three sticks, river flow, and lamp flame of the preceding unit: within the same chapter, one neighboring passage is filled with similes and the next establishes none. This is recorded just as it stands; no further claim about the treatise’s compositional practice is drawn from it.
Through Unity: A String of Predicates without a Number
The final way suddenly changes its face. “Question: How should it be distinguished as one kind? Answer: all form is not a cause and not without cause” 〔T32 447b05–06〕. This passage reports no number, sets out no branches, and explains no item individually. It simply links one predicate after another: not a cause and not without cause, not associated with a cause; conditioned, constructed, and included in the world; “with influxes, bonds, knots, currents, peril, and hindrances” 〔T32 447b06–07〕; touched, with a destination, and defiled; indeterminate and inactive, not a mental factor and not associated with mind; “small, bound to the sense realm, uncertain, not a vehicle” 〔T32 447b08–09〕; not arising together with pleasure, not arising together with pain, and arising together with neither-pain-nor-pleasure; not causing aggregation and not not causing aggregation; neither in training nor not in training; and it closes with “not abandoned by seeing and not abandoned by cultivation” 〔T32 447b10–11〕.
The preceding two ways divide the thirty forms; this way gathers them back together—when gathered, the qualities they share form a long chain of “non-” and “not.”
There is one verifiable internal thread here worth remembering. The stems in “with influxes, bonds, knots, currents, peril, and hindrances” are the same group used for the nine items in Chapter Ten’s treatment of worldly wisdom 〔T32 445a06–07〕; there nine items are listed, while here only some are used. The same stems appear in two chapters but not in equal number. This edition records what is present and does not supply what is absent.
The Aggregate of Form Ends Here
“Thus what distinguishes form through unity can be known. This is called the aggregate of form” 〔T32 447b11–12〕—one sentence brings the treatment to a close.
Looking back across the whole treatment of the aggregate of form: 11-01 began with the inventory of thirty forms, 11-02 treated what brings them forth and their clusters, and this unit completes birth, varieties, and unity. All five ways have now been traversed, and the aggregate of form is complete. The first item under the five means, the “method concerning the aggregates,” has completed only its first aggregate. Feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness follow.
The passage does not explain why the aggregate of form takes so much space. Only the scale can be established: one aggregate occupies three units; the other four are arranged separately.
Carry away three things. One observation: the varieties section cuts all form six times—gross and subtle · internal and external · faculty and nonfaculty · received and unreceived and vulnerable · three visibility divisions · four intrinsic, shaped, characteristic, and differentiating divisions—and the branches of all six cuts add to thirty; the numbers for the twelve rebirth positions can likewise be added up one by one. One reading practice: whenever a distribution says “so many forms, so many forms,” add the branches and compare them with the total. If the sum fails, ask whether a string has been taken as a single item; here “water-element-morsel-food-domain form” conceals three items, the treatise’s third compression of the same kind. One place to pause: the critical edition records the Korean witness’s “eye” but does not adopt it. Should this edition nevertheless change the body? No. For the critical edition to “record” a variant and to “adopt” one are different things: a reading recorded but not adopted leaves the body unchanged; when one is adopted—as with “柂” and “墯” in the next unit—the displayed text is no longer the Taishō character, so this edition follows it and states that “the body does not follow Taishō.”
Remember two smaller matters as well. The nine items under “nine forms are unreceived” cross a period in the base—seven come before it, while “impermanence and sleep” come after it. They are recorded as they stand and not moved. The heading of the fifth cut has “nonvisible and resistant,” while its explanation has “invisible and resistant.” The one-character difference is recorded and not corrected.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · The Birth, Varieties, and Unity of Form · Exposition · Summer 2026
受陰與想陰The Aggregates of Feeling and Perception
全文五層 →Full five layers →色陰講了三個單元才收;到受陰、想陰,論文一陰只給一段,而且兩段用的是同一個結構。
先把所見說在前頭:兩陰都架了一把從一到七的梯子,而想陰在第三級與第四級各多架了一重。
受陰的梯子是一、二、三、四、五、六、七,一級一準,級級不重。想陰的梯子表面上也是一到七,可是數一數它實際排出的組數:一相、二相、不善三想、善三想、不知義四想、知義四想、毘尼五想、事六想、門七想——九組。三與四這兩級各出了兩組。
而多出來的那兩組不是隨手加的。想陰開頭第二級立的是「以黑白二相,謂顛倒想、不顛倒想」〔T32 447b26–27〕;往下三與四那兩重,正好一重顛倒、一重不顛倒——不善三想對善三想、不知義四想對知義四想。想陰用自己的梯子,把自己在第二級立下的那一對,走了兩遍。
受陰:一級一準,七級到頂
先看受陰。它的整齊在於:每一級都換一個準繩,而且明說是哪個準。
「問:云何受陰?答:以相一受,以彼心受持成一」〔T32 447b13〕——以相分,只有一。「由處二受,所謂身受、意受」〔T32 447b14〕——以處分,成二。「由自性三受,樂受、苦受、不苦不樂受」〔T32 447b14–15〕——以自性分,成三。「由法四受,善受、不善受、報受、事受」〔T32 447b15–16〕。「由根五受,樂根、苦根、喜根、憂根、捨根」〔T32 447b16–17〕。「由黑白六受,有漏樂受、無漏樂受」〔T32 447b17〕以下,把三受各配有漏無漏而成六。「由門七受,從眼觸生受」〔T32 447b19〕以下,以六根加意識界而成七。
相、處、自性、法、根、黑白、門——七個準,七個數,一一相配。這與前一單元的六切法是同一手法:料是同一塊,換刀而已。差別在那裡是六把刀切三十色、每次都得三十;這裡是七把刀切受,而每一把刀切出來的數,恰好就是這把刀的序位。
一百八:一個算得出來的數
七級之後,論文忽然跳到一百八。
「從意界觸生受。從意識界觸生受,以廣成一百八受」〔T32 447b20–22〕,接著列六目:「六依愛起受、六依出離起受」〔T32 447b22〕以下——依愛起、依出離起、依愛憂起、依出離憂起、依愛捨起、依出離捨起,每一目都冠一個「六」。
然後是收句:「此六六成三十六,於三時三三十六,此謂受陰」〔T32 447b24–25〕。
六個「六」是三十六,三時各一個三十六,就是一百八。這個數不是拿來背的,是拿來算的——論文把算式明明白白寫在收句裡。前一單元的讀法在這裡再一次用得上:見數就加(這裡是乘),加得攏,說明你把「六依」的六與六目的六分清楚了。
而受陰之末不以列目作結,改以算式作結——這是本段唯一一處以乘法收尾的地方。
停一下:同一級,兩種句讀
第七級有一個容易滑過去的地方,值得停下來。
「由門七受」標的是七,可是句子裡逐目數下去只有六個:從眼、從耳、從鼻、從舌、從身、從意界。數到「從意界觸生受」,底本打了一個句號。第七目「從意識界觸生受」在句號的另一邊,而且下半句立刻轉去講一百八。
到了想陰的同一級呢?「以由門七想,從眼觸生想」〔T32 447c06〕以下,一路列到「從意界觸生想、從意識界觸生想」〔T32 447c07–08〕——七目在一句之內列足,中間一個句號也沒有。
於是問題來了:兩陰同一級、同一組門、同樣標七,為什麼一處斷、一處不斷?
本段答不了。可核的只有三件事:受陰那一級的第七目在句號之後、想陰那一級的七目在同一句之內、兩處範圍內都沒有校記。是底本句讀本如此,還是傳寫致之,論文自身不足以判——本編兩處都照原字錄,不代移、不代考定。
值得附帶記著的是:同樣的跨句號,前一單元才剛出現過一次——「九色不受」〔T32 447a19〕列到「堪受持色、老色」〔T32 447a20〕就打句號,「無常及眠」在下一句。兩個單元之內兩見,形態相同。可核的是形態;成因不代考定。
想陰:顛倒與不顛倒,走了兩遍
想陰的九組,最見用心的是中間那四組。
三想的兩重是心行的顛倒與不顛倒:「以由不善三想,謂欲想、瞋恚想、害想」〔T32 447b27–28〕,對上「以由善三想,謂出離想、不瞋恚想、不害想」〔T32 447b28–29〕——欲對出離、瞋恚對不瞋恚、害對不害,三目一一相對。
四想的兩重則是見的顛倒與不顛倒:「以不知義性處門四想,謂不淨淨想、於苦樂想、於無常常想、於無我我想」〔T32 447b29–447c02〕,對上「以由知義性處四想,不淨想、苦想、無常想、無我想」〔T32 447c02–03〕。前一組每一句都以「於」字領起而作顛倒之陳;後一組每一句都是直陳。同樣四個題目,一組看反了,一組看正了。
(順帶一記:前組之名冠「不知義性處門」,後組冠「知義性處」,前組多一個「門」字。二名不齊,照錄不代齊。)
第五級又換了配法:「以由毘尼五想,於不淨淨想、於不淨不淨想、於淨不淨想、於淨淨想、疑想」〔T32 447c03–04〕——淨與不淨兩兩相配得四句,再加一個疑想成五。用的還是「淨/不淨」這一組詞,配法卻與上面四想那兩組都不一樣:那裡是顛倒與不顛倒的對照,這裡是四種可能加一個懸而未決。
最後兩級回到常軌:「以由事六想,色想、聲想、香想、味想、觸想、法想」〔T32 447c05〕以境分,門七想以根分。
兩個收句也不一樣
還有一處小地方。受陰收得極短,「此謂受陰」〔T32 447b25〕四個字接在算式之後就完了;想陰卻先加一句「如是種種想可知,此謂想陰」〔T32 447c08–09〕。
一處逕收,一處先總一句再收。這種參差本段到處都是——標七而逐目六、名多一「門」字、收句一長一短。本編一概照錄;它們合起來只證明一件事:這兩段不是照同一個模子填出來的,即使結構如此相像。
二陰在五陰裡的位置
回頭看位置。色陰用了三個單元,受陰、想陰合用一個單元;後面還有行陰與識陰。
而受、想二陰的講法與色陰完全不同:色陰講清冊、講因緣、講剎那、講受生位,處處是「有幾個」;受、想二陰則從頭到尾只做一件事——換準繩、報數目。不談所依之處,不談生起之緣,不出一個譬喻。
連著前一單元一起看,這已經是連續兩個單元一喻不立了。如實記之,不由此另立體例之說。
帶走三件:一個所見——二陰同架一至七之梯,而想陰於三與四兩級各多一重(不善三對善三、不知義四對知義四),正是它第二級所立「顛倒想、不顛倒想」之走兩遍。一個讀法——凡見論文自報大數而不列目(如一百八受),先找它的算式:本段「六六成三十六、於三時三三十六」把乘法寫在收句裡,算得攏即讀對。一處停問——同是「門七」一級,受陰之第七目落在句號之外而想陰七目在一句之內:二處俱無校記,是體例抑傳寫,論文自身不足以判,故照錄不代移。
還有兩件小事該記著:不知義四想與知義四想逐目一一相對(於不淨作淨對不淨想等),而毘尼五想用同一組「淨/不淨」卻換了配法;二陰之收句一逕收、一先總,句式不齊,照錄不代齊。
The aggregate of form took three units to complete. When the treatise reaches feeling and perception, it gives each aggregate only one paragraph, and the two paragraphs use the same structure.
Let us place the finding first: both aggregates set up a ladder from one to seven, while perception adds another layer at both the third and fourth rungs.
Feeling’s ladder is one, two, three, four, five, six, and seven: one criterion at each rung, with no rung repeated. Perception’s ladder also appears to run from one to seven, but count the groups it actually lays out: one characteristic, two characteristics, three unwholesome perceptions, three wholesome perceptions, four perceptions that do not know meaning, four perceptions that know meaning, five Vinaya perceptions, six perceptions by object, and seven perceptions by door—nine groups. Levels three and four each produce two groups.
Those two extra groups are not added casually. At the opening of the aggregate of perception, the second rung establishes “by two dark-and-bright characteristics, namely inverted perception and uninverted perception” 〔T32 447b26–27〕. The doubled layers at three and four then give one inverted and one uninverted group: the unwholesome three against the wholesome three, and the unknowing four against the knowing four. The aggregate of perception uses its own ladder to traverse twice the pair it established at the second rung.
Feeling: One Criterion at Each Rung, Seven Rungs to the Top
Consider feeling first. Its regularity lies in changing the criterion at every rung and explicitly naming each criterion.
“Question: What is the aggregate of feeling? Answer: by characteristic, one feeling; through that mind’s reception, it becomes one” 〔T32 447b13〕—divided by characteristic, there is only one. “By locus, two feelings, namely bodily feeling and mental feeling” 〔T32 447b14〕—divided by locus, there are two. “By intrinsic nature, three feelings: pleasant feeling, painful feeling, and neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling” 〔T32 447b14–15〕—divided by intrinsic nature, there are three. “By quality, four feelings: wholesome feeling, unwholesome feeling, resultant feeling, and functional feeling” 〔T32 447b15–16〕. “By faculty, five feelings: the faculties of pleasure, pain, joy, grief, and equanimity” 〔T32 447b16–17〕. From “by dark and bright, six feelings: pleasant feeling with influxes and pleasant feeling without influxes” 〔T32 447b17〕 onward, each of the three feelings is paired with influxes and without influxes to make six. “By door, seven feelings, beginning with feeling born of eye-contact” 〔T32 447b19〕 uses the six faculties together with the mind-consciousness element to make seven.
Characteristic, locus, intrinsic nature, quality, faculty, dark and bright, and door—seven criteria and seven numbers, matched one by one. This is the same method as the preceding unit’s six cuts: the material is the same, and only the knife changes. There, six knives cut the thirty forms and yield thirty each time. Here, seven knives cut feeling, and the number yielded by each knife happens to equal that knife’s position in the sequence.
One Hundred Eight: A Number That Can Be Calculated
After the seven rungs, the treatise suddenly jumps to one hundred eight.
“Feeling born of contact with the mind element. Feeling born of contact with the mind-consciousness element; in full, this makes one hundred eight feelings” 〔T32 447b20–22〕. It then lists six entries, beginning “six feelings arising dependent on craving, six feelings arising dependent on renunciation” 〔T32 447b22〕—arising dependent on craving, arising dependent on renunciation, grief arising dependent on craving, grief arising dependent on renunciation, equanimity arising dependent on craving, and equanimity arising dependent on renunciation. Each entry is headed by a “six.”
Then comes the closing line: “These six sixes make thirty-six; across three times there are three thirty-sixes; this is called the aggregate of feeling” 〔T32 447b24–25〕.
Six “sixes” make thirty-six, and one thirty-six at each of three times makes one hundred eight. This number is not merely to be memorized; it is to be calculated—the treatise writes the equation plainly in its closing line. The reading practice from the preceding unit applies again: when numbers appear, add them up—here, multiply them. If the total agrees, you have distinguished the six in each “six dependent on” category from the six categories themselves.
The aggregate of feeling therefore does not end with a list of items. It changes course and ends with an equation—the only place in this passage whose closure takes the form of multiplication.
Pause: One Rung, Two Ways of Punctuating It
The seventh rung contains an easily missed point and deserves a pause.
“Seven feelings by door” announces seven, but the sentence itself itemizes only six: those born of contact with the eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind element. The base text places a period after “feeling born of contact with the mind element.” The seventh item, “feeling born of contact with the mind-consciousness element,” stands on the other side of that period, and the rest of its sentence immediately turns to the one-hundred-eight scheme.
What happens at the same rung under perception? From “by door, seven perceptions, beginning with perception born of eye-contact” 〔T32 447c06〕, the list continues through “perception born of contact with the mind element, perception born of contact with the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 447c07–08〕—all seven items are completed within one sentence, without a period between them.
The question therefore arises: at the same rung in both aggregates, with the same set of doors and the same announced number seven, why is one list divided while the other is not?
This passage cannot answer. Only three things can be verified: the seventh item at this rung of feeling comes after a period; all seven items at this rung of perception remain in one sentence; and neither range carries a critical note. Whether this is simply how the base text was punctuated or arose through transmission, the treatise itself is insufficient to decide. This edition records both places as they stand and neither moves the item nor adjudicates the cause.
The same crossing of a period had just appeared in the preceding unit. “Nine forms are unreceived” 〔T32 447a19〕 reaches “adaptability and aging” 〔T32 447a20〕 and then places a period; “impermanence and sleep” begin the next sentence. The same shape appears twice within two units. The shape can be verified; its cause is not adjudicated here.
Perception: Inversion and Noninversion Traversed Twice
Among perception’s nine groups, the four middle groups reveal the most deliberate construction.
The two threefold layers are inversion and noninversion in mental activity: “by unwholesomeness, three perceptions, namely desire, ill will, and harming” 〔T32 447b27–28〕 stands against “by wholesomeness, three perceptions, namely renunciation, non-ill-will, and nonharming” 〔T32 447b28–29〕. Desire meets renunciation, ill will meets non-ill-will, and harming meets nonharming, item by item.
The two fourfold layers are inversion and noninversion in view: “by the domain-door of not knowing meaning, four perceptions, namely perceiving the impure as pure, suffering as pleasure, impermanence as permanent, and nonself as self” 〔T32 447b29–447c02〕 stands against “by the domain of knowing meaning, four perceptions: impurity, suffering, impermanence, and nonself” 〔T32 447c02–03〕. Each statement in the first group is introduced through “with regard to” and presents an inversion; each statement in the second group is direct. The same four subjects are seen backward in one group and rightly in the other.
(As a further detail, the first group’s name has “domain-door of not knowing meaning,” while the second has “domain of knowing meaning”; the first contains the additional word “door.” The two names are uneven. They are recorded as they stand and are not made uniform.)
The fifth rung changes the arrangement again: “by Vinaya, five perceptions: perceiving the impure as pure, the impure as impure, the pure as impure, the pure as pure, and doubt” 〔T32 447c03–04〕. Pairing pure and impure in every direction produces four statements, and adding doubt makes five. The vocabulary is still the same pair, “pure” and “impure,” but its arrangement differs from both fourfold groups above: there the contrast was between inversion and noninversion; here it is four possible combinations plus one unresolved doubt.
The final two rungs return to the regular pattern: “by object, six perceptions: visible form, sound, odor, taste, touch, and mental objects” 〔T32 447c05〕 divides according to objects, while the seven perceptions by door divide according to faculties.
The Two Closures Also Differ
There is one more small difference. Feeling closes very briefly: the four-character phrase “this is called the aggregate of feeling” 〔T32 447b25〕 follows the equation and ends the paragraph. Perception first adds a summary: “thus the varieties of perception can be known; this is called the aggregate of perception” 〔T32 447c08–09〕.
One closes directly; the other first summarizes and then closes. Such unevenness appears throughout the passage: seven are announced but six are itemized before a period, one name has an extra “door,” and one closing is longer than the other. This edition records all these forms as they stand; together they establish only one thing: these two paragraphs were not filled out from the same rigid template, even though their structures are so similar.
The Place of These Two Aggregates among the Five
Looking back at their position, the aggregate of form occupied three units, while feeling and perception share one unit. Formations and consciousness still follow.
The treatment of feeling and perception is entirely different from that of form. Form discusses inventories, conditions, moments, and positions of rebirth; everywhere the question is “how many?” Feeling and perception do only one thing from beginning to end—change the criterion and report the number. They do not discuss the places on which they depend, the conditions through which they arise, or a single simile.
Read together with the preceding unit, this makes two consecutive units without a simile. The fact is recorded as it stands, without deriving from it a further rule about the treatise’s form.
Carry away one observation: both aggregates set up a ladder from one to seven, but perception adds another layer at both three and four—the unwholesome three against the wholesome three, and the unknowing four against the knowing four—traversing twice the pair of “inverted perception and uninverted perception” established at its second rung. One reading practice: whenever the treatise reports a large total without listing every item, as with the one hundred eight feelings, first find its equation. Here, “six sixes make thirty-six; across three times there are three thirty-sixes” writes the multiplication into the closing line; if the total agrees, the passage has been read correctly. One place to pause: at the same rung of “seven by door,” feeling’s seventh item lies beyond a period, while perception’s seven items remain within one sentence. Neither place has a critical note; whether this reflects the text’s form or its transmission cannot be decided from the treatise itself, so the two are recorded as they stand and not moved.
Remember two smaller matters as well. The unknowing and knowing fours correspond item by item—as in perceiving the impure as pure against perception of impurity—while the Vinaya five rearranges the same pure-and-impure pair differently. The two aggregates also close differently, one directly and the other only after a summary; their formulas are uneven and are recorded without being made uniform.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · The Aggregates of Feeling and Perception · Exposition · Summer 2026
行陰諸法Qualities of the Aggregate of Formations
全文五層 →Full five layers →前兩個單元一個譬喻也沒有。到行陰,論文忽然一口氣連下三十二個譬。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段是一個模子灌到底——每一目都是「一義、一譬、一足處」三段;而模子上恰有兩處破口,都在讀者容易滑過去的地方。
三段是這樣的。「念者,是心守護,如持油鉢,彼四念處足處」〔T32 447c20–21〕——第一段說它是什麼(是心守護),第二段說它像什麼(如持油鉢),第三段說它立在哪裡(四念處)。「定者,是心專一,如殿裏燈,彼四禪足處」〔T32 447c21–22〕、「思者是心動,如作宅足種法,是其事門足處」〔T32 447c14–15〕,一律如此。三十二目,一目不缺。
而破口有二:首目沒有「足」字,足處的說法有兩種。下面分說。
先數一次:標二十九,釋三十二
標列從「問:云何行陰?答:觸、思、覺、觀、喜心、精進念、定、慧」〔T32 447c10–11〕起,一路頓號連下;界說是一句遮遣:「除受想一切心數法,行陰」〔T32 447c13〕——除掉色、受、想、識,剩下的心數法都是行陰。論文不報總數。
把標列逐目數一數,只得二十九詞。而逐釋自「於是觸者」〔T32 447c13〕起,一目一句地講到「無愧者」〔T32 448a17〕,實出三十二目。
差三個,差在三串連寫的字上:「喜心」是喜與心兩目,「精進念」是精進與念兩目,「調戲」是調與悔兩目。二十九減三加六,正得三十二。
這是本論第四次這樣壓縮了。11-01 的「無常揣食處色」、11-02 的「色生揣食四界」、11-03 的「水界揣食處色」,到這裡的「喜心」「精進念」「調戲」。前三次都靠論文自報的數還原;這一次論文不報數,靠的是逐釋自己把它拆開。
而第三串還多一層:標作「調戲」,逐釋卻是「調者,是心不寂寂,猶如沸水」〔T32 448a11–12〕與「悔者,是心退,如愛不淨」〔T32 448a12–13〕——不只析為二目,後半那個字也對不上(標作「戲」,釋作「悔」)。本編照錄不代正。
讀法:三段式要拆開讀
本段交出的讀法很具體:遇到「一義一譬一足處」這樣的三段式,把三段拆開來各問一次。
第一段答「它是什麼」,一律以「是心」領起——是心觸事、是心動、是心歡喜、是心守護、是心專一、是心見。論文把三十二個心數法全部安置在「心的某一種動作」上。
第二段答「它像什麼」。譬取的幾乎都是日常之物:日光觸壁、作宅、誦經、人得物、持油鉢、殿裏燈、人有眼、人執秤、人執柂、夏天熱的人洗冷水澡;不善法那邊則是沸水、瞋毒蛇、蛇藏蟄、栴陀羅人、惡王、盲人摸象。沒有一個譬要借天界或神變。
第三段答「它立在哪裡」。這一段最容易被跳過,其實資訊最密:念的足處是四念處,定的足處是四禪,慧的足處是四聖諦〔T32 447c22–23〕,不瞋的足處是四無量,欲的足處是四如意足。這一欄等於把行陰諸法一一接回本論前面講過的法門。而不善那邊也一樣有來歷:無明的足處是四顛倒〔T32 448a08–09〕,見的足處是「從他聞聲不正憶」〔T32 448a11〕,疑的足處是不正作意〔T32 448a13–14〕,懈怠的足處是八懶處。
而足處這一欄還有一層更細的東西:它有一部分不指向外面,指向這張表自己。「覺者,是口行,如以心誦經,是彼想足處」〔T32 447c15–16〕——覺的足處是想;「觀者,是心觀事,如隨思義,是其覺足處」〔T32 447c16–17〕——觀的足處是覺。猗的足處是喜〔T32 448a01〕,捨的足處是精進等〔T32 448a04〕。想在受想二陰那邊,喜、覺、精進則就在本表之內。
也就是說,這三十二目不是三十二個彼此無關的條目:其中有幾目是踩在另外幾目上的。論文不把這層關係另作一節說明,只把它嵌在足處欄裡;讀者若跳過第三段,這一層就整個看不見。
三段各答一問。只讀第一段,這一節看起來像名相表;三段一起讀,它是一張「是什麼—像什麼—從哪來」的三欄表。
破口一:第一目少了一個字
三十二目一律以「足處」收。唯獨第一目:「於是觸者,是心觸事。如日光觸壁,是其想處」〔T32 447c13–14〕——作「想處」,沒有「足」字。
而校記正在這裡:明本作「想足」。也就是說,若從明本,這一目就是「是其想足處」,三十二目體例全齊;從底本,則首目獨異。
本編從底本、誌而不改。可核的只有兩件事:底本此處無「足」字、明本有。至於是底本脫一字,還是明本補一字,論文自身不足以判——而恰恰是「唯此一目不齊」與「校記正落在此」這兩件事同時成立,才使得任何一邊都不能單憑體例整齊來定案。體例整齊是個很誘人的理由,但它證明不了文字。
破口二小得多:足處那一段的說法有兩式,或以「彼」領起——「彼四念處足處」〔T32 447c21〕,或以「是其」領起——「是其覺足處」〔T32 447c17〕。二式並用而不畫一,本編照錄不代齊。
停一下:「心」自己也在名單上
還有一處更值得停的地方。
三十二目的定義一律以「是心」領起——是心觸事、是心動、是心舉、是心退。可是這三十二目之中,有一目自己就叫「心」:「心者,是心清,如呪令水清,彼四須陀洹分足處」〔T32 447c18–19〕。
於是同一個「心」字,在同一段裡當兩種東西用:一次是三十二目共同的主語(心的某一種動作),一次是三十二目之中的一目(與觸、思、覺、觀並列)。
停下來問一句:這是同一個心嗎?
本段答不了。論文既不解釋為何以心釋心,也不說作為一目的「心」與作為主語的「心」有何分別。可核的只有字面:三十二目的立義句一律以「心」為主語,而其中第六目名為「心」,其義作「是心清」。本編照錄不代正、不代會通——不替論文分立二義,也不由此推論其心識之說。
同一種「同名而異位」,本段還有一例:「命根者,是無色法、是壽命,如欝波羅水」〔T32 447c23–24〕,本目明說是無色法;而「命根」這個名字,在色陰那邊也出現過——既在所造色之列〔T32 445c23〕,又是九聚業所起的「命根九」〔T32 446b18〕。同一個名目分屬色、行二陰,論文兩處都不提對方。照錄不代會通。
十五條校記,與其中兩條不一樣的
本段的校記有十五條,是這幾個單元裡最多的一段。多數只是一字之異:「夏熱人冷水洗浴」的「夏」,四本作「憂」;「如我鳥」的「我」,明本作「鵝」;「如瞋毒蛇」的「毒」,四本作「恚」;「如盲人摸象」的「摸」,三本作「模」;「如人行遠國或於二道」的「或」,四本作「惑」。這些本編一概從底本、誌而不改。
其中有兩條性質不同,值得單獨提出來。
一條在「如人執柂」〔T32 448a05–06〕。這一句裡的「柂」字,大正本原作「施」;校本依福州藏、思溪藏改作「柂」,並註明所據。另一條在「懈怠者,是心懶墯」〔T32 448a15〕——這個「墯」字,大正本原作「墮」;校本依麗本改作「墯」。
兩處都不是「某本作某」的記錄,是校本已經動了正文。所以我們現在讀到的「柂」與「墯」,本來就不是大正之字;本編從校本所呈之字,並在考據裡把大正原字、校本所改與其所據三項並記,明說本文不從大正。
而同一段裡還有第三條,恰好是反例:「如人執柂」的「執」字,麗本作「報」,校本把它記下來了,卻沒有改正文〔T32 448a05〕。所以本文仍作「執」。
同一行之內,一個字校本改了,一個字校本只記——這是分辨「記」與「改」最好的現成例子。上一個單元的「眠/眼」屬於「記而未改」那一類,本段的「柂」「墯」屬於「已改」那一類。讀者若把兩類混為一談,就會覺得本編一時從校本、一時不從;其實準繩只有一條:看校本正文所呈的是哪個字。
疏與密:相鄰三段的落差
最後記一件關於體例的事實。
前兩個單元——色陰的生、種種、一種,受陰與想陰——加起來一個譬喻也沒有;到本段,一目一譬,三十二個接連而下。
同一品之內,相鄰的三段,一段全無譬、一段全是譬。可核的是這個落差本身。至於論文為何在此獨用密譬,本段不說;本編也不由此另立體例之說——只把「哪裡有譬、哪裡沒有」如實記下,讓讀者自己看見這部論的筆勢不是一路平的。
帶走三件:一個所見——三十二目一律「一義·一譬·一足處」三段成句,模子灌到底而恰有二處破口(首目末作「想處」無「足」字·足處之語有以「彼」領起、以「是其」領起二式)。一個讀法——遇三段式須拆開各問一次:是什麼(一律以「是心」領起)、像什麼(譬取日常之物)、立在哪裡(足處一欄把諸法接回本論前文之法門)。一處停問——三十二目之立義皆以「心」為主語,而其中一目自身即名「心」(其義作「是心清」):這是同一個心嗎?論文不解,本編照錄不代會通。
還有兩件小事該記著:標列二十九詞而逐釋三十二目,差在「喜心」「精進念」「調戲」三串連寫(本論第四次同形壓縮),且末串之後半標作「戲」而釋作「悔」;命根一名分屬色、行二陰而兩處互不相涉,照錄不代會通。
The preceding two units contain no similes at all. On reaching the aggregate of formations, the treatise suddenly gives thirty-two similes in one succession.
Put the observation first: This passage uses one mold from beginning to end—every item has three parts, “one meaning, one simile, one basis”; and the mold has exactly two breaks, both in places a reader can easily pass over.
The three parts work as follows. “Mindfulness is the mind’s protection, like carrying a bowl of oil; its basis is the four establishments of mindfulness” 〔T32 447c20–21〕—the first part says what it is (the mind’s protection), the second what it resembles (carrying a bowl of oil), and the third where it stands (the four establishments of mindfulness). “Concentration is the mind’s unification, like a lamp inside a hall; its basis is the four jhānas” 〔T32 447c21–22〕, and “volition is movement of mind, like the methods used in building a house; its basis is the door of activity” 〔T32 447c14–15〕, follow the same pattern. Thirty-two items, with not one omitted.
There are two breaks: the first item lacks the word “basis,” and the wording of the basis clause has two forms. They are taken up separately below.
Count First: Twenty-Nine in the Heading, Thirty-Two in the Explanations
The heading list begins, “Question: What is the aggregate of formations? Answer: contact, volition, initial application, sustained application, joy-mind, energy-mindfulness, concentration, wisdom” 〔T32 447c10–11〕, and continues through the series with enumeration commas. Its definition is a single exclusion: “all mental factors apart from feeling and perception are the aggregate of formations” 〔T32 447c13〕—once form, feeling, perception, and consciousness are set aside, all the remaining mental factors belong to the aggregate of formations. The treatise gives no total.
Count the heading items one by one and there are only twenty-nine expressions. The individual explanations begin with “Here, contact” 〔T32 447c13〕 and proceed one sentence per item through “fearlessness in wrongdoing” 〔T32 448a17〕, actually yielding thirty-two items.
The three-item difference lies in three strings written together: “joy-mind” contains joy and mind as two items, “energy-mindfulness” contains energy and mindfulness as two, and “agitation-play” contains agitation and remorse as two. Twenty-nine minus three plus six gives exactly thirty-two.
This is the fourth time the treatise has compressed a list in this way. There was 11-01’s “impermanence-morsel-food-domain form,” 11-02’s “arising-form-morsel-food-four-elements,” 11-03’s “water-element-morsel-food-domain form,” and now “joy-mind,” “energy-mindfulness,” and “agitation-play.” In the first three cases, the number reported by the treatise allowed the items to be recovered; this time the treatise reports no number, and the individual explanations themselves are what separate them.
The third string also has an extra layer: the heading has “agitation-play,” but the explanations give “Agitation is the mind’s unrest, like boiling water” 〔T32 448a11–12〕 and “Remorse is the mind’s retreat, like delighting in impurity” 〔T32 448a12–13〕—it is not only divided into two items; the character in its second half does not match (the heading has “play,” while the explanation has “remorse”). This edition records both without correcting them.
Reading Practice: Separate the Three-Part Form
The reading practice offered by this passage is concrete: when you meet a three-part form such as “one meaning, one simile, one basis,” separate the three parts and ask one question of each.
The first part answers “what is it?” and is always led by “it is the mind”—the mind touching an object, the mind moving, the mind rejoicing, the mind protecting, the mind becoming unified, the mind seeing. The treatise places all thirty-two mental factors in “some particular activity of the mind.”
The second part answers “what is it like?” Nearly all the similes are taken from everyday things: sunlight touching a wall, building a house, reciting a scripture, a person obtaining something, carrying a bowl of oil, a lamp inside a hall, a person with eyes, a person holding scales, a person holding a rudder, and someone hot in summer bathing in cold water; on the unwholesome side there are boiling water, an angry venomous snake, a snake hidden in hibernation, a caṇḍāla, an evil king, and blind people touching an elephant. Not one simile needs recourse to a heavenly realm or a supernormal feat.
The third part answers “where does it stand?” This is the part most easily passed over, yet it contains the densest information: mindfulness has the four establishments of mindfulness as its basis, concentration the four jhānas, and wisdom the four noble truths 〔T32 447c22–23〕; non-hatred has the four immeasurables, and desire the four bases of power. This column connects each quality of the aggregate of formations back to practices the treatise has discussed earlier. The unwholesome qualities likewise have their own places of origin: ignorance has the four inversions as its basis 〔T32 448a08–09〕, view has “hearing another’s voice and incorrect recollection” 〔T32 448a11〕, doubt has improper attention 〔T32 448a13–14〕, and laziness has the eight fields of indolence.
The basis column contains something finer still: part of it points not outside the list but back into the list itself. “Initial application is verbal activity, like reciting a scripture mentally; its basis is perception” 〔T32 447c15–16〕—the basis of initial application is perception. “Sustained application is the mind examining an object, like following and reflecting on meaning; its basis is initial application” 〔T32 447c16–17〕—the basis of sustained application is initial application. Tranquility has joy as its basis 〔T32 448a01〕, and equanimity has energy and the other qualities 〔T32 448a04〕. Perception lies over in the aggregates of feeling and perception; joy, initial application, and energy are within this very list.
In other words, these thirty-two are not thirty-two unrelated entries: some of them stand on other entries. The treatise does not set this relationship out in a separate section; it embeds it in the basis column. If the reader skips the third part, this whole layer disappears from view.
Each part answers one question. Read only the first part, and the section looks like a table of terms; read all three together, and it becomes a three-column table of “what it is—what it resembles—where it comes from.”
Break One: The First Item Is Missing One Character
All thirty-two items close with “basis.” The sole exception is the first: “Here, contact is the mind touching an object. Like sunlight touching a wall, its place is perception” 〔T32 447c13–14〕—it says “place of perception,” without the word “basis.”
The critical note falls precisely here: the Ming witness reads “perception-basis.” In other words, if the Ming reading is followed, this item becomes “its basis is perception,” and the pattern of all thirty-two items is complete; under the base text, the first item alone differs.
This edition follows the base text and records the difference without changing it. Only two things can be verified: the base has no “basis” here, and the Ming witness does. The treatise itself does not provide enough evidence to decide whether the base lost a character or Ming supplied one—and it is precisely because “this item alone is irregular” and “the critical note falls exactly here” are both true that neither reading can be settled merely by appealing to formal regularity. Formal regularity is a very tempting reason, but it cannot prove the text.
The second break is much smaller: the basis clause has two forms. One is led by “that”—“that four-establishments basis” 〔T32 447c21〕—and the other by “its”—“its initial-application basis” 〔T32 447c17〕. The two forms are used side by side without being made uniform; this edition records them without harmonizing them.
Pause: “Mind” Is Itself on the List
One more point is especially worth pausing over.
All thirty-two statements of meaning are led by “the mind is”—the mind touching an object, the mind moving, the mind rising, the mind retreating. Yet among the thirty-two, one item is itself called “mind”: “Mind is the mind’s clarity, like making water clear with an incantation; its basis is the four factors of stream-entry” 〔T32 447c18–19〕.
The same word “mind” therefore does two jobs in the same passage: in one position it is the common subject of all thirty-two items (some particular activity of mind); in another it is one of the thirty-two items (listed beside contact, volition, initial application, and sustained application).
Pause and ask one question: is this the same mind?
This passage cannot answer. The treatise neither explains why it defines mind by mind nor says how “mind” as one item differs from “mind” as the subject. Only the wording can be verified: the statements of meaning for all thirty-two items take “mind” as their subject, while the sixth item is named “mind” and is defined as “the mind is clear.” This edition records the wording without correcting or reconciling it—it neither divides two meanings on the treatise’s behalf nor infers a doctrine of consciousness from it.
This passage has one more instance of the same “same name in a different position”: “The life faculty is an immaterial quality and a lifespan, like water for an utpala” 〔T32 447c23–24〕, explicitly calling this item immaterial. Yet the name “life faculty” has also appeared under the aggregate of form—both in the list of derived forms 〔T32 445c23〕 and in the kamma-born “life-faculty-nine” 〔T32 446b18〕. The same name belongs to the aggregates of form and formations, and neither passage mentions the other. This edition records both without reconciling them.
Fifteen Critical Notes, and Two of a Different Kind
This passage has fifteen critical notes, the most in any of these units. Most record a difference of one character: in “a person hot in summer bathing in cold water,” “summer” is “sorrow” in four witnesses; in “like a my-bird,” “my” is “goose” in the Ming witness; in “like an angry venomous snake,” “venomous” is “angry” in four witnesses; in “like blind people touching an elephant,” “touching” is “modeling” in three witnesses; and in “a person traveling to a distant country or at two roads,” “or” is “delusion” in four witnesses. This edition follows the base in every case and records the variants without changing it.
Two of the notes are different in kind and deserve to be singled out.
One occurs in “a person holding a rudder” 〔T32 448a05–06〕. The character “柂” in this sentence was originally “施” in the Taishō text; the critical edition changed it to “柂” on the evidence of the Fuzhou and Sixi witnesses and states those sources. The other occurs in “Laziness is the mind’s indolence” 〔T32 448a15〕: the character “墯” was originally “墮” in the Taishō text; the critical edition changed it to “墯” on the evidence of the Korean witness.
In both places this is not a note that “a certain witness reads a certain way”; the critical edition has already changed the body text. The “柂” and “墯” now before us are therefore not the original Taishō characters. This edition follows the characters presented by the critical text and, in its apparatus, records all three parts—the Taishō character, the critical edition’s change, and the witnesses on which it rests—stating plainly that its text does not follow Taishō.
There is a third note in the same passage that provides the counterexample. In “a person holding a rudder,” the character “執” is read “報” in the Korean witness; the critical edition records it but does not change the body text 〔T32 448a05〕. The text therefore still reads “執.”
Within a single line, the critical edition changes one character and merely records another—this is a ready-made example for distinguishing “recording” from “adopting.” The preceding unit’s “sleep/eye” belongs to the “recorded but not adopted” kind; this passage’s “柂” and “墯” belong to the “adopted” kind. If readers conflate the two, this edition will seem to follow the critical text at one moment and reject it at another. In fact there is only one standard: look at the character displayed in the body of the critical text.
Sparse and Dense: The Contrast among Three Adjacent Passages
Finally, one fact about the passage’s manner of presentation should be recorded.
The preceding two units—the arising, varieties, and unity of form, and the aggregates of feeling and perception—contain not one simile between them. In this passage, there is one simile for each item, thirty-two in succession.
Within the same chapter, these three adjacent passages move from passages with no similes at all to a passage made entirely of similes. What can be verified is the contrast itself. The passage does not say why the treatise uses similes so densely only here, and this edition does not construct a theory of its style from that silence. It simply records “where similes appear” and “where they do not,” allowing the reader to see that the treatise’s prose does not remain uniform from one passage to the next.
Carry away three things. One observation: all thirty-two items are cast in the three-part sentence “one meaning · one simile · one basis”; the mold runs to the end with exactly two breaks (the first item ends in “place of perception” without the word “basis”; basis clauses are led either by “that” or by “its”). One reading practice: when you meet a three-part form, separate it and ask each question once: what is it (always led by “the mind is”), what is it like (the similes are drawn from ordinary things), and where does it stand (the basis column links the qualities back to practices described earlier in the treatise). One place to pause: the statements of meaning for all thirty-two items take “mind” as their subject, yet one item is itself named “mind” (its meaning is “the mind is clear”). Is this the same mind? The treatise does not explain; this edition records the wording without reconciling it.
Remember two smaller matters as well: the heading has twenty-nine expressions while the explanations have thirty-two items, the difference lying in the three run-together strings “joy-mind,” “energy-mindfulness,” and “agitation-play” (the fourth compression of this form in the treatise), while in the last string the heading has “play” and the explanation “remorse”; and the name life faculty belongs to both the aggregates of form and formations, with neither passage relating it to the other. This edition records both without reconciling them.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Qualities of the Aggregate of Formations · Exposition · Summer 2026
識陰三門Three Approaches to the Aggregate of Consciousness
全文五層 →Full five layers →到識陰,五陰之答就要收了。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段不再添名。七個名目在段首一次立定,其後三門只是換三副眼睛,把同一批看三遍;而「同一批」在三門裡的稱法並不畫一——時而分作五識、意界、意識界,時而總作六識,論文從不停下來說「六識」是哪六個。
一列七名,三度重看。名不增而看法增——這是本段的形。
七個名字,怎樣立定
問答一起手就把名列完:「答:眼識、耳識、鼻識、舌識、身識、意」〔T32 448a19〕「界意識界」〔T32 448a20〕。
前五個用同一個式子出五次:「於是眼識者,依眼緣色生識,是」〔T32 448a20〕「謂眼識」〔T32 448a21〕——依某根、緣某境、生某識,然後以「是謂」把名收回來。耳、鼻、舌、身四目一字不易地照做。到第五目「身識者,依身緣觸生」〔T32 448a23〕「識,是謂身識」〔T32 448a24〕,模子仍是完好的。
而第六、第七目一入手,收句就換了字。意界作「此謂意界」〔T32 448a25〕,意識界作「此謂意識界」〔T32 448a26〕。前五個一律「是謂」,後兩個一律「此謂」。
這不是我替論文分的組,是論文自己用字分的組——五個一組、兩個一組,收句上就已經分開了。
分組是有道理的。前五個各有自己的根與境,故各得一個「是謂」;後兩個沒有專屬的根,其立義的方式也就不同。意界作「意界者,依處五事依二事。五識」〔T32 448a24〕「若前後次第生識,此謂意界」〔T32 448a25〕——它是承著五識的前後次第說的。意識界更乾脆,直接用一句遮遣:「意識界者,除此」〔T32 448a25〕「六識,餘心,此謂意識界」〔T32 448a26〕。
遮遣立界這一手,上一個單元剛用過。行陰的界說是「除受想一切心數法」〔T32 447c13〕——除掉受、想,剩下的都是。這裡是除掉那六個,剩下的心都是。同一種立界法,連著兩段各用一次。
讀法:把數目字當接榫用
本段交出的讀法很簡單,卻很耐用:遇到一個數目字,先回頭找它上一次出現在哪裡。
「此七識以三行所勝」〔T32 448a26〕——這是全論第一處把這一列明白標作七。可是「七」這個數不是在這裡才有的。
翻回受陰那一段:「由門七受」〔T32 447b19〕,其列是眼、耳、鼻、舌、身,然後「從意界觸生受」〔T32 447b20–21〕、「從意識界觸生受」〔T32 447b21〕。再翻想陰:「以由門七想」〔T32 447c06〕,同樣是五個之外再加「從意界觸生想」〔T32 447c07–08〕與意識界。
兩段都已經在用這個七,而拆出這個七的那一刀——把意分作意界與意識界——也早就下過了。到識陰,論文只是第一次把這一列叫作「七識」。
所以讀到「七識」而覺得新,其實是漏看了前面兩段。數目字是接榫:受陰七、想陰七、識陰七,三段是同一個結構貫下來的。
同一個讀法再用一次,接的就更遠。本段的總標作「此七識以三行所勝」〔T32 448a26〕;下一段作「復次此五陰,以四行所勝」〔T32 448b25〕;再下一段作「五行所勝可知」〔T32 449a07〕之十二入。三行、四行、五行,連著三段遞增。再往前翻,色陰那邊還有兩處同形而不報門數的:「如是以令起,所勝可知」〔T32 446b14–15〕、「如是以一種所勝可知」〔T32 447b11〕。
一個接榫,五處可見。數目字不只是數量,它是論文用來把段與段扣起來的榫頭。
第一門:三欄表,被連寫藏起來
三門的第一門問「怎樣從處與事看」。答文先給一句總的:「五識種種處、種種事」〔T32 448a28〕,意界與意識界共一處,然後「意界五事」〔T32 448a29〕、意識界六事。
接著是本段最難讀的一句:「五識者,內法內處」〔T32 448a29〕「外事意界、內法外處外事意識界、內法外處」〔T32 448b01〕「內事亦外事」〔T32 448b02〕。
一路連寫,看起來像一串亂碼。其實它是一張三欄表——三個主語,各配法、處、事三項:
五識,內法、內處、外事;意界,內法、外處、外事;意識界,內法、外處、內事亦外事。
還原的憑據不是我的猜測,是上一句。上一句剛說過意界五事、意識界六事:意界那五事就是色聲香味觸,全在外,故其欄作「外事」;意識界那六事是五外加一個法,故其欄作「內事亦外事」。數目對得上,欄位就對得上。至於「處」這一欄何以五識是內而意界、意識界是外,論文不解釋,本編也不代解。
而連寫的樣子值得看清楚:後起的主語,各黏在前一句的末尾。「外事意界」——意界黏在五識那一欄的末尾;「外事意識界」——意識界黏在意界那一欄的末尾。同一節裡再來一次:「六識者,初生處、初生事意識」〔T32 448b02〕「界。於入體剎那共生處,初以生處,於無色」〔T32 448b03〕。
這第三處還多一層難:那三個字究竟屬上還是屬下?屬上,則六識的初生事就是意識界;屬下,則意識界是下一句的主語。論文自身不斷,本編二讀並記、照原字錄。
這種連寫,本品已是第五次見。前四次是「無常揣食處色」「色生揣食四界」「水界揣食處色」與「喜心」「精進念」「調戲」三串,還原靠的是論文自報的數或逐釋自己拆開;這一次不同,還原靠的是三個主語各須配足三項的對稱。同一種連寫之形,還原之據卻各不相同——這正說明這種形不是抄手偶爾漏了頓號,是本論行文的常態。
第二門:先說不能,再說何以能
第二門問「怎樣從事看」。這一門的句勢最整齊,也最容易被讀成一堆否定。
先是兩句:「以五識不知所有法,除初起」〔T32 448b06–07〕、「以意界不知所有法,除意轉」〔T32 448b07〕——先立一個「不」,隨即開一個口子。
接著六句一氣連下,每一句都是這個形。「以六識不安」〔T32 448b07〕「威儀,以迅速安之」〔T32 448b08〕;不受持身業口業、不受善不善法,「以迅速受之」〔T32 448b09〕;不入定不安詳起,「以迅速入定」〔T32 448b10〕;不終不生,以果報意識界生;不眠不覺不見夢,「以迅速夢見」〔T32 448b13〕。
六句一律先說某事六識所不能,再說何以竟能。否定在前而解在後——這是本段特有的句勢,前面幾段都沒有。
而解的那一半,反覆只用兩個詞:迅速、後分。「迅速」二字全論只出現四次,四次都在這幾行裡〔T32 448b08·448b09·448b10·448b13〕。一個全論僅此一段使用的詞,密集地擔著六句的解釋。論文不另說迅速是什麼,只讓它在六句裡各出一次。
讀到這裡容易生一種錯覺:以為這一門在講心的無能。其實不是。六句的重心全在後半——不是六識能不能,是何者使之能。前半的否定只是把問題逼出來。
停一下:「六識」到底是哪六個
現在停在一個字上。
「六識」這個詞,本段出現九次,全論也才十一次。九次之中,只有第一次自帶界說。那就是意識界的立界句:「意識界者,除此」〔T32 448a25〕「六識,餘心,此謂意識界」〔T32 448a26〕——除掉這六識,剩下的心是意識界。由此可以回推:這裡的六,是七減意識界,也就是五識加意界。
可是其後八次,論文一次也沒有再說。第一門的「六識者,初生處、初生事意識」〔T32 448b02〕是不是同一個六?第二門連下六句的那個「六識」是不是?第三門末尾的「六識無因無起」〔T32 448b20〕又是不是?
論文全不交代。
這一問值得停,不是因為它難,是因為它示範了本論的一種習慣:一個詞在第一次出現時自帶界說,其後便一路使用而不再回頭。讀者若在第一處沒有把界說接住,後面八處就只能靠猜。
而本段偏偏把「五識」「六識」「七識」三個集合輪替著用:第一門三種稱法都出現,第二門幾乎全說六識,第三門又回到五識、意界、意識界的三分而末尾忽然出一個六識。同一批七個東西,三門三種稱法。
本編不替論文補這個界說,也不由此推論其識說。可核的只有兩件事:九見之中唯首見自帶界說;其餘八見論文不再說。
第三門:一個「設」字撐起來的排比
第三門問「怎樣從法看」。這一門的骨頭是一個字——設。
「意識界設有覺有觀、設無覺少觀、」〔T32 448b15〕「設無覺無觀」〔T32 448b16〕;「五識與捨共行」〔T32 448b16〕而身識或樂或苦,意識界或喜或憂或捨;「五識果報」〔T32 448b18〕而意界或果報或方便,「意識界設善設不善、設果報、設方」〔T32 448b19〕便。
這個字在五行之內出現十四次,而全論不過五十次。四分之一強擠在這五行裡。
它的用處很清楚:五識是定的,意界稍活,意識界最活。同一件事問下來,愈往後愈不能一口咬定,於是「設」字愈密。三門看下來,這是唯一一處讓七識之間的差別直接顯在句法上的地方——不是靠說明,是靠一個字出現的疏密。
而覺觀那三分並非此處新立。本論前文早有:「復次定有三種:有覺有觀定、無覺少觀定、無覺無觀定」〔T32 407b16–17〕,且各繫其禪。這裡把那三分挪來配意識界,又是一次接榫。
收句:三門不齊,末句雙收
最後兩件小事。
三門各以一句作結:「如是以處事可知」〔T32 448b04〕、「如是以事」〔T32 448b13〕「可知」〔T32 448b14〕、「如是以法勝可知,此謂識陰、此謂五陰」〔T32 448b24〕。前二門作「可知」,第三門作「勝可知」,多一個字。照錄不代齊。
而末句是一句收兩事:既收識陰,又收五陰。五陰之答自色陰起,經受、想、行而至識,到這一句才算走完。論文不另起一段作總結,只在同一句裡連下兩個收語。
還有一件關於筆勢的事實該記著。上一個單元一目一譬、三十二目無一缺;本段一譬不立。「如」字本段四見〔T32 448a27·448b04·448b13·448b24〕,四見全是「如是」的如,沒有一個是取譬的如。相鄰兩段,一段全是譬、一段全無譬——可核的是這個落差本身,本編不由此另立體例之說。
帶走三件:一個所見——七個名目在段首一次立定,其後不再添名,三門只是換三副眼睛看同一批;而「同一批」在三門裡的稱法並不畫一,時而分作五識、意界、意識界,時而總作六識。一個讀法——把數目字當接榫用:遇一個數先回頭找它上一次在哪裡(七之數早見於受陰「由門七受」〔T32 447b19〕與想陰「以由門七想」〔T32 447c06〕;三行、四行、五行則連著三段遞增〔T32 448a26·448b25·449a07〕)。一處停問——「六識」九見而唯首見自帶界說〔T32 448a25–26〕,其餘八見論文不再說是哪六個:那是同一個六嗎?本編照錄不代補。
還有三件小事該記著:五識五目以「是謂」收而意界、意識界以「此謂」收,收句用字自己分了組;第一門的三欄表被連寫藏起來而還原之據就在上一句的「意界五事」〔T32 448a29〕;「迅速」二字全論四見而盡在本段第二門。
With the aggregate of consciousness, the answer concerning the five aggregates is about to come to a close.
Let us state the observation at the outset: This passage adds no further names. Seven names are fixed all at once at the beginning; the three approaches that follow merely change eyes three times and look at the same set three times. Yet the way this “same set” is named is not uniform across the three approaches—sometimes it is divided into the five consciousnesses, the mind element, and the mind-consciousness element; sometimes it is gathered as the six consciousnesses. The treatise never pauses to say which six “the six consciousnesses” are.
One list of seven names, reviewed three times. Names do not increase, but ways of seeing do—this is the shape of the passage.
How the Seven Names Are Established
The question and answer list every name at once: “Answer: eye-consciousness, ear-consciousness, nose-consciousness, tongue-consciousness, body-consciousness, mind” 〔T32 448a19〕 “element mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 448a20〕.
The first five use the same formula five times: “As for eye-consciousness here, consciousness is born dependent on the eye and conditioned by visible form; this” 〔T32 448a20〕 “is called eye-consciousness” 〔T32 448a21〕—depending on a particular faculty, conditioned by a particular object, a particular consciousness arises, and then “is called” brings the name back. Ear, nose, tongue, and body repeat it without changing a single character. At the fifth item, “as for body-consciousness, dependent on the body and conditioned by touch, there arises” 〔T32 448a23〕 “consciousness; this is called body-consciousness” 〔T32 448a24〕, the mold is still intact.
But as soon as the sixth and seventh items begin, the closing phrase changes its wording. The mind element has “This is called the mind element” 〔T32 448a25〕, and the mind-consciousness element has “This is called the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 448a26〕. The first five uniformly close with one version of “this is called”; the last two uniformly with the other version of “this is called.”
This is not a grouping imposed on the treatise here. The treatise’s own wording makes the division—five in one group and two in another, already separated by their closing phrases.
There is a reason for the grouping. Each of the first five has its own faculty and object and so receives the first version of “this is called”; the last two have no exclusive faculty, and the way their boundaries are established therefore differs. Of the mind element, the text says: “The mind element depends on a locus, five objects, and two objects. The five consciousnesses” 〔T32 448a24〕 “—if consciousness arises before or after them in sequence, this is called the mind element” 〔T32 448a25〕. It is explained by carrying forward the sequence of the five consciousnesses. The mind-consciousness element is more direct, established in a single exclusion: “Mind-consciousness element: apart from these” 〔T32 448a25〕 “six consciousnesses, the remaining mind; this is called the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 448a26〕.
This move of establishing a boundary by exclusion was used in the previous unit. The boundary statement for the aggregate of formations is “all mental factors apart from feeling and perception” 〔T32 447c13〕—remove feeling and perception, and everything left is included. Here, remove those six, and all the remaining mind is included. The same way of drawing a boundary appears once in each of two consecutive passages.
Reading Practice: Use Numbers as Joints
The reading practice offered by this passage is simple but durable: when you encounter a number, first look back for where it last appeared.
“These seven consciousnesses are distinguished in three ways” 〔T32 448a26〕—this is the first place in the entire treatise that expressly labels the list as seven. But the number “seven” did not first appear here.
Turn back to the aggregate of feeling: “seven feelings by way of the doors” 〔T32 447b19〕. The list is eye, ear, nose, tongue, and body, followed by “feeling born from contact of the mind element” 〔T32 447b20–21〕 and “feeling born from contact of the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 447b21〕. Then turn to the aggregate of perception: “seven perceptions by way of the doors” 〔T32 447c06〕. Again, beyond the five come “perception born from contact of the mind element” 〔T32 447c07–08〕 and the mind-consciousness element.
Both passages were already using this seven, and the cut that produces it—the division of mind into mind element and mind-consciousness element—had already been made. With the aggregate of consciousness, the treatise merely calls this list “seven consciousnesses” for the first time.
So if “seven consciousnesses” seems new, the preceding two passages have been missed. Numbers are joints: seven in feeling, seven in perception, and seven in consciousness; the same structure runs through all three passages.
Use the same practice once more and the joint reaches farther. The general heading here is “These seven consciousnesses are distinguished in three ways” 〔T32 448a26〕; the next passage has “Further, these five aggregates are distinguished in four ways” 〔T32 448b25〕; the passage after that says of the twelve sense bases that “their distinctions can be known in five ways” 〔T32 449a07〕. Three ways, four ways, five ways: the number rises across three consecutive passages. Turn farther back and the aggregate-of-form section has two statements of the same shape that do not report the number of approaches: “Thus, their distinctions through what brings them forth can be known” 〔T32 446b14–15〕 and “Thus, their distinctions through unity can be known” 〔T32 447b11〕.
One joint is visible in five places. A number does more than count; it is the tenon by which the treatise fastens one passage to another.
First Approach: A Three-Column Table Hidden by Continuous Writing
The first of the three approaches asks, “How is it viewed by locus and object?” The answer first gives a general statement: “the five consciousnesses have various loci and various objects” 〔T32 448a28〕; the mind element and the mind-consciousness element share one locus; then comes “mind element, five objects” 〔T32 448a29〕, with six objects for the mind-consciousness element.
Next comes the hardest sentence in the passage: “The five consciousnesses: internal quality, internal locus” 〔T32 448a29〕 “external object mind element, internal quality, external locus, external object mind-consciousness element, internal quality, external locus” 〔T32 448b01〕 “internal object and also external object” 〔T32 448b02〕.
Written straight through, it looks like a string of garbled code. In fact, it is a three-column table—three subjects, each paired with three entries: quality, locus, and object.
The five consciousnesses: internal quality, internal locus, external object; the mind element: internal quality, external locus, external object; the mind-consciousness element: internal quality, external locus, internal and also external objects.
The warrant for reconstructing it is not my conjecture; it is the preceding sentence. That sentence has just said that the mind element has five objects and the mind-consciousness element six. The mind element’s five are visible form, sound, odor, taste, and touch, all external, so its column reads “external objects.” The mind-consciousness element’s six are the five external objects plus one quality, so its column reads “internal and also external objects.” Once the numbers line up, the columns line up. As for why the “locus” column makes the five consciousnesses internal but the mind element and mind-consciousness element external, the treatise does not explain, and this edition does not explain it on the treatise’s behalf.
The continuous writing itself deserves a clear look: each later subject is attached to the end of the preceding clause. “External object mind element”—the mind element is attached to the end of the five-consciousness column. “External object mind-consciousness element”—the mind-consciousness element is attached to the end of the mind-element column. The same thing happens again in this section: “The six consciousnesses: initial birth-locus, initial birth-object mind-consciousness” 〔T32 448b02〕 “element. At the moment of entering the body, the co-arising locus is first the place of birth; in the formless” 〔T32 448b03〕.
This third instance adds another difficulty: do those three Chinese characters—mind-consciousness element—belong above or below? If above, the initial birth-object of the six consciousnesses is the mind-consciousness element; if below, the mind-consciousness element is the subject of the next sentence. The treatise itself does not divide the wording. This edition records both readings and reproduces the received characters.
This is already the fifth occurrence of such continuous writing in this chapter. The previous four were “impermanence-morsel-food-domain form,” “arising-form-morsel-food-four-elements,” “water-element-morsel-food-domain form,” and the three strings “joy-mind,” “energy-mindfulness,” and “agitation-play.” Their structure was recovered either from numbers reported by the treatise or from the individual explanations that separated them. This time is different: the reconstruction rests on the symmetry by which each of three subjects must receive all three entries. The form of continuous writing is the same, but the warrant for reconstructing it differs. That is precisely why the form cannot be dismissed as a copyist’s occasional omission of a list mark; it is a normal feature of this treatise’s prose.
Second Approach: First State What Cannot Happen, Then Explain How It Can
The second approach asks, “How is it viewed by object?” Its sentence pattern is the most regular of the three, and also the easiest to misread as a heap of negations.
It begins with two statements: “The five consciousnesses do not know all qualities, except at initial arising” 〔T32 448b06–07〕 and “the mind element does not know all qualities, except the turning of mind” 〔T32 448b07〕—first a “does not,” then an opening in it.
Six sentences then run on in one breath, each in this form. “The six consciousnesses do not establish” 〔T32 448b07〕 “posture; rapidity establishes it” 〔T32 448b08〕. They do not sustain bodily or verbal action, and they do not receive wholesome or unwholesome qualities; “through rapidity they receive them” 〔T32 448b09〕. They do not enter concentration or arise calmly; “through rapidity concentration is entered” 〔T32 448b10〕. They do not die and are not born; resultant mind-consciousness element is born. They do not sleep, wake, or see dreams; “through rapidity a dream is seen” 〔T32 448b13〕.
All six sentences first state something the six consciousnesses cannot do, then explain how it nevertheless becomes possible. Negation comes first and explanation follows—this sentence pattern is distinctive to this passage and does not occur in the preceding passages.
In the explaining halves, only two terms recur: rapidity and later phase. The two-character term translated “rapidity” occurs only four times in the entire treatise, all four within these few lines 〔T32 448b08·448b09·448b10·448b13〕. A term used only in this passage is densely made to carry the explanations of six sentences. The treatise does not separately say what rapidity is; it only lets the term appear, one occurrence at a time, within those six sentences.
At this point it is easy to form the wrong impression that this approach teaches the mind’s incapacity. It does not. The weight of all six sentences lies in their second halves—not whether the six consciousnesses can do something, but what makes it possible. The initial negations merely force the question into view.
Pause: Which Six Are the “Six Consciousnesses”?
Pause now over a single word.
The phrase “six consciousnesses” appears nine times in this passage and only eleven times in the entire treatise. Of the nine occurrences, only the first carries its own boundary statement. That is the sentence establishing the mind-consciousness element: “Mind-consciousness element: apart from these” 〔T32 448a25〕 “six consciousnesses, the remaining mind; this is called the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 448a26〕. From this, one can reason backward: here the six are seven minus the mind-consciousness element—that is, the five consciousnesses plus the mind element.
Yet in the remaining eight occurrences, the treatise never again identifies the six. Is “the six consciousnesses: initial birth-locus, initial birth-object mind-consciousness” 〔T32 448b02〕 in the first approach the same six? Are the “six consciousnesses” that run through the six sentences of the second approach the same? And what of “the six consciousnesses are without cause and without arising” 〔T32 448b20〕 at the end of the third?
The treatise gives no explanation at all.
This question deserves a pause, not because it is difficult, but because it demonstrates one of the treatise’s habits: a term carries its boundary statement at its first occurrence and is then used straight through without looking back. If the reader does not catch the boundary at the first occurrence, the next eight can only be guessed at.
And this passage pointedly rotates among three sets: “five consciousnesses,” “six consciousnesses,” and “seven consciousnesses.” All three forms of naming appear in the first approach; the second speaks almost entirely of the six consciousnesses; the third returns to the threefold division into the five consciousnesses, the mind element, and the mind-consciousness element, then suddenly produces six consciousnesses at the end. The same set of seven things receives three modes of naming across the three approaches.
This edition does not supply the boundary statement on the treatise’s behalf, nor does it infer from this a theory of consciousness. Only two facts are verifiable: of nine occurrences, only the first carries its own boundary statement; in the remaining eight, the treatise does not identify them again.
Third Approach: A Parallel Series Held Up by “May Be”
The third approach asks, “How is it viewed by quality?” The backbone of this approach is one expression—may be.
“The mind-consciousness element may have initial and sustained application, may have no initial and little sustained application,” 〔T32 448b15〕 “or may have neither initial nor sustained application” 〔T32 448b16〕. “The five consciousnesses are accompanied by equanimity” 〔T32 448b16〕, while body-consciousness may be accompanied by pleasure or pain, and the mind-consciousness element may be accompanied by joy, grief, or equanimity. “The five consciousnesses are resultant” 〔T32 448b18〕, while the mind element may be resultant or preparatory, and “the mind-consciousness element may be wholesome, may be unwholesome, may be resultant, or may be preparatory” 〔T32 448b19〕.
This expression occurs fourteen times within five lines, while the whole treatise has no more than fifty occurrences. More than one quarter are packed into these five lines.
Its use is clear: the five consciousnesses are fixed, the mind element somewhat flexible, and the mind-consciousness element most flexible. As the same question moves forward, the later items allow less categorical statements, so “may be” grows denser. Across all three approaches, this is the only point where the differences among the seven consciousnesses appear directly in the syntax—not through an explanation, but through the changing density of one expression.
The threefold division concerning initial and sustained application is not first established here. Earlier, the treatise says: “Further, concentration is of three kinds: concentration with initial and sustained application, concentration without initial but with little sustained application, and concentration with neither initial nor sustained application” 〔T32 407b16–17〕, and ties each to its corresponding meditation. Here those three are transferred to the mind-consciousness element—another joint.
Closing Lines: The Three Approaches Are Uneven, and the Last Line Closes Twice
Two final small matters.
Each approach closes with a sentence: “Thus it can be known by locus and object” 〔T32 448b04〕, “Thus by object” 〔T32 448b13〕 “it can be known” 〔T32 448b14〕, and “Thus, through quality, their distinctions can be known; this is called the aggregate of consciousness; this is called the five aggregates” 〔T32 448b24〕. The first two have “can be known”; the third has “their distinctions can be known,” adding one word. The difference is recorded as received and not made uniform.
The last line closes two matters in one sentence: it closes the aggregate of consciousness and it also closes the five aggregates. The answer concerning the five aggregates began with form, passed through feeling, perception, and formations, and reached consciousness; only with this sentence is the course complete. The treatise does not start a separate concluding passage, but places two closing formulas one after the other in the same sentence.
One further fact about the movement of the prose should be remembered. The preceding unit gives one simile for each item, without a single omission among thirty-two; this passage establishes not one simile. The character meaning “like” occurs four times in this passage 〔T32 448a27·448b04·448b13·448b24〕, and all four belong to the word translated “thus”; not one introduces a simile. Two adjacent passages—one filled with similes, one wholly without them. The verifiable point is the contrast itself; this edition does not infer a further rule of composition from it.
Carry away three things. One observation—seven names are fixed all at once at the beginning, no further name is added, and the three approaches merely change eyes three times to view the same set; yet the way that “same set” is named is not uniform, sometimes divided into the five consciousnesses, the mind element, and the mind-consciousness element, and sometimes gathered as the six consciousnesses. One reading practice—use numbers as joints: whenever a number appears, first look back for where it last occurred. Seven had already appeared in feeling as “seven feelings by way of the doors” 〔T32 447b19〕 and in perception as “seven perceptions by way of the doors” 〔T32 447c06〕; three ways, four ways, and five ways rise across three consecutive passages 〔T32 448a26·448b25·449a07〕. One place to pause—“six consciousnesses” occurs nine times, but only the first carries its own boundary statement 〔T32 448a25–26〕; in the other eight occurrences, the treatise does not again say which six they are. Is it the same six? This edition records the wording and does not add the missing gloss.
Remember three smaller points as well: the five consciousnesses close with one version of “this is called,” while the mind element and mind-consciousness element close with the other version of “this is called,” so the closing diction itself makes a group; the first approach’s three-column table is hidden by continuous writing, and the warrant for reconstructing it lies in the preceding “mind element, five objects” 〔T32 448a29〕; and the term translated “rapidity” occurs only four times in the entire treatise, all in the second approach here.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Three Approaches to the Aggregate of Consciousness · Exposition · Summer 2026
五陰的句義、相、分別與攝Phrase-Meaning, Characteristic, Classification, and Inclusion of the Five Aggregates
全文五層 →Full five layers →五陰講完了。這一段是回頭再看四遍。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段的形是「四門重看,末門兼收全局」。前三門各以一句自收,第四門忽然不用那個收語——因為它收的不只是這一門,是整個陰方便。
而「陰方便」這三個字,是本品五個大節裡的第一個。到這一段末尾,第一個節就關上了門。
先看框:品首那句話
要看清這一段的位置,得回品首。
本品開卷說坐禪人「於五處當起方」〔T32 445c13〕「便,所謂陰方便、入方便、界方便、因緣方」〔T32 445c14〕「便、聖諦方便」〔T32 445c15〕。五個名字一次列定,其後逐一開講、逐一作收。
從那裡到這裡,論文一直在講第一個——陰。色、受、想、行、識五陰逐一講完,識陰末尾一句「此謂識陰、此謂五陰」〔T32 448b24〕收住了五陰。而陰方便本身還沒收。
本段就是那個收。
總標:四門,比上一段多一門
段首說:「復次此五陰,以四行所勝可知。如是以句義、」〔T32 448b25〕「以相、以分別、以攝」〔T32 448b26〕。
這個式子上一段剛用過——識陰是「三行」。這裡是四行,下一段的十二入是五行〔T32 449a07〕。三、四、五,連著三段遞增。先報門數、次列門名、再逐門設問,一字不改地照做三遍。
讀法:先認體例,再讀內容
本段交出的讀法在四個門的體例上:同一段之內,四門各用一種體例,一種也不重複。認出體例,內容才讀得快。
第一門是界說式:一目一句,「色者」〔T32 448b26〕「現義,受者可受義,想者知義,行者作義,識」〔T32 448b27〕「者解義」〔T32 448b28〕——某字是某義,如此而已。
第二門忽然換體:「問:云何以相?答:色者自色相如見刺,彼四大」〔T32 448b29〕「足處。受者彼受相,如癩惡病,彼觸足處」〔T32 448c01〕。一相、一譬、一足處,三段成句。這個三段式不是新的——上上一段的行陰,三十二目一律如此〔T32 447c13–448a18〕。隔了一個一譬不立的識陰段,它在這裡回來了,用在五目上。
第三門又換:三種列目,各出其法。第四門再換:通篇以「所攝」繫屬,一連三十見。
四門四體。讀者若不先認體例,第二門的譬會被當成閒筆,第四門的「所攝」會被讀成一堆重複。認了體例就知道:第二門在給形象,第四門在做歸屬。
第二門:五個足處,三個是觸
第二門值得多看一眼。
色的足處是四大,識的足處是名色,而受、想、行三者的足處都是觸〔T32 448c01·448c02·448c03〕。五個足處,三個同繫一處。
論文不解釋為什麼。可核的只有這個分布本身:中間三陰同源,兩頭二陰各有所依。本編照錄不代會通。
譬也值得記:見刺、癩惡病、作像貌、轉輪、知味。五個譬,一半取自病痛與器物,一半取自造作與嘗味——與上上一段行陰那三十二個日常之譬同一路數,不假神變。
停一下:問五陰而答出六目
現在停在第一門。
問的是五陰的句義。答文卻列了六個:色、受、想、行、識——然後多出一個「者解義,陰者種類集義」〔T32 448b28〕。
論文在五陰的句義裡,順手把「陰」這個字自己也解了一次。
停下來問一句:為什麼要多解這一個?
本段答不了。可核的只有兩件事:其一,問的是五陰而答的是六目;其二,「種類集義」四字全論唯此一見〔T32 448b28〕。
而它擺的位置是耐人尋味的——不在五目之前作總標,在五目之後作殿後。若在前,那是先立總名再分目;在後,倒像是講完五個之後才回頭補一句:這五個為什麼都叫「陰」。
本編照錄不代刪,也不代說明何以多出一目。
第四門:三種攝,而它的三個名字被斷句拆散了
第四門一起手就有一處要看仔細:「問:云何以攝?答:三種攝,入攝、界攝諦、攝」〔T32 448c09〕。
論文自報是三種。而字面上的斷句把「諦」黏在「界攝」的後面,最後只剩一個孤零零的「攝」字。
三個名字其實還原得出來——下文正依入、界、諦三者的次第逐一說攝:先說「色陰十一入所攝,三陰法入所攝,識陰意入」〔T32 448c10〕,次說十一界、法界、「陰七界所攝」〔T32 448c12〕,再說「意識界所攝。五陰,或諦所攝、或非諦所攝」〔T32 448c14〕。入、界、諦,一個不差。
還原的憑據又一次落在下文的次第上,不在字面。這已經是本品裡第六處要靠上下文把連寫或斷句還原的地方了。本編照原字錄,不代改斷句。
順帶記一件對得上的事:識陰是「七界所攝」〔T32 448c12〕——這個七,正是上一段那個「此七識」〔T32 448a26〕。數目對得上,歸屬就對得上。
四句:一句不空懸
第四門的末段是一組四句:「所攝。有法是陰所攝非諦所攝、有法是諦」〔T32 448c17〕「所攝非陰所攝、有法是陰所攝亦諦所攝」〔T32 448c18〕「有法非陰所攝亦非諦所攝」〔T32 448c19〕。
是陰非諦、是諦非陰、亦陰亦諦、非陰非諦——四句俱足。
而更該記的是:四句各出其實,一句不空懸。是陰非諦者,非根所縛的色與道相應的沙門果;「攝。泥洹是諦所攝非陰所攝。三諦是陰所」〔T32 448c21〕「攝亦諦所攝。制者非陰所攝亦非諦所攝」〔T32 448c22〕。
這裡有一處自己扣得很緊的地方。泥洹既然是諦所攝而非陰所攝,那麼「三諦」那個三,就只能是苦、習、道而不含滅——論文不明說,但四句自身把它逼出來了。本編只記這層相貫,不代論文另立說。
還有一個字全論只出現這一次:制〔T32 448c22〕。它被放在第四句——既非陰所攝、也非諦所攝。論文不釋其義,本編也不代解。
末門破格:收語一破,全局隨收
現在回到所見。
前三門各以一句自收:「如是以句義可知」〔T32 448b28〕、「如是以相可知」〔T32 448c04〕、「如是以分別可知」〔T32 448c08〕。三句一個模子。
第四門呢?它不用這個收語。它作:「如是以行,於陰知分別方便。此謂陰方便」〔T32 448c23〕。
一破格,全局就隨之收住了。因為第四門走到末尾,收的已經不是「攝」這一門,是整個陰方便。
隨後還有一行夾註:「(陰方便已竟)」〔T32 448c24〕。
這句「已竟」不是孤例。全論之中,這樣的收語凡五見——448c24、449c24、450a16、451c27、453b27。五個收語,正是本品五個方便各一。陰竟於此,入竟於 449c24,界竟於 450a16,因緣竟於 451c27,聖諦竟於 453b27。
品首列五個名字,品中就有五個「已竟」與之相對。讀本品若把這五個收語標出來,全品的骨架一眼就明白了——這也是一個帶得走的讀法。
一條校記,改了正文
最後記一件字面上的事。
本段設問處,大正本作「想」,而校本依麗本改作「相」,我們現在讀到的正文是「相」〔T32 448b29〕。這不是「某本作某」的記錄,是校本動了正文;本編從校本所呈之字,故此處不從大正。
可以就近相參的是總標:四門的名字作「以相、以分別、以攝」〔T32 448b26〕。門名既是「相」,設問處作「相」便與總標相貫。本編只記這層相參,不代考定。
另一條是「識者謂知相」的「謂」,四本作「識」〔T32 448c03〕;若從四本,這一目就與上四目的句式微異。並錄不判,本文從底本。
帶走三件:一個所見——四門重看而末門不照式收:前三門各以自收之語作結,第四門改作「如是以行,於陰知分別方便。此謂陰方便」〔T32 448c23〕,收語一破而全局隨收,本品第一個方便至此關門。一個讀法——先認體例再讀內容:同一段之內四門四體(界說·三段式·三種列目·所攝繫屬),一種也不重複;並把全論五處「已竟」標出來,全品骨架即明。一處停問——問五陰之句義而答文出六目,多出的「陰者種類集義」〔T32 448b28〕擺在五目之後而不在其前:為什麼要多解這一個?本編照錄不代刪。
還有三件小事該記著:相門五目之足處有三個都是觸〔T32 448c01·448c02·448c03〕;「三種攝」的三個名字被斷句拆散而靠下文次第還原〔T32 448c09〕;泥洹既是諦所攝非陰所攝,則「三諦」之三只能是苦、習、道而不含滅——論文不明說,四句自身把它逼出來。
The five aggregates have now been explained. This passage turns back and looks at them four more times.
The central observation can be stated first: this passage has the shape “four approaches look again, and the last gathers in the whole.” The first three each close with a sentence of their own; the fourth suddenly leaves that closing formula aside—because it closes not only that approach but the entire method concerning the aggregates.
And “method concerning the aggregates” is the first of the five major sections in this chapter. At the end of this passage, that first section closes its door.
First See the Frame: The Chapter’s Opening Sentence
To see this passage’s place clearly, we have to return to the opening of the chapter.
At its opening, the chapter says that the meditator “should arouse a method in five fields” 〔T32 445c13〕, “namely, the method concerning the aggregates, sense bases, elements, and conditionality” 〔T32 445c14〕, “and the method concerning noble truths” 〔T32 445c15〕. The five names are set down all at once; the text then opens and closes them one by one.
From there to here, the treatise has remained with the first—the aggregates. It explains form, feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness one by one. The final sentence on consciousness, “this is called the aggregate of consciousness; this is called the five aggregates” 〔T32 448b24〕, closes the five aggregates. Yet the method concerning the aggregates itself has not closed.
This passage is that closure.
General Heading: Four Approaches, One More than in the Previous Passage
The passage begins: “Further, these five aggregates are distinguished in four ways: by phrase-meaning” 〔T32 448b25〕, “by characteristic, by classification, and by inclusion” 〔T32 448b26〕.
The preceding passage has just used the same formula—the aggregate of consciousness is treated in “three ways.” Here there are four; the next passage on the twelve sense bases has five 〔T32 449a07〕. Three, four, five: the number rises across three consecutive passages. First the text announces the number of approaches, then names them, then poses a question for each; it repeats that procedure three times, word for word.
How to Read: Recognize the Form before Reading the Content
The reading practice this passage offers lies in the form of its four approaches: within a single passage, each of the four uses a different form, and not one form is repeated. Once the form is recognized, the content becomes quicker to read.
The first approach takes the form of definition, one item to a sentence: “form” 〔T32 448b26〕 “means manifestation; feeling means what can be felt; perception means knowing; formations mean making; consciousness” 〔T32 448b27〕 “means understanding” 〔T32 448b28〕—a given term has a given meaning, and nothing more.
The second approach suddenly changes form: “Question: How by characteristic? Answer: Form has its own form as its characteristic, like seeing a thorn; the four great elements” 〔T32 448b29〕 “are its basis. Feeling has feeling as its characteristic, like a grave leprous illness; contact is its basis” 〔T32 448c01〕. One characteristic, one simile, and one basis make a three-part sentence. This three-part form is not new—the thirty-two entries under the aggregate of formations two passages earlier all follow it 〔T32 447c13–448a18〕. After an intervening passage on consciousness that establishes not a single simile, it returns here and is applied to five entries.
The third changes again: it lists three kinds, giving each its own contents. The fourth changes once more: throughout it uses “is included” to assign membership, thirty occurrences in an unbroken run.
Four approaches, four forms. If the reader does not first recognize the form, the similes in the second approach will be taken as idle embellishment, and the repeated “is included” in the fourth as a heap of repetition. Once the forms are recognized, the point becomes clear: the second approach supplies images; the fourth establishes inclusion.
Second Approach: Five Bases, Three of Them Contact
The second approach deserves a closer look.
Form has the four great elements as its basis, and consciousness has name-and-form. Feeling, perception, and formations, however, all have contact as their basis 〔T32 448c01·448c02·448c03〕. Of five bases, three are tied to the same place.
The treatise does not explain why. Only the distribution itself can be verified: the middle three aggregates share one source, while the two at the ends each have their own basis. This edition records the distribution as it stands and does not supply a reconciliation.
The similes are also worth remembering: seeing a thorn, a grave leprous illness, making an image, turning a wheel, and knowing a taste. Of these five similes, half are drawn from pain and implements, and half from making and tasting—they follow the same path as the thirty-two everyday similes in the formations passage two sections earlier, without recourse to marvels.
Pause: Asked about Five Aggregates, the Answer Gives Six Items
Now pause at the first approach.
The question concerns the phrase-meanings of the five aggregates. The answer, however, lists six: form, feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness—and then, after “means understanding,” it adds “aggregate means a gathered class” 〔T32 448b28〕.
Within its account of the phrase-meanings of the five aggregates, the treatise also takes the occasion to explain the word “aggregate” itself.
Pause and ask one question: why explain this additional item?
This passage cannot answer. Only two things can be verified: first, the question concerns five aggregates but the answer gives six items; second, the four-character expression 種類集義, “gathered class,” occurs only once in the entire treatise 〔T32 448b28〕.
Its position is also striking—it does not stand before the five items as a general heading, but comes after them as the final entry. If it came first, the collective name would be established before the items were divided; coming last, it is as though the treatise turns back after explaining all five to add one sentence: why are all five called “aggregates”?
This edition records the extra item as it stands. It neither deletes it nor supplies an explanation for why it appears.
Fourth Approach: Three Kinds of Inclusion, Their Three Names Broken Apart by Punctuation
The opening of the fourth approach demands close attention: “Question: How by inclusion? Answer: inclusion is of three kinds: sense-base inclusion, element-inclusion-truth, inclusion” 〔T32 448c09〕.
The treatise itself reports three kinds. Yet the punctuation on the page joins “truth” to the end of “element inclusion,” leaving only the isolated word “inclusion” at the end.
The three names can still be recovered. The following discussion proceeds one by one in the order of sense base, element, and truth: first, “the aggregate of form is included in eleven sense bases; the three aggregates are included in the Dhamma base; the aggregate of consciousness in the mind base” 〔T32 448c10〕; next, eleven elements, the Dhamma element, and “the aggregate is included in seven elements” 〔T32 448c12〕; then, “the mind-consciousness element. The five aggregates may be included in truth or not included in truth” 〔T32 448c14〕. Sense base, element, truth: not one is missing.
Once again, the warrant for the restoration lies in the sequence that follows, not in the surface wording. This is already the sixth place in this chapter where context is needed to restore something run together or broken by punctuation. This edition records the original characters as they stand and does not alter the punctuation.
One further correspondence is worth recording. The aggregate of consciousness is “included in seven elements” 〔T32 448c12〕—and that seven is precisely the “seven consciousnesses” of the preceding passage 〔T32 448a26〕. When the number matches, the inclusion matches.
Four Alternatives: Not One Left Empty
The final part of the fourth approach gives four alternatives: “Some phenomena are included in the aggregates but not in truth; some are included in truth” 〔T32 448c17〕 “but not in the aggregates; some are included in both the aggregates and truth” 〔T32 448c18〕 “and some are included in neither the aggregates nor truth” 〔T32 448c19〕.
Aggregate but not truth; truth but not aggregate; both aggregate and truth; neither aggregate nor truth—the four alternatives are complete.
More important, each of the four alternatives gives its actual instance; not one is left empty. For aggregate but not truth, it names form not bound to a faculty and fruits of recluseship associated with the path, then continues: “Included. Nibbāna is included in truth but not in the aggregates. The three truths are included in the aggregates” 〔T32 448c21〕 “and also included in truth. Regulation is included in neither the aggregates nor truth” 〔T32 448c22〕.
The passage locks together tightly at one point. Since Nibbāna is included in truth but not in the aggregates, the “three” in “three truths” can only be suffering, origin, and path, without cessation—the treatise does not say this explicitly, but the four alternatives themselves compel it. This edition records only that internal connection and does not establish a separate thesis on the treatise’s behalf.
One further character occurs only once in the entire treatise: 制, “regulation” 〔T32 448c22〕. It is placed in the fourth alternative—neither included in the aggregates nor included in truth. The treatise does not explain its meaning, and this edition does not supply one.
The Final Approach Breaks the Pattern, and the Whole Closes with It
Now return to the central observation.
The first three approaches each close with a sentence of their own: “Thus they can be known by phrase-meaning” 〔T32 448b28〕, “Thus they can be known by characteristic” 〔T32 448c04〕, and “Thus they can be known by classification” 〔T32 448c08〕. All three follow one pattern.
What does the fourth do? It does not use that closing formula. Instead it says: “Thus, through these approaches, one knows the method of distinguishing the aggregates. This is called the method concerning the aggregates” 〔T32 448c23〕.
Once the closing formula breaks, the whole structure closes with it. By the time the fourth approach reaches its end, what it closes is no longer the approach of inclusion alone, but the entire method concerning the aggregates.
A one-line interlinear note follows: “(The method concerning the aggregates is complete)” 〔T32 448c24〕.
This “is complete” is not an isolated case. The same closing formula occurs five times in the entire treatise—448c24, 449c24, 450a16, 451c27, and 453b27. Those five closing formulas correspond one for one to the five methods in this chapter. The aggregate method ends here, the sense-base method at 449c24, the element method at 450a16, the method concerning conditionality at 451c27, and the method concerning noble truths at 453b27.
The chapter’s opening gives five names, and within the chapter five “is complete” formulas answer them. If those five closures are marked while reading, the chapter’s entire skeleton becomes visible at a glance—another reading practice to carry away.
One Critical Note Changed the Body Text
One final matter of wording should be recorded.
At the question in this passage, the Taishō text has 想, while the critical edition follows the Korean edition and changes it to 相; the body now before us reads 相 〔T32 448b29〕. This is not a note merely recording that “one witness reads such-and-such”: the critical edition changed the body text. This edition follows the character displayed in the critical text and therefore does not follow the Taishō reading here.
For a nearby comparison, the general heading names the approaches as “by characteristic, by classification, and by inclusion” 〔T32 448b26〕. Since the approach is named “characteristic,” reading “characteristic” in the question connects it with the general heading. This edition records only that local correspondence and does not adjudicate the reading.
The other note concerns 謂 in “consciousness has knowing as its characteristic”; all four witnesses read 識 instead 〔T32 448c03〕. If the four witnesses are followed, this entry differs slightly in syntax from the preceding four. Both readings are recorded without decision; the body follows the base.
Carry away three things. One observation: four approaches reexamine the aggregates, and the final approach does not use the standard closure. The first three end with their own closing formulas; the fourth changes to “Thus, through these approaches, one knows the method of distinguishing the aggregates. This is called the method concerning the aggregates” 〔T32 448c23〕. Once the closing formula breaks, the whole structure closes with it, and the first of the chapter’s five methods closes its door. One reading practice: recognize the form before reading the content. Within one passage the four approaches use four forms—definition, a three-part form, three classifications, and repeated inclusion—and not one is repeated; mark the five occurrences of “is complete” in the treatise as well, and the chapter’s skeleton becomes clear. One place to pause: the question asks for the phrase-meanings of five aggregates, but the answer gives six items. The extra “aggregate means a gathered class” 〔T32 448b28〕 comes after the five rather than before them. Why explain this additional item? This edition records it as it stands and does not delete it.
Remember three smaller matters as well: three of the five bases in the characteristic approach are contact 〔T32 448c01·448c02·448c03〕; punctuation breaks apart the three names under threefold inclusion, and the following sequence restores them 〔T32 448c09〕; since Nibbāna is included in truth but not in the aggregates, the three truths must be suffering, origin, and path, without cessation—the treatise does not say this explicitly, but the four alternatives themselves compel it.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Phrase-Meaning, Characteristic, Classification, and Inclusion of the Five Aggregates · Exposition · Summer 2026
十二入的句義、境界與緣Phrase-Meaning, Domain, and Conditions of the Twelve Sense Bases
全文五層 →Full five layers →陰方便關門之後,第二扇門開了。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段裡,論文自己立了一個判斷,隨即引進兩則不同的說法;而這兩則說法恰好一一把它剛剛排除的那兩根收了回來——先是耳,再是眼。兩則都給了理由,論文一則也不裁。
境界門先立一判,隨後連引兩則異說,各撤回所排除的一根;論文對兩說皆不裁,逕以收語作結。
先把十二入立定
段首標列:「答:十二入,眼入色入、耳入聲」〔T32 448c25〕「入、鼻入香入、舌入味入、身入觸入、意入法」〔T32 448c26〕入。
十二個名目排成六對——每一對之內不加頓號,對與對之間才加。內外相配的形,在標列的斷句上就已經看得見。
五個根入用同一個式子出五次:「入。於是眼入者,是界清淨,以是見色。色入者,」〔T32 448c27〕,耳、鼻、舌、身照做,到「境界。身入者,是界清淨,以是觸細滑。觸入者,」〔T32 449a03〕仍是一字不易。「是界清淨」四字全論只出現五次,五次都在這裡。
五個境入就不那麼齊了。聲入、味入、觸入都作「是界」起句,而色入作「界色形摸是眼境界」〔T32 448c28〕、香入作「清淨,以是嗅香。香入者,界香鼻境界。舌入」〔T32 449a01〕——這兩個少了一個「是」字。照錄不代齊。
意入是「入者,是七識界。法入者,是三無色陰及十八」〔T32 449a05〕「細色及泥洹」〔T32 449a06〕。那個七,正是識陰段的「此七識」〔T32 448a26〕,也正是陰方便說的「識陰七界所攝」〔T32 448c11–12〕。同一個七,三段各出一次而不相說明。
讀法:遇自報之數,先數它連寫的名
本段交出的讀法,是本品一路讀下來最有用的一件工具。
總標說:「五行所勝可知。如是以句義、以境界以緣、以」〔T32 449a07〕「彼夾勝心起、以攝」〔T32 449a08〕。
自報五行。可是字面上頓號只分出四段——「以境界以緣」中間沒有斷。論文自己報的數,就是還原斷句的憑據:句義、境界、緣、夾勝心起、攝,正得五。其後也正依這五個逐一設問。
同一把工具,到緣門派上大用場。
緣門的答文是這樣的:「意生眼識。於是眼者為眼識,以四緣成緣。」〔T32 449a18〕「初生依根有緣色者,以三緣成緣。初生事有」〔T32 449a19〕「緣光者,以三緣成緣。初生依有緣作意者,以」〔T32 449a20〕「二緣成緣。次第非有緣」〔T32 449a21〕。
第一眼看去,這是一團看不出斷處的字。可是每一句都自報了數——四、三、三、二。照著數去拆:
眼之為眼識,四緣:初生、依、根、有緣。
色,三緣:初生、事、有緣。
光,三緣:初生、依、有緣。
作意,二緣:次第、非有緣。
四個數,四組名,一個不多一個不少。這不是猜的——是論文自己報的數把斷句逼出來的。
而更巧的是,同一段的末尾論文又把同一組東西寫了一遍,這一次是分列的:「者為意識,以依緣成緣;法者以事緣成緣;解」〔T32 449b03〕「脫者以依緣成緣;作意者以二緣成緣,次第」〔T32 449b04〕「緣、有緣。如是以緣可知」〔T32 449b05〕。
同一段之內,連寫與分列並見。前面用連寫,後面用分號逐項分列,還把末項的兩個名字直接寫出來。讀者若先讀了後面那一半,前面那一團就不難了。
(不過這裡有一處對不上,該記著:作意的二緣,前處作「次第非有緣」〔T32 449a21〕,後處作「次第緣、有緣」〔T32 449b04–449b05〕——前面有個「非」字,後面沒有。本編照錄不代正。)
工具交代完了。遇自報之數,先數它連寫的名對不對得上。本品從第一單元一路連寫到這裡,這把工具在每一處都用得上。
順帶看一件別處不易看見的事:五識的第三個緣
拆開之後,還能看見一件只有拆開才看得見的事。
五識之緣,論文是一句一識地排下來的:眼緣色與光,「二緣成緣。次第非有緣。緣耳聲空,作意得」〔T32 449a21〕生耳識——耳緣聲與空;「生耳識,以此分別當分別。緣鼻香風作意,」〔T32 449a22〕得生鼻識——鼻緣香與風;舌緣味與水;而身識那一句是「緣身觸」,後面沒有第三樣東西。
也就是說:眼有光、耳有空、鼻有風、舌有水,四根各有一個介乎根境之間的第三緣,而身獨無。
論文不解釋。可核的只有這個分布:四有一無。而它與上一門那個判也對得攏——上一門說「眼耳不至境界,鼻舌身至境界」,身既是到境界的,便不須那個中介之物。兩門各說各的,而其分合恰能相照。本編只記這層可核的相照,不代論文另立說。
還有一處省筆該記著:耳識那一句之後,論文逕曰「以此分別當分別」〔T32 449a22〕——一句話把其餘幾識的詳說都省了,然後又各出一句短的。該詳的地方詳一次,其餘照樣式自推,這也是本論行文的常態。
轉折:兩則異說,一一收回
現在回到所見。
境界門的答文很短:「句義可知。問:云何以境界?答:眼耳不至境界,」〔T32 449a13〕「鼻舌身至境界,意俱境界」〔T32 449a14〕。
三分立定:眼、耳不到境界;鼻、舌、身到境界;意是俱境界。
按這部書一路的體例,接下來就該是收語了。可是沒有。
接下來是:「鼻舌身至境界,意俱境界。復有說:耳者至境」〔T32 449a14〕「界。何故?唯有近障不聞聲,如說呪術。復說眼」〔T32 449a15〕「者於其自境界至境界。何故?壁外不見。如是」〔T32 449a16〕。
又有人說:耳是到境界的。理由:只有近處有障礙才聽不見聲,如所說的呪術。
又說:眼在它自己的境界上是到境界的。理由:牆壁之外就看不見。
看清楚這兩則的分布:答文排除的是眼與耳兩根,兩則異說一則救耳、一則救眼,恰好一一對應,不多不少。
而論文對這兩則的處理是——不處理。給了理由,沒有裁斷,隨即收語:如是以境界可知。
這一手值得停下來想。它不是在陳述一個定論,是在把一個未定之處原樣交出來。本編照錄不代裁,也不由此推論論主之所主。
順帶記一件形式上的事:這兩則異說之所以看得出是理由,全靠一個記號——「何故」。這個詞在本段只出現兩次〔T32 449a15·449a16〕,兩次都緊接在異說之後。看見「何故」就知道下面是理由,不是新主張。主張與理由分開讀,這一節就清楚了。
停一下:十二個名各給一個義,總名卻給了三個
第一門是句義門。十二入各給一義:「答:眼者見」〔T32 449a08〕「義,色者現義;耳者聞義,聲者鳴義;鼻者」〔T32 449a09〕嗅義……一路到「身者正持義,觸者可觸義;意者知義,法者無」〔T32 449a11〕命義。十二目,十二義,一目一義。
然後多出一項:「命義。入者無色法門義,處義受持義。如是以」〔T32 449a12〕。
「入」這個字自身也被解了——而且一連給了三個義。
上一段剛做過同樣的事:問五陰的句義,末了多出一個「陰者種類集義」〔T32 448b28〕。本品連著兩段,各在列完名目之後回頭解那個總名。
可是有一處不同:上一段的「陰」只多出一個義,本段的「入」多出三個。十二個名目每個只配一義,總名反倒配三義。
停下來問一句:為什麼?
本段答不了。可核的只有這幾件:十二目各一義;末項出三義;「無色法門義」「受持義」「正持義」三語全論各只出現這一次〔T32 449a12·449a12·449a11〕。本編照錄不代刪,也不代說明。
法事的四種,與一處對得上的數
緣門的後半忽然轉去講「法事」:「於是意者是後分心,法者是法事,此成四種:」〔T32 449a25〕。
四種是:「六內入過去現在未來第一種,五外入過去」〔T32 449a26〕「未來現在離除非入根是第二種,法入第三」〔T32 449a27〕種,第四種則是「種。十一種制名者,所謂眾生、方時、犯罪、頭」〔T32 449a28〕陀等十一項。
這裡有兩處小小的不齊,該記著。其一,第一種說「過去現在未來」,第二種說「過去未來現在」——同一組三時,兩處次第不一。其二,第一、第三兩種之前不加「是」字,第二、第四兩種加。照錄不代齊。
而第四種那十一項,恰恰是本段裡唯一一處自報之數與斷句完全相合的地方:眾生、方時、犯罪、頭陀、一切相、無所有、入定事、滅、禪定、實思惟、不實思惟——逐目數去,正得十一。
把它和總標的「以境界以緣」、緣門的四組緣名放在一起看:同一段之內,有的地方數與斷句相合,有的地方不合。所以「數對得上」不是理所當然的,它是一次一次要去核的。這也正是前面那把工具為什麼必要。
還有一個字值得記著。第四種叫「制名」〔T32 449a28〕;而上一段陰諦四句的末一句,說的是「攝亦諦所攝。制者非陰所攝亦非諦所攝」〔T32 448c22〕。同一個字,兩段相繼各出一次,論文兩處都不提對方。照錄不代會通。
帶走三件:一個所見——境界門立判之後連引二異說,二說恰各撤回答文所排除之一根(先耳、後眼),各繫「何故」之理由而論文一則不裁〔T32 449a14–449a16〕;論文隨即以收語作結。一個讀法——遇自報之數,先數它連寫的名對不對得上:總標自報五行而頓號只分四段〔T32 449a07〕;緣門自報四、三、三、二而所連寫之名恰各如其數〔T32 449a18–449a21〕;而同一段末尾又把同一組緣名分列一遍〔T32 449b03–449b05〕,前一團即可由後一半印證。一處停問——十二入各只給一義,而末項「入」字自身一連給三義〔T32 449a12〕;上一段的「陰」字只多一義:同一手法而其量不同,為什麼?本編照錄不代說明。
還有三件小事該記著:五根入「是界清淨」一式五出而全論只此五見;五境入之中色入、香入少一個「是」字;法事四種之第一種作「過去現在未來」而第二種作「過去未來現在」,二處次第不一。
After the method concerning the aggregates closes its door, the second door opens.
State the central observation first: in this passage, the treatise first lays down its own judgment and then introduces two different accounts; those two accounts restore, one by one, the two faculties it has just excluded—first the ear, then the eye. Both give reasons, and the treatise adjudicates neither.
The domain approach first establishes a judgment, then cites two alternative accounts in succession, each withdrawing the exclusion of one faculty. The treatise decides neither account and proceeds directly to its closing formula.
First Establish the Twelve Sense Bases
The opening list reads: “Answer: the twelve bases, eye base form base, ear base sound” 〔T32 448c25〕 “base, nose base odor base, tongue base taste base, body base touch base, mind base Dhamma” 〔T32 448c26〕 base.
The twelve names are arranged in six pairs—no comma is inserted within a pair; commas appear only between pairs. The pattern of internal and external correspondence is already visible in the punctuation of the list.
The five faculty bases use the same formula five times: “base. Here, as for the eye base, it is purity of the element, by means of which form is seen. As for the form base,” 〔T32 448c27〕. Ear, nose, tongue, and body follow the same form, and at “domain. As for the body base, it is purity of the element, by means of which smooth and rough are touched. As for the touch base,” 〔T32 449a03〕 not one character has changed. The four-character formula “is purity of the element” occurs only five times in the entire treatise, all five here.
The five object bases are less uniform. The sound, taste, and touch bases all begin “is the element,” whereas the form base reads “the element’s visible shape and pattern is the eye’s domain” 〔T32 448c28〕, and the odor base reads “purity, by means of which odor is smelled. As for the odor base, elemental odor, the nose’s domain. Tongue base” 〔T32 449a01〕—these two lack one occurrence of “is.” They are recorded as they stand and are not made uniform.
The mind base is “base is the seven consciousness elements. The Dhamma base is the three immaterial aggregates and eighteen” 〔T32 449a05〕 “subtle forms and Nibbāna” 〔T32 449a06〕. That seven is precisely the “these seven consciousnesses” of the consciousness-aggregate section 〔T32 448a26〕 and the aggregate method’s “the consciousness aggregate is included in seven elements” 〔T32 448c11–12〕. The same seven appears once in each of three sections, without any of them explaining the others.
Reading Practice: When a Number Is Announced, Count the Run-On Names
The reading practice given by this passage is one of the most useful tools for continuing through this chapter.
The general heading says: “It can be known as distinguished in five ways. Thus by phrase-meaning, by domain by condition, by” 〔T32 449a07〕 “the arising of the interposed superior mind, and by inclusion” 〔T32 449a08〕.
It announces five ways, yet the punctuation on the page divides only four groups—there is no break between “by domain” and “by condition.” The number announced by the treatise itself is the evidence for restoring the division: phrase-meaning, domain, condition, arising of the interposed superior mind, and inclusion make exactly five. The questions that follow also take up precisely these five in order.
The same tool becomes especially useful in the approach by conditions.
Its answer reads: “attention gives rise to eye-consciousness. Here the eye becomes a condition for eye-consciousness through four conditions” 〔T32 449a18〕. “First-arising, support, faculty, and presence. Form becomes a condition through three conditions: first-arising, object, and” 〔T32 449a19〕 “presence. Light becomes a condition through three conditions: first-arising, support, and presence. Attention becomes a condition through” 〔T32 449a20〕 “two conditions: immediacy and nonpresence” 〔T32 449a21〕.
At first sight, this is a run of words whose divisions cannot be seen. Yet every sentence announces its own number—four, three, three, two. Divide the names according to those numbers:
For the eye as a condition of eye-consciousness, four conditions: first-arising, support, faculty, and presence.
For form, three conditions: first-arising, object, and presence.
For light, three conditions: first-arising, support, and presence.
For attention, two conditions: immediacy and nonpresence.
Four numbers, four groups of names, with neither one too many nor one too few. This is not a guess—the numbers announced by the treatise itself compel the division.
More strikingly, at the end of the same passage the treatise writes the same kind of material again, now as a divided list: “mind becomes a condition for mind-consciousness through support; Dhamma becomes a condition through the object; release” 〔T32 449b03〕 “becomes a condition through support; attention becomes a condition through two conditions: immediacy” 〔T32 449b04〕 “condition and presence. Thus it can be known by conditions” 〔T32 449b05〕.
Within the same passage, run-on writing and divided listing appear side by side. The earlier part runs the names together; the later part separates each item with semicolons and directly names the final item’s two conditions. If the reader first reads the latter half, the earlier cluster is no longer difficult.
(There is, however, one discrepancy that should be retained: the two conditions of attention are earlier given as “immediacy and nonpresence” 〔T32 449a21〕, but later as “immediacy-condition and presence” 〔T32 449b04–449b05〕—the earlier passage contains “non,” while the later one does not. This edition records both and does not correct either.)
The tool has now been stated. When a number is announced, first count whether the names written together agree with it. This chapter has used run-on writing from its first unit through this point, and the tool applies at every such place.
Along the Way, Notice Something Hard to See Elsewhere: The Third Condition of the Five Consciousnesses
Once the passage has been divided, something visible only through that division comes into view.
The conditions of the five consciousnesses are arranged one consciousness per sentence. The eye is conditioned by form and light; then “becomes a condition through two conditions: immediacy and nonpresence. Conditioned by ear, sound, and space, attention enables” 〔T32 449a21〕 ear-consciousness to arise—the ear has sound and space. “Ear-consciousness arises; distinguish the rest by this distinction. Conditioned by nose, odor, wind, and attention,” 〔T32 449a22〕 nose-consciousness arises—the nose has odor and wind. The tongue has taste and water. The sentence for body-consciousness, however, is “conditioned by body and touch,” and nothing third follows it.
That is, the eye has light, the ear space, the nose wind, and the tongue water: each of four faculties has a third condition standing between faculty and object, while the body alone has none.
The treatise does not explain this. What can be checked is only the distribution: four have one, and one does not. It also accords with the preceding approach’s judgment—the preceding approach says that eye and ear do not reach their domains, while nose, tongue, and body do; since the body reaches its domain, it does not require that mediating thing. The two approaches speak in their own terms, yet their divisions illuminate one another. This edition records only that verifiable correspondence and does not formulate another position on the treatise’s behalf.
One further abbreviation should be retained. After the sentence on ear-consciousness, the treatise immediately says, “distinguish the rest by this distinction” 〔T32 449a22〕—one sentence omits the full explanation of the remaining consciousnesses, after which each receives a brief sentence. What requires detail is detailed once; the remainder is inferred from the pattern. This too is characteristic of the treatise’s manner of writing.
Turn: Two Alternative Accounts Restore One Faculty Each
Now return to the central observation.
The answer under the domain approach is brief: “It can be known by phrase-meaning. Question: How by domain? Answer: eye and ear do not reach the domain,” 〔T32 449a13〕 “nose, tongue, and body reach the domain; mind has both kinds of domain” 〔T32 449a14〕.
A threefold division is established: eye and ear do not reach the domain; nose, tongue, and body reach it; mind has both.
Following the pattern used throughout this book, a closing formula should come next. It does not.
Instead the text continues: “nose, tongue, and body reach the domain; mind has both kinds of domain. Further, some say: the ear reaches its domain” 〔T32 449a14〕. “Why? Only when there is a nearby obstruction is sound not heard, as stated regarding spells. Further, it is said that the eye” 〔T32 449a15〕 “reaches the domain with respect to its own domain. Why? One does not see beyond a wall. Thus” 〔T32 449a16〕.
Some further say: the ear reaches its domain. The reason is that sound is not heard only when a nearby obstruction intervenes, as stated regarding spells.
It is further said: the eye reaches the domain within its own domain. The reason is that one does not see beyond a wall.
Observe the distribution of these two accounts. The answer excludes the eye and ear, while one alternative restores the ear and the other restores the eye—an exact one-for-one correspondence, with neither more nor less.
The treatise’s handling of these two accounts is not to handle them further. It gives their reasons, offers no decision, and immediately closes: thus it can be known by domain.
This deserves a pause. It is not stating a settled conclusion; it is handing over an unsettled point intact. This edition records it without adjudicating it and does not infer from it which position the author of the treatise held.
One formal detail should also be retained. These two alternatives can be recognized as reasons through a single marker—“why?” The expression occurs only twice in this passage 〔T32 449a15·449a16〕, and both occurrences immediately follow an alternative account. When “why?” appears, what follows is a reason, not a new claim. Once claim and reason are read separately, the section becomes clear.
Pause: The Twelve Names Each Receive One Meaning, but the Collective Name Receives Three
The first approach is phrase-meaning. Each of the twelve bases receives one meaning: “Answer: eye means seeing” 〔T32 449a08〕 “; form means manifestation; ear means hearing; sound means resonance; nose means” 〔T32 449a09〕 smelling … the sequence continues until “body means right sustaining; touch means touchability; mind means knowing; Dhamma means life-” 〔T32 449a11〕 lessness. Twelve items, twelve meanings, one meaning for each item.
Then an additional item appears: “lessness as its meaning. Base means a door for immaterial qualities, a locus, and sustaining. Thus by” 〔T32 449a12〕.
The word “base” itself is also explained—and it is given three meanings in succession.
The preceding section did the same thing. After asking about the phrase-meanings of the five aggregates, it added at the end that “aggregate means a gathering of kinds” 〔T32 448b28〕. In two consecutive sections of this chapter, the treatise finishes listing the individual names and then returns to explain the collective name.
There is, however, one difference. The preceding section adds only one meaning for “aggregate,” while this section adds three for “base.” Each of the twelve individual names receives only one meaning, but the collective name receives three.
Pause and ask: why?
This passage cannot answer. Only these facts can be checked: the twelve items each receive one meaning; the final item receives three; and “door for immaterial qualities,” “sustaining,” and “right sustaining” each occurs only once in the entire treatise 〔T32 449a12·449a12·449a11〕. This edition records them without deleting anything and does not supply an explanation.
Four Kinds of Dhamma-Object, and One Count That Matches
The latter half of the conditions approach suddenly turns to the “Dhamma-object”: “Here, mind is the later-phase mind; Dhamma is the Dhamma-object. This forms four kinds” 〔T32 449a25〕.
The four kinds are: “the six internal bases—past, present, future—the first kind; the five external bases—past” 〔T32 449a26〕 “future, present—excluding what is not a faculty-base, is the second kind; the Dhamma base, the third” 〔T32 449a27〕 kind. The fourth is “kind. Eleven kinds of conventional naming, namely beings, direction and time, offenses, and ascetic practice” 〔T32 449a28〕 among its eleven items.
Two small irregularities should be retained. First, the first kind says “past, present, future,” while the second says “past, future, present”—the same three times appear in different orders. Second, the source does not place “is” before the first and third kinds, but does before the second and fourth. They are recorded without being made uniform.
The fourth kind’s eleven items are the only place in this passage where the announced number and the punctuation agree completely: beings, direction and time, offense, ascetic practice, all signs, nothingness, entry into concentration, cessation, jhāna, true reflection, and untrue reflection—counting them one by one gives exactly eleven.
Compare this with the general heading’s “by domain by condition” and with the four groups of condition-names. Within the same passage, some numbers agree with the punctuation and some do not. A number’s agreement is therefore not something to assume; it must be checked each time. This is precisely why the preceding reading practice is necessary.
One further word deserves notice. The fourth kind is called “conventional naming” 〔T32 449a28〕; the final sentence in the preceding section’s fourfold account of aggregates and truths says, “Inclusion is also included in truth. What is conventionally named is included neither in the aggregates nor in truth” 〔T32 448c22〕. The same word for conventional naming occurs once in each of two consecutive sections, and the treatise does not refer either place to the other. This edition records the two and does not reconcile them.
Carry away three things. One observation—after the domain approach establishes its judgment, it cites two alternative accounts in succession; each restores one of the faculties excluded by the answer, first the ear and then the eye, and each is joined to a reason marked by “why?” The treatise adjudicates neither 〔T32 449a14–449a16〕 and immediately gives its closing formula. One reading practice—when a number is announced, first count whether the names written together agree with it: the general heading announces five ways while its punctuation divides only four groups 〔T32 449a07〕; the conditions approach announces four, three, three, and two, and the run-on names agree with each number 〔T32 449a18–449a21〕; later in the same passage the corresponding condition-names appear again in divided form 〔T32 449b03–449b05〕, allowing the earlier cluster to be checked against the latter half. One place to pause—the twelve bases each receive only one meaning, while the final word “base” itself receives three in succession 〔T32 449a12〕; the preceding word “aggregate” receives only one. Why does the same method yield different quantities? This edition records the difference without explaining it.
Three smaller matters should also be retained: the formula “is purity of the element” occurs five times for the five faculty bases and nowhere else in the treatise; among the five object bases, the form and odor bases lack one occurrence of “is”; and among the four kinds of Dhamma-object, the first gives the order “past, present, future,” while the second gives “past, future, present.”
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Phrase-Meaning, Domain, and Conditions of the Twelve Sense Bases · Exposition · Summer 2026
夾勝心起、譬喻與攝The Arising of the Interposed Superior Mind, Its Simile, and Inclusion
全文五層 →Full five layers →這是《解脫道論》裡最好看的一段。
先把所見說在前頭:論文在這裡把同一件事講了兩遍——先用心的名字排一遍,再用王與菴羅果的故事演一遍;而兩遍逐項相對,一項不缺。譬不是插圖,是第二份清單。兩份並排讀,才看得出論文在哪兩處換了名,也才看得出「七心」的七是怎麼數出來的。
第一遍:七個名字,環環相扣
設問是「問:云何以夾勝心起?」〔T32 449b05〕。答文先分三等——上、中、下;上事那一等最完整,「夾成七心,無間生阿毘地獄,從有分心、轉」〔T32 449b07〕「見心、所受心、分別心、令起心、速心、彼事心」〔T32 449b08〕。
自報是七心。可是照頓號去數,「有分心」以下只得六個名——除非把「轉見心」拆成轉心與見心。
拆不拆,下文自己說了算。逐一開講的時候,論文把每一個心都點了名:轉心、見心、受心、分別心、令起心、速行心、彼事果報心。正得七,而有分心不在其數。
有分心不在數裡,是因為它不是這七個之中的一步——它是這七步之前的狀態,也是這七步之後回去的地方。「於是有分心者,是於此有根心如牽縷」〔T32 449b09〕;走完一輪,「不以方便生彼事果報心,從彼更度有分心」〔T32 449b17〕。起點與歸宿是同一個。
(順帶記著:「有分心」這三個字,全論只出現十次,十次都在這一段裡。這是本段獨有的一個詞。)
七心的排法用的是頂真:前一個心的名字,就是下一句的開頭。「轉生轉心,轉心次第依眼應轉,現得見生見」〔T32 449b12〕「心。見心次第已見,以心現受生受心。受心次」〔T32 449b13〕第……一環扣一環,扣到最後一環又扣回有分心。
這種寫法本身就是內容:它讓人看見這不是七件並列的事,是一條非走不可的次序。
第二遍:王殿上的那一天
然後論文問:「問:何譬喻?」〔T32 449b18〕
答文換成一個故事。
王在殿上關著城門睡覺,傴女摩著王的腳,夫人坐著,大臣和直閣列在王前,聾人守著門。守園人拿菴羅果來敲門。王聽見聲音醒了,叫僂女去開門。僂女以相貌向聾人示意,聾人會意開了門,見到菴羅果。捉刀女接了果子拿進來呈給大臣,大臣交給夫人,夫人洗淨、或熟或生各安一處,然後奉給王。王吃了,吃完就說它好不好,然後又睡去。
故事說完,論文不作一句總結,直接逐項對回去:
「德,還復更眠。如是如王臥,如有分心可知」〔T32 449b26〕。守園人打門,就是眼門的色事之夾。王聞聲而覺、教傴女開門,就是以緣展轉界、依處而有分心起。「女以相貌教聾人開門,如是轉心可知。如聾」〔T32 449c01〕「人開門見菴羅菓,如是眼識可知。如捉刀女」〔T32 449c02〕「受彼菓將現大臣,如是受持心可知。如大臣」〔T32 449c03〕「取菓授與夫人,如是分別心可知」〔T32 449c04〕。夫人洗淨安置奉王是令起心,王食是速心,王說功德非功德是彼事果報心,「心可知。如王更眠,如是有分心度可知。於」〔T32 449c08〕。
十一組對配,一項不缺。
讀法:把譬與所譬並排成兩欄
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:凡遇譬喻逐項而下、各繫一句收語者,把譬與所譬並排成兩欄讀,不要只讀故事。
並排之後,三件只讀故事看不出的事就浮出來了。
其一,兩遍之間換了兩個名。心名那一遍作見心、受心;譬喻那一遍作眼識、受持心。同一步而二名,論文兩處都不說它們是同一個。本編照錄不代齊。
其二,故事裡有一個人的名字換了。開頭是「傴女摩」〔T32 449b18〕王足,王醒之後卻是「聞聲覺,王勅僂女:汝當開門。僂女即奉命,」〔T32 449b21〕;到對配那一遍,又回頭作傴女。同一個人,同一段之內三處作傴女、二處作僂女。照錄不代齊。
其三,故事那一遍的一處斷句,被對配那一遍改正了。故事說「菴羅菓。王捉刀,女受菓將入,現於大臣。大臣」〔T32 449b23〕——照這個斷法,是王拿起刀、有個女子接過果子。可是對配那一遍明明白白寫著「如捉刀女」〔T32 449c02〕「受彼菓將現大臣」〔T32 449c03〕:捉刀女是一個人的名號。
本品這一路讀來,要靠上下文還原斷句的地方已經接連出現;而這一處最乾脆——還原的憑據就在同一段的後半,隔了不到十行。
並排之後還看得見的:這個宮廷是怎麼設計的
兩欄一並排,故事那一欄自己的結構也就露出來了。
先數手。果子從門外到王口中,中間經過幾道手:守園人(門外)→聾人(開門)→捉刀女(接進來)→大臣→夫人→王。六道手,一道也不能少,而且次序不能顛倒。論文用這個排場對的,正是七心那條非走不可的次序——中間任何一步都不是可有可無的裝飾。
再看兩頭。故事開頭是王臥,故事結尾是王「還復更眠」;對配那一欄,開頭是有分心,結尾是有分心度。一個圓,回到原處。這一點單看心名那一遍也看得見,但看故事更明白:王從頭到尾沒有離開他的殿,只是醒了一下、吃了一口、又睡去。
然後看幾個角色的來歷。守門的是聾人,摩王足而受命傳話的是傴女。論文不解釋何以取聾者守門、傴者傳命;可核的只有字面,以及由字面帶出的一個細節——傳命那一下不能用說的,只能「以相貌語聾人言」〔T32 449b22〕,正因為守門的聽不見。到對配那一欄,這一下也照樣被點名:「女以相貌教聾人開門,如是轉心可知」〔T32 449c01〕。「相貌」二字全論只出現兩次,兩次都在這一組對配的兩端。
最後看一處看不懂的。七心那一句的中間,插著五個字:「夾成七心,無間生阿毘地獄」〔T32 449b07〕。「阿毘地獄」四字全論只出現這一次,而本段前後都不再提它,譬喻那一遍也沒有任何一項與它相對。
它是在說什麼?是舉一個最強之「上事」為例,還是別有所承?本段不說,本編也不代補。可核的只有三件:全論一見;本段不釋;十一組對配之中無一組與之相配。凡遇這樣的字,如實記下它的孤立,比替它找一個來歷要誠實。
中事、下事,與意門
七心那一串是上事才有的。中事之夾,「速心無間度彼有心」〔T32 449c09〕,走到速心就回去了;下事之夾,「下事令起心無間度有分心」〔T32 449c10〕,走到令起心就回去了。上、中、下之別,就在這條路走多遠。
其餘耳、鼻、舌、身四門呢?論文一句帶過:如是餘於門可知。該詳的地方詳一次,其餘照樣式自推——上一個單元剛用過同一手法。
順帶記一個字。中、下二事之句,各用了一個「無間」——速心無間度、令起心無間度;而本段開頭那句看不懂的話,用的也是這兩個字〔T32 449b07〕。本段「無間」凡三見,二見在此明明白白是「不隔一步就回去」的意思。孤立的那一見是否同義,本段不足以定;記下這層字面上的相連,比替它另找一個來歷穩當。
意門則另是一路:「知。於意門無事夾,以作意緣、以解脫行,於」〔T32 449c11〕「意門成取事」〔T32 449c12〕。意門沒有事夾——沒有外面來的那一下敲門。
停一下:有分心到底算不算一心
現在停在一個數上。
眼門那邊,論文自報七心,而逐講之名正得七——有分心不在其數。
可是意門這邊,論文說「意門成取事。於是於上事三心生,有分心、轉」〔T32 449c12〕「心、速心」〔T32 449c13〕——三心生,而所列的第一個就是有分心。
同一段之內,有分心一處不在數裡、一處在數裡。
這是同一個算法嗎?論文不說。
而這一句還連著另一個懸而未決的地方:接下去是「心、速心。彼事心於中及下事二心生,轉心」〔T32 449c13〕「及速心」〔T32 449c14〕——「彼事心」那三個字,究竟屬上還是屬下?屬上,則上事成四心而與自報的三不合;屬下,則如底本的斷法。論文自身不斷。
可核的只有這幾件:眼門七心之名逐一可數而不含有分心;意門三心之列以有分心居首;「彼事心」三字懸在兩句之間。本編二讀並記、照原字錄,不代會通,也不由此推論其心識之說。
最後一門,與一處給前段作證的地方
第五門是攝:「以攝?答:三種攝,陰攝、界攝、諦攝」〔T32 449c17〕。
這一句值得和上一個方便並排看。上一個方便的攝門也說「三種攝」,而它的三個名字在字面上作入攝、界攝諦、攝——中間那個頓號落錯了地方,最後剩一個孤零零的攝字。這裡的三個名字則逐一分開,一無夾雜。
同一個句式,一處寫壞、一處寫好;寫好的那一處,就是寫壞那一處的證人。上一單元靠下文次第還原的三個名,到這裡得到了一份現成的佐證。
而三處「三種攝」的內容還各不相同:陰方便攝的是入、界、諦;入方便攝的是陰、界、諦;後面聖諦方便攝的是陰、入、界〔T32 453b23〕。每一個方便,都拿其餘三個框子來量自己。這是本品編排上的一條暗線。
攝門的內容也有兩處扣得緊:意入是七界所攝〔T32 449c19〕——還是那個七;法入「陰所攝。意入,識陰所攝。法入,除泥洹,四陰」〔T32 449c18〕所攝——而陰方便早說過泥洹是諦所攝而非陰所攝〔T32 448c21〕,兩處正相貫。
攝門的三欄,值得逐欄看一眼它怎麼數。
陰欄:十二入之中,十入歸色陰,意入歸識陰,法入除掉泥洹之後歸四陰。十、一、一,正好把十二個分完。
界欄:十一入歸十一界,意入獨歸七界。十一加一,仍是十二個入;而界那一邊是十一加七,成十八。十八界之數就是這樣從十二入裡長出來的——論文不點破,數自己會說。而下一段開講的,正是十八界〔T32 449c25〕。
諦欄最細:五內入盡歸苦諦,五外入「內入,苦諦所攝。五外入,或苦諦所攝、或非苦」〔T32 449c20〕諦所攝,意入亦或是或非,法入則「入,或四諦所攝、或非苦諦所攝」〔T32 449c22〕。內的一定是苦,外的則兩可——五內入是根,根必屬己身而在苦中;外的則不必然。這一層論文不申說,只把「或」字擺在該擺的地方。
三欄看下來,攝門不是在重述十二入,是在把十二入放進另外三個框子裡各量一次。量完,這一個方便才算走到底。
最後收句:「知。如是以此行,於入智令起方便,此謂入方」〔T32 449c23〕「便(入方便已竟)」〔T32 449c24〕。
第二扇門關上了。五個「已竟」,這是第二個。
帶走三件:一個所見——同一件事講兩遍(心名一遍、譬喻一遍),十一組逐項相對而一項不缺;譬不是插圖,是第二份清單。一個讀法——把譬與所譬並排成兩欄讀:並排之後才看得見兩遍之間換了二名(見心↔眼識·受心↔受持心)、一個人換了名(傴女↔僂女)、一處斷句被後半改正(「王捉刀,女」↔「捉刀女」〔T32 449b23·449c02〕)。一處停問——眼門自報七心而其名不含有分心〔T32 449b07–449b08〕,意門自報三心而所列以有分心居首〔T32 449c12〕:有分心到底算不算一心? 論文不說,本編二讀並記不代會通。
還有兩件小事該記著:「有分心」三字全論十見而盡在本段;三處「三種攝」之三名各異(陰方便攝入界諦·入方便攝陰界諦·聖諦方便攝陰入界),每一個方便都拿其餘三個框子來量自己。
This is one of the most engaging passages in the Path of Freedom.
Let the central observation be stated first: here the treatise tells the same event twice—first by arranging the names of minds, then by enacting it in the story of a king and a mango; and the two tellings correspond item for item, with not one missing. The simile is not an illustration but a second list. Only by reading the two side by side can one see where the treatise changes two names, and how the seven in “seven minds” is counted.
First Telling: Seven Names Linked in a Chain
The question is “Question: How does the interposed superior mind arise?” 〔T32 449b05〕. The answer first distinguishes three grades—superior, middling, and inferior. The superior object is the most complete: “the interposition forms seven minds, and there is immediate birth in Abi hell; from the continuum mind, turning-and-” 〔T32 449b07〕“seeing mind, receiving mind, discriminating mind, initiating mind, rapid mind, and object mind” 〔T32 449b08〕.
The text itself reports seven minds. Yet if one counts by the enumeration commas, there are only six names after “continuum mind”—unless “turning-and-seeing mind” is divided into turning mind and seeing mind.
Whether to divide it or not is decided by what follows. When the treatise explains them one by one, it names every mind: turning mind, seeing mind, receiving mind, discriminating mind, initiating mind, rapid-running mind, and the resultant mind for that object. That gives exactly seven, and continuum mind is not included in the count.
Continuum mind is outside the count because it is not one step among these seven—it is the state before the seven steps and the place to which they return afterward. “Here, the continuum mind is the root mind in this existence, like drawing a thread” 〔T32 449b09〕; after the circuit is complete, “without a method, the resultant mind for that object arises; from there it passes again into the continuum mind” 〔T32 449b17〕. The point of departure and the destination are the same.
(Keep one incidental point in mind: the three-character expression rendered “continuum mind” occurs only ten times in the entire treatise, all ten in this passage. It is a term unique to this passage.)
The seven minds are arranged through chain-link repetition: the name of one mind is the opening of the next sentence. “Turning gives rise to turning mind. In the sequence of turning mind, depending on the eye it turns as appropriate; seeing becomes present and gives rise to seeing-” 〔T32 449b12〕“mind. In the sequence of seeing mind, having seen, the mind presently receives and receiving mind arises. In the sequence after receiving mind” 〔T32 449b13〕 ... One link catches the next, until the final link catches back onto the continuum mind.
This manner of writing is itself part of the content: it lets the reader see that these are not seven parallel events but a sequence that must be traversed.
Second Telling: A Day in the King’s Palace
The treatise then asks, “Question: What is the simile?” 〔T32 449b18〕
The answer changes into a story.
A king is asleep in his hall with the city gate shut. A bent woman massages the king’s feet; the queen sits nearby; a minister and palace attendants stand in ranks before the king; and a deaf man guards the gate. A gardener brings a mango and knocks at the gate. Hearing the sound, the king wakes and orders the stooped woman to open it. The stooped woman obeys and gestures to the deaf man; he understands and opens the gate, where he sees the mango. The knife-bearing woman receives the fruit and carries it inside to present to the minister. The minister hands it to the queen. The queen washes it, sets the ripe and unripe fruit each in its place, and then offers it to the king. The king eats it; when he has finished, he says whether it is good or bad, then goes back to sleep.
When the story ends, the treatise gives no sentence of summary; it maps each item directly back.
“Merit, then he sleeps again. Thus, as the king lies asleep, so the continuum mind should be understood” 〔T32 449b26〕. The gardener knocking on the gate with a mango is the interposition of a visible object at the eye door. The king hearing the sound, waking, and telling the bent woman to open the gate is the arising of the continuum mind through conditions, the elements turning in succession, and dependence on a base. “As the woman gestures to the deaf man to open the gate, so turning mind should be understood. As the deaf-” 〔T32 449c01〕“man opens the gate and sees the mango, so eye consciousness should be understood. As the knife-bearing woman” 〔T32 449c02〕“receives that fruit and carries it to present to the minister, so receiving-and-holding mind should be understood. As the minister” 〔T32 449c03〕“takes the fruit and hands it to the queen, so discriminating mind should be understood” 〔T32 449c04〕. The queen’s washing the fruit, setting the ripe and unripe each in its place, and offering it to the king is initiating mind; the king’s eating is rapid mind; and the king’s saying whether the fruit has merit or not is the resultant mind for that object. “Mind should be understood. As the king sleeps again, so passage into the continuum mind should be understood. At—” 〔T32 449c08〕.
Eleven correspondences, with not one omitted.
Reading Practice: Place the Simile and What It Represents in Two Columns
The reading practice this passage gives us is right here: whenever a simile proceeds item by item and ties each item to a closing formula, place the simile and what it represents in two columns; do not read only the story.
Once they are placed side by side, three things invisible to someone reading only the story emerge.
First, two names change between the two tellings. In the list of minds they are seeing mind and receiving mind; in the simile they are eye consciousness and receiving-and-holding mind. They are the same steps under two names, but nowhere in either telling does the treatise say that they are the same. This edition records both forms and does not harmonize them.
Second, one person in the story changes names. At the start, it is the “bent woman massages” 〔T32 449b18〕 the king’s feet; after the king wakes, however, the text says, “hearing the sound, he wakes. The king orders the stooped woman: You should open the gate. The stooped woman obeys the order,” 〔T32 449b21〕; in the mapping it returns to bent woman. The same person appears three times as bent woman and twice as stooped woman within the same passage. The forms are recorded as written and are not harmonized.
Third, one punctuation point in the story is corrected by the mapping that follows. The story says, “the mango. The king takes the knife; the woman receives the fruit, carries it inside, and presents it to the minister. The minister” 〔T32 449b23〕—with that punctuation, the king takes up a knife and a woman receives the fruit. But the mapping plainly reads, “as the knife-bearing woman” 〔T32 449c02〕“receives that fruit and carries it to present to the minister” 〔T32 449c03〕: “knife-bearing woman” is the title of a single person.
As we have followed this chapter, places where the context must restore the phrasing have appeared one after another; this one is the clearest—the evidence for restoring the punctuation lies in the second half of the same passage, less than ten lines away.
What Else the Parallel Reveals: How This Court Is Designed
Once the two columns are aligned, the structure of the story’s own column also comes into view.
First count the hands. How many hands does the fruit pass through on its way from outside the gate to the king’s mouth? The gardener (outside the gate) → the deaf man (opens the gate) → the knife-bearing woman (carries it inside) → the minister → the queen → the king. Six sets of hands; not one can be omitted, and their order cannot be reversed. What the treatise matches through this courtly arrangement is precisely the compulsory sequence of the seven minds—none of the steps in between is optional decoration.
Then look at the two ends. At the beginning of the story the king lies asleep; at the end he “sleeps again.” In the mapping column, the beginning is continuum mind and the end is passage into continuum mind. A circle, returning to its starting place. This can also be seen from the list of minds alone, but the story makes it clearer: from first to last, the king never leaves his hall; he simply wakes for a moment, takes a bite, and returns to sleep.
Then consider several of the roles. The gatekeeper is deaf; the woman who massages the king’s feet and receives his command is bent. The treatise does not explain why a deaf person guards the gate or a bent woman conveys the command. What can be verified is only the wording and one detail carried by it: when the command is passed on, it cannot be spoken; she can only “speak to the deaf man by gesture” 〔T32 449b22〕, precisely because the gatekeeper cannot hear. In the mapping column, this action is likewise expressly named: “the woman gestures to the deaf man to open the gate; so turning mind should be understood” 〔T32 449c01〕. The two-character word rendered “gesture” occurs only twice in the entire treatise, both times at the two ends of this correspondence.
Finally, consider one unintelligible place. In the middle of the sentence on seven minds, five characters are inserted: “the interposition forms seven minds, and there is immediate birth in Abi hell” 〔T32 449b07〕. The four characters rendered “Abi hell” occur only once in the entire treatise. Nothing before or after in this passage mentions them again, and nothing in the simile’s telling corresponds to them.
What does it mean? Is it giving the strongest kind of “superior object” as an example, or does it depend on something else? The passage does not say, and this edition does not supply an answer. Only three things can be checked: the expression occurs once in the entire treatise; this passage does not explain it; and none of the eleven correspondences is paired with it. When one meets wording like this, it is more honest to record its isolation exactly than to find an origin for it.
Middling and Inferior Objects, and the Mind Door
The seven-mind series belongs only to the superior object. With the interposition of a middling object, “rapid mind passes without interval into that existent mind” 〔T32 449c09〕, returning after rapid mind; with the interposition of an inferior object, “for an inferior object, initiating mind passes without interval into continuum mind” 〔T32 449c10〕, returning after initiating mind. The difference among superior, middling, and inferior lies in how far along this path the sequence travels.
What of the other four doors—ear, nose, tongue, and body? The treatise dispatches them in a single sentence: the rest at the doors should be understood in the same way. It explains in detail once where detail is needed, and the remainder is to be inferred from the pattern—the preceding unit had just used the same method.
Also note one word. The sentences for the middling and inferior objects each use “without interval”—rapid mind passes without interval; initiating mind passes without interval. The incomprehensible sentence at the start of this passage uses the same two characters 〔T32 449b07〕. “Without interval” occurs three times in this passage, and in two of them it plainly means “returning without even one intervening step.” Whether the isolated occurrence has the same meaning cannot be determined from this passage; noting the verbal connection is steadier than seeking a separate origin for it.
The mind door follows another route: “understood. At the mind door there is no object-interposition; through attention as condition and liberation as its course, at the” 〔T32 449c11〕“mind door an object is taken up” 〔T32 449c12〕. At the mind door there is no object-interposition—no knock arriving from outside.
Pause: Does the Continuum Mind Count as One Mind?
Now pause over a number.
At the eye door, the treatise itself reports seven minds, and the names in its item-by-item explanation indeed number seven—continuum mind is not included in the count.
At the mind door, however, the treatise says, “at the mind door an object is taken up. Here, with a superior object three minds arise: continuum mind, turning-” 〔T32 449c12〕“mind and rapid mind” 〔T32 449c13〕—three minds arise, and the first one listed is continuum mind.
Within the same passage, continuum mind is excluded from the count in one place and included in another.
Is this the same method of counting? The treatise does not say.
And this sentence connects to another unresolved place. What follows is “mind, rapid mind. Object mind, with middling and inferior objects, two minds arise: turning mind” 〔T32 449c13〕“and rapid mind” 〔T32 449c14〕. Do the three characters rendered “object mind” belong above or below? If they belong above, the superior object has four minds, conflicting with its own reported three; if below, the sentence follows the punctuation of the base text. The treatise itself does not divide them.
Only these points can be checked: the names of the seven minds at the eye door can be counted one by one and do not include continuum mind; the mind door’s list of three places continuum mind first; and the three characters rendered “object mind” hang between two sentences. This edition records both readings, retains the wording as found, does not harmonize them, and draws no inference from them about the text’s account of mind.
The Final Approach, and One Place That Bears Witness to an Earlier Passage
The fifth approach is inclusion: “Through inclusion? Answer: three kinds of inclusion—inclusion in the aggregates, inclusion in the elements, and inclusion in the truths” 〔T32 449c17〕.
This sentence deserves to be read beside the inclusion approach of the preceding means. That approach also says “three kinds of inclusion,” but its three names, as written, are “base-inclusion, element-inclusion-truth, inclusion”: the comma in the middle has fallen in the wrong place, leaving a solitary “inclusion” at the end. Here, by contrast, the three names are separated one by one, with nothing mixed together.
The same sentence pattern is damaged in one place and sound in another; the sound occurrence bears witness to the damaged one. The three names restored in the previous unit from the sequence that follows receive a ready-made confirmation here.
The contents of the three occurrences of “three kinds of inclusion” are also all different: the means concerning the aggregates includes the bases, elements, and truths; the means concerning the bases includes the aggregates, elements, and truths; and the later means concerning the noble truths includes the aggregates, bases, and elements 〔T32 453b23〕. Each means uses the other three frameworks to measure itself. This is a hidden thread in the chapter’s arrangement.
Two points in the content of the inclusion approach also interlock tightly. The mind base is included in seven elements 〔T32 449c19〕—again, seven. For the Dhamma base, the wording is “included in the aggregates. The mind base is included in the consciousness aggregate. The Dhamma base, excluding Nibbāna, in the four aggregates” 〔T32 449c18〕; and the preceding means concerning the aggregates had already said that Nibbāna is included in the truths, not in the aggregates 〔T32 448c21〕. The two passages fit together exactly.
The three columns of the inclusion approach are worth examining one by one to see how they count.
Aggregate column: among the twelve bases, ten belong to the form aggregate, the mind base to the consciousness aggregate, and the Dhamma base, after excluding Nibbāna, to the four aggregates. Ten, one, one: the twelve are apportioned exactly.
Element column: eleven bases belong to eleven elements, while the mind base alone belongs to seven elements. Eleven plus one still gives twelve bases; on the elements side, eleven plus seven makes eighteen. This is how the number eighteen elements grows out of the twelve bases—the treatise does not spell it out, but the numbers speak for themselves. And the very next passage begins its explanation of the eighteen elements 〔T32 449c25〕.
The truth column is the most detailed: the five internal bases are all included in the truth of suffering. Of the five external bases, the text says, “the internal bases are included in the truth of suffering. The five external bases are either included in the truth of suffering or are not suffering” 〔T32 449c20〕 in terms of truth-inclusion; the mind base likewise may or may not be so included, while the Dhamma “base is either included in the four truths or not included in the truth of suffering” 〔T32 449c22〕. The internal ones are certainly suffering; the external ones can fall on either side—the five internal bases are faculties, and faculties necessarily belong to one’s own body and lie within suffering; external ones need not. The treatise does not elaborate on this point; it only places the word “either” where it belongs.
Across all three columns, the inclusion approach is not restating the twelve bases; it is placing the twelve bases inside three other frameworks and measuring them once in each. Only after that measurement does this means reach its end.
The final sentence is, “understood. In this way, by this practice, one arouses a means in knowledge of the bases. This is called the means concerning the sense-” 〔T32 449c23〕“bases (the means concerning the bases is finished)” 〔T32 449c24〕.
The second gate closes. Of the five “finished” formulas, this is the second.
Carry away three things: one observation—the same event is told twice (once in the names of minds, once in the simile), with eleven correspondences matched item by item and not one omitted; the simile is not an illustration but a second list. One reading practice—place the simile and what it represents in two columns: only then can one see that two names change between the tellings (seeing mind ↔ eye consciousness; receiving mind ↔ receiving-and-holding mind), that one person changes names (bent woman ↔ stooped woman), and that the latter half corrects one punctuation (“the king takes the knife; the woman” ↔ “knife-bearing woman” 〔T32 449b23·449c02〕). One place to pause—the eye door reports seven minds but its names do not include continuum mind 〔T32 449b07–449b08〕, while the mind door reports three minds and places continuum mind first 〔T32 449c12〕: does continuum mind count as one mind or not? The treatise does not say; this edition records both readings without harmonizing them.
Keep two smaller points in mind as well: the three-character expression rendered “continuum mind” occurs ten times in the entire treatise, all in this passage; and the three names in each of the three occurrences of “three kinds of inclusion” differ (the means concerning the aggregates includes bases, elements, and truths; the means concerning the bases includes aggregates, elements, and truths; the means concerning the noble truths includes aggregates, bases, and elements). Each means uses the other three frameworks to measure itself.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Cognitive Sequence, Simile, and Inclusion · Exposition · Summer 2026
十八界與說化境界The Eighteen Elements and the Domain of Instruction
全文五層 →Full five layers →第三扇門開了——而這一扇開得特別快,關得也特別快。
先把所見說在前頭:界方便的體例上有兩處空缺——它不出總標、不報門數,各門也沒有一句自收之語。而省下來的地方,換成了全品唯一一次的自我說明:末段那一問,回答的不是「界是什麼」,是「為什麼要有三個框子」。
先看兩處空缺
前兩個方便都是先出總標。陰方便作「復次此五陰,以四行所勝可知」〔T32 448b25〕,入方便作「五行所勝可知」〔T32 449a07〕——先報門數、次列門名、後逐門設問。三、四、五,連著兩段遞增。
到界方便,這個標沒有了。答文一起手就是「問:云何界方便?答:十八界,眼界色界眼識界、」〔T32 449c25〕,逕直把十八個名字排下去,一個門數也不報。
(可核的很簡單:「所勝可知」四字全論五見,本段一見也沒有。)
第二處空缺在收語。前兩個方便每一門走完都有一句自收——如是以句義可知、如是以相可知、如是以境界可知。本段全段只有一句「可知」,還是那句用來省略的「界。如是餘可知」〔T32 449c29〕。
該有的沒有,這本身就是要記的事。本編照錄不代補。
標列的形,倒是一貫的
雖然體例省了,標列的手法沒變。
十二入是六組雙名——眼入色入、耳入聲入……組內不加頓號,組間才加。十八界是六組三名——「答:十八界,眼界色界眼識界、」〔T32 449c25〕「耳界聲界耳識界、鼻界香界鼻識界、舌界味」〔T32 449c26〕界舌識界,一樣是組內不斷、組間才斷。
組數不變,每組的名數隨所論而增。兩張名單並排一看,十八界從十二入長出來的那一步就明明白白了。
界說也只出一組:「界。於是眼清淨眼界,色形色界,眼識眼識」〔T32 449c28〕「界。如是餘可知」〔T32 449c29〕。其餘五組一句代過——這一手法本品已經第三次用了。
而意識界的立界仍是那句遮遣:「意界唯法入,除法界六識界,餘心意識界」〔T32 450a01〕。除掉那些,剩下的心就是——與識陰段的「六識,餘心,此謂意識界」〔T32 448a26〕同一個手法。
三重歸屬,照樣量了一遍
歸屬那一段雖然沒有標題,內容一項不少:十界歸色陰,法界除泥洹歸四陰,七界歸識陰;十一界歸十一入,七界歸意入;十一界歸苦諦,五界或苦或非,法界四諦或非,意識界或苦或非。
陰、入、諦,三個框子各量一次。每一個方便都拿其餘的框子來量自己——這條暗線在這裡照舊,只是把標題省了。
讀法:把連下的「復次」並排成一張表
真正的內容在第二問。
「攝。問:云何說化境界?答:唯此法陰入界為境」〔T32 450a07〕「界」〔T32 450a08〕——只有這法:陰、入、界,是境界。
然後論文連下四組,每一組都把陰、入、界各配一項。四組之中三組由「復次」領起〔T32 450a09·450a11·450a14〕。
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:凡遇連下的「復次」,不要把它們讀成補充,要把它們並排成一張表——同樣的三欄,填四遍。
第一組講相:「界,諸說法種類和合相為陰,說門相為入,說」〔T32 450a08〕「自性相為界」〔T32 450a09〕。種類和合的相是陰,門的相是入,自性的相是界。
第二組講根:「復次世尊為利根人以陰門說」〔T32 450a09〕「苦諦,為中根人以入門說苦諦,為鈍根人以」〔T32 450a10〕「界門說苦諦」〔T32 450a11〕。同一個苦諦,對三種人用三個門說。
第三組講所著:「界門說苦諦。復次於名著相人以略說色,以」〔T32 450a11〕「分別名說陰。為著色相人以分別色以略說」〔T32 450a12〕「名說入,於名色著相人以名色分別說界」〔T32 450a13〕。在名上著相的,就略說色而細說名——那是陰;在色上著相的,就細說色而略說名——那是入;名色兩頭都著的,就名色都細說——那是界。
略與分別,兩件工具交互為用:一頭略、一頭細,看人所著的是哪一頭。這一組是四組裡唯一給出「為什麼這樣配」的。
第四組講說:「復次說自性處,說陰,說處事,說入,以處事說」〔T32 450a14〕「心起、說界」〔T32 450a15〕。
四組填完,那張表就完整了:陰、入、界不是三份不同的清單,是同一批法在三種角度下的三種說法;而選哪一種,看的是聽的人。
這也就是為什麼論文把它放在界方便的末尾——三個框子都排完了,才回頭說一句它們何以要有三個。全品之中,論文自己解釋其編排之故的,只有這一處。
停一下:三根的次序,兩處相反
現在停在第二組上。
這一組用的器具——利根、中根、鈍根各配一法——全論用過三次。
本段是:利根配陰、中根配入、鈍根配界〔T32 450a09–450a11〕。由利而鈍。
而品一那一處是:「如世尊為鈍根人說增上戒學、為中根人說增上心學、為利根人說增上慧學」〔T32 400b02–03〕。由鈍而利。
後面講三種須陀洹那一處又是:「於是鈍根成七生,中根成家家,利根成一生」〔T32 458b13–14〕。也是由鈍而利。
三處之中,兩處由鈍起、一處由利起。
停下來問一句:這是同一個排法嗎?
可核的只有次序本身。若說由鈍而利是「由淺入深」,那麼本段由利而鈍就是倒過來排;可是本段所配的陰、入、界,其名數又是由少而多(五、十二、十八)——利根配名數最少的,鈍根配名數最多的。兩個序各有各的道理,而論文一句也不說。
本編照錄不代齊,也不由此推論其判教之意。
一條校記,與上一段同一個字
末了記一件字面上的事。
「餘如入廣說。於是十界,色陰所攝。法界除」〔T32 450a02〕泥洹——這個「除」字,宋、元、明、宮四本作「餘」。
同一個字、同一個異讀,上一單元剛出現過一次:入方便說「法入,除泥洹,四陰」〔T32 449c18〕所攝,明本亦作「餘」。兩處相隔不到二十行,異讀相同,只是此處四本俱有而彼處僅明本。
二讀所指相反:從底本,是所攝不含泥洹;從異讀,是所指為其餘。而陰方便早說過泥洹是諦所攝而非陰所攝〔T32 448c21〕,與底本之讀相貫。並錄不判,本文從底本。
最後:「心起、說界。以如是等行界分別方便,此謂界」〔T32 450a15〕「方便(界方便已竟)」〔T32 450a16〕。
第三扇門關上了。五個「已竟」,這是第三個。
帶走三件:一個所見——界方便體例上有兩處空缺(不出總標、無門收語),而省下的地方換成了全品唯一一次的自我說明:末段「說化境界」〔T32 450a07〕回答的是「為什麼要有三個框子」。一個讀法——凡遇連下的「復次」,把它們並排成一張表讀:本段四組(相·根·所著·說)皆以陰·入·界為三欄,填四遍而次序不變。一處停問——三根之配,本段由利而鈍〔T32 450a09–450a11〕,而品一〔T32 400b02–03〕與後文三種須陀洹〔T32 458b13–14〕皆由鈍而利:這是同一個排法嗎? 本編照錄不代齊。
還有兩件小事該記著:十二入六組雙名、十八界六組三名,組數不變而每組名數隨所論而增;「法界除泥洹」之「除」,與上一單元「法入,除泥洹」同字同異讀而見證多寡不同。
The third door has opened—and this one opens especially quickly and closes especially quickly.
Let the central observation come first: The pattern of the method concerning the elements has two absences—it gives no overall heading, announces no number of approaches, and none of its approaches has a sentence of its own to close it. The room those omissions create is given instead to the only self-explanation in the entire chapter: the final question answers not “What are the elements?” but “Why are there three frames?”
First Notice the Two Absences
The preceding two methods both begin with an overall heading. The method concerning the aggregates has “Again, these five aggregates may be known as distinguished in four ways” 〔T32 448b25〕, and the method concerning the bases has “may be known as distinguished in five ways” 〔T32 449a07〕—first announcing the number of approaches, then listing their names, and only afterward posing a question for each one. Three, four, five: the count rises twice in succession.
When the method concerning the elements begins, this heading is gone. Its answer begins at once: “Question: What is the method concerning the elements? Answer: the eighteen elements—eye element, form element, eye-consciousness element,” 〔T32 449c25〕, proceeding directly to line up the eighteen names without announcing any number of approaches.
(The check is simple: the four-character source expression rendered “may be known as distinguished” occurs five times in the entire treatise and not once in this passage.)
The second absence is in the closing phrases. In each of the preceding two methods, every approach ends with a sentence that closes it—“thus it may be known by phrase-meaning,” “thus it may be known by characteristic,” “thus it may be known by domain.” This entire passage has only one “may be known,” and it belongs to the abbreviating sentence “element. Thus the rest may be known” 〔T32 449c29〕.
What should be present is absent, and that absence itself is something to record. This edition reproduces the text as it stands and does not supply what is missing.
The Shape of the List Remains Consistent
Although the pattern is abbreviated, the manner of listing has not changed.
The twelve bases form six paired-name groups—eye base with form base, ear base with sound base …; within a group the source uses no separator, placing one only between groups. The eighteen elements form six three-name groups—“Answer: the eighteen elements: eye element form element eye-consciousness element;” 〔T32 449c25〕 “ear element sound element ear-consciousness element; nose element odor element nose-consciousness element; tongue element taste” 〔T32 449c26〕 element tongue-consciousness element—and again, the members within each group are run together and only the groups are separated.
The number of groups does not change; the number of names in each group increases with what is being discussed. Set the two lists side by side, and the step by which the eighteen elements grow out of the twelve bases becomes perfectly clear.
The explanation of the elements also gives only one group: “element. Here purity of eye is the eye element, visible shape is the form element, and eye-consciousness is the eye-consciousness” 〔T32 449c28〕 “element. Thus the rest may be known” 〔T32 449c29〕. The other five groups are passed over in a single sentence—this is the third time the chapter has used this device.
The mind-consciousness element is still established by the same exclusion: “The mind element belongs only to the dhamma base; apart from the dhamma element and the six consciousness elements, the remaining mind is the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 450a01〕. Remove those, and what remains is mind—the same procedure used in the consciousness-aggregate passage, “the six consciousnesses; the remaining mind: this is called the mind-consciousness element” 〔T32 448a26〕.
Threefold Affiliation Measures the Same Field Again
Although the affiliation passage has no heading, not a single item of content is missing: ten elements belong to the form aggregate; the dhamma element, apart from Nibbāna, belongs to the four aggregates; seven elements belong to the consciousness aggregate; eleven elements belong to eleven bases; seven elements belong to the mind base; eleven elements belong to the truth of suffering; five elements may belong to the truth of suffering or to no truth; the dhamma element may belong to any of the four truths or to no truth; and the mind-consciousness element may belong to the truth of suffering or to no truth.
Aggregates, bases, and truths: each of the three frames measures the elements once. Every method uses the other frames to measure itself—that hidden line remains here as before; only the heading has been omitted.
Reading Practice: Set Consecutive “Again” Clauses Side by Side as a Table
The real content lies in the second question.
“Included. Question: What is the domain of instruction? Answer: Only these dhammas—the aggregates, bases, and elements—serve as the” 〔T32 450a07〕 “domain” 〔T32 450a08〕—only these dhammas—aggregates, bases, and elements—are the domain.
The treatise then lays down four sets in succession, and in every set aggregates, bases, and elements are each paired with one item. Three of the four sets are introduced by “again” 〔T32 450a09·450a11·450a14〕.
The reading practice delivered by this passage is right here: Whenever “again” occurs in succession, do not read the clauses as supplements; set them side by side as a table—the same three columns, filled four times.
The first set concerns character: “domain. In explaining dhammas, the character of compounded classes is spoken of as aggregates, doorway-character as bases, and” 〔T32 450a08〕 “intrinsic character as elements” 〔T32 450a09〕. The character of compounded classes identifies aggregates, doorway-character identifies bases, and intrinsic character identifies elements.
The second set concerns faculties: “Again, for those of sharp faculties the Blessed One uses the aggregate approach to teach” 〔T32 450a09〕 “the truth of suffering; for those of middling faculties he uses the base approach to teach the truth of suffering; for those of dull faculties he uses” 〔T32 450a10〕 “the element approach to teach the truth of suffering” 〔T32 450a11〕. The same truth of suffering is taught through three approaches for three kinds of people.
The third set concerns attachment: “The element approach is used to teach the truth of suffering. Again, for a person attached to the sign of name, form is spoken of briefly and” 〔T32 450a11〕 “name is distinguished in speaking of aggregates. For a person attached to the sign of form, form is distinguished and there is brief speech of” 〔T32 450a12〕 “name in speaking of bases; for a person attached to the sign of name-and-form, name-and-form is distinguished in speaking of elements” 〔T32 450a13〕. For a person attached to the sign of name, form is stated briefly and name in detail—that is aggregates; for a person attached to the sign of form, form is stated in detail and name briefly—that is bases; for a person attached to both name and form, both are stated in detail—that is elements.
Summary and distinction are two tools used in alternation: one side is summarized and the other distinguished, according to which side a person is attached to. This is the only one of the four sets that gives a “why” for its assignment.
The fourth set concerns speaking: “Again, speaking of the locus of intrinsic character is speaking of aggregates; speaking of the matter of a locus is speaking of bases; by the matter of a locus, speaking of” 〔T32 450a14〕 “the arising of mind is speaking of elements” 〔T32 450a15〕.
When all four sets have been filled in, the table is complete: aggregates, bases, and elements are not three different lists but three ways of speaking about the same set of dhammas from three angles; which one is chosen depends on the person listening.
That is also why the treatise places this at the end of the method concerning the elements—only after all three frames have been laid out does it turn back and say why there must be three. This is the only place in the entire chapter where the treatise itself explains the reason for its arrangement.
Pause: The Order of the Three Faculties Is Reversed in Two Other Places
Now pause over the second set.
The device used in this set—pairing each of sharp, middling, and dull faculties with one dhamma—appears three times in the entire treatise.
Here, sharp faculties are paired with aggregates, middling faculties with bases, and dull faculties with elements 〔T32 450a09–450a11〕. From sharp to dull.
But the occurrence in Chapter One reads: “As the Blessed One taught: the higher training in virtue for those of dull faculties, the higher training in mind for those of middling faculties, and the higher training in wisdom for those of sharp faculties” 〔T32 400b02–03〕. From dull to sharp.
The later passage on the three kinds of stream-enterer again says: “Here, a person of dull faculties becomes a seven-birth stream-enterer, a person of middling faculties becomes a family-to-family stream-enterer, and a person of sharp faculties becomes a one-birth stream-enterer” 〔T32 458b13–14〕. It too runs from dull to sharp.
Of the three occurrences, two begin with dull faculties and one with sharp faculties.
Pause and ask one question: is this the same ordering?
Only the order itself can be verified. If the movement from dull to sharp is called “from shallow to deep,” then this passage runs in reverse; yet the numbers of names in the aggregates, bases, and elements paired here run from fewer to more—five, twelve, eighteen. Sharp faculties receive the fewest names; dull faculties receive the most. Each order has its own rationale, and the treatise does not say a word about either.
This edition records both orders as they stand without harmonizing them, and it does not infer from them any intent to classify the teachings.
One Critical Note, with the Same Character as in the Previous Unit
One last textual detail should be recorded.
“The rest is as explained at length under the bases. Here ten elements are included in the form aggregate. The dhamma element excludes” 〔T32 450a02〕 Nibbāna—the source character rendered “excludes” is read as “remainder” in the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses.
The same character with the same variant occurred once in the immediately preceding unit: in the method concerning the bases, the words “dhamma base, excluding Nibbāna, four aggregates” 〔T32 449c18〕 stand in a statement of inclusion, and the Ming witness also reads “remainder.” The two places are fewer than twenty lines apart; the variant is the same, but here all four witnesses attest it, whereas there only the Ming witness does.
The two readings point in opposite directions: under the base reading, Nibbāna is excluded from what is included; under the variant, what is indicated is the remainder. The method concerning the aggregates has already said that Nibbāna is included among the truths but not among the aggregates 〔T32 448c21〕, which coheres with the base reading. Both readings are recorded without adjudication; the body follows the base.
Finally: “the mind arises, and elements are spoken of. Through procedures such as these, there is skill in discerning elements. This is the method concerning the” 〔T32 450a15〕 “elements (the method concerning the elements is complete)” 〔T32 450a16〕.
The third door closes. Of the five “is complete” formulas, this is the third.
Carry away three things. One observation: the method concerning the elements has two structural absences—no overall heading and no closing phrase for its approaches—and the room they create is given instead to the only self-explanation in the entire chapter: the final “domain of instruction” 〔T32 450a07〕 answers “Why are there three frames?” One reading practice: whenever “again” occurs in succession, set the clauses side by side as a table: the four sets here—character, faculty, attachment, and speaking—all use aggregates, bases, and elements as their three columns, filling them four times without changing their order. One place to pause and ask: in the assignment of the three faculties, this passage runs from sharp to dull 〔T32 450a09–450a11〕, while Chapter One 〔T32 400b02–03〕 and the later three kinds of stream-enterer 〔T32 458b13–14〕 both run from dull to sharp: Is this the same ordering? This edition records both without making them uniform.
Two smaller details should also be remembered: the twelve bases are six paired-name groups and the eighteen elements six three-name groups, so the number of groups remains the same while the number of names in each group increases with what is being discussed; the source character rendered “excludes” in “the dhamma element excludes Nibbāna” has the same character and the same variant as “the dhamma base, excluding Nibbāna” in the previous unit, though the numbers of witnesses differ.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · The Eighteen Elements and the Domain of Instruction · Exposition · Summer 2026
十二因緣次第與剎那緣起The Sequence of Twelve Conditions and Conditionality in One Moment
全文五層 →Full five layers →第四扇門開了——這一扇最大,要走三個單元才關得上。
先把所見說在前頭:本段末尾那個十環之譬,走到第九環就繞回了自己的第二環。論文隨後說「前際不可知、後際亦不可知」——那不是一句加上去的斷言,是這個譬自己的形顯出來的。
兩列,一句不缺
答文一起手就是十一句順推:「問:云何因緣方便?答:無明緣行,行緣識,識」〔T32 450a17〕「緣名色,名色緣六入,六入緣觸,觸緣受,受」〔T32 450a18〕緣愛,愛緣取,取緣有,有緣生,「生緣老死憂」〔T32 450a19〕悲苦惱。
隨即是十一句逆推:「悲苦惱,如是皆苦陰起。唯以無明滅則行滅,」〔T32 450a20〕「以行滅則識滅,以識滅則名色滅,以名色」〔T32 450a21〕滅則六入滅……一路到老死憂悲苦惱滅。
兩列逐句相對,一句不缺。順列每句以「緣」字居中,逆列每句以「以」領前支之滅、以「則」領後支之滅。同一條鏈,正著寫一遍、反著寫一遍。
而逐支的界說有一處要數清楚。標列的末一支作「老死憂悲苦惱」,是一個名;到逐釋處卻是「起欲、色、無色有。生者,於有陰起。老者,陰熟」〔T32 450b01〕「死者,陰散壞」〔T32 450b02〕——老、死各出一釋。
標列十二支,逐釋十三目。照錄不代併。
逐支的界說裡,藏著一句要緊的話
十三目的界說多半很短:無明是不知四諦,行是身口意業,六入是六內入,觸是六觸身,受是六受身,愛是六愛身,取是四取。一句一目,不加解說。
而其中兩目忽然說得具體:「者,不知四諦。行者,身口意業。識者,入胎一」〔T32 450a26〕「念心名識」〔T32 450a27〕——識,是入胎的那一念心;「念心名識。名色者,共相續心起心數法,及迦」〔T32 450a27〕「羅邏色」〔T32 450a28〕——名色,是共相續心所起的心數法,加上迦羅邏色。
迦羅邏是受胎最初之位。論文在這裡把識與名色明明白白地釘在入胎那一刻上。
這一筆要記住,因為它關係到本段最後那個問題:這條鏈若從入胎起算,它就是跨生的;而末段偏又說它在一剎那裡走完。兩個尺度的張力,在逐支界說這裡就已經埋下了。
(「迦羅邏」三字全論只出現兩次,本段一次;論文於此不釋其義,本編也不代解。)
三受三條路,都通向愛
中節逐支給理由,其中受緣愛那一支給得最細,值得單看。
「所觸,是故觸緣受。癡凡夫受樂成著,復更」〔T32 450b16〕「覓受苦,彼對治覓樂。若受不苦不樂受捨,是」〔T32 450b17〕「故受緣愛」〔T32 450b18〕。
三種受,三條路:受樂的,就成著而更求;受苦的,就以其對治而求樂;受不苦不樂的,則受捨。
三條路走法各異,而三條都算作「受緣愛」。論文不說苦受只生瞋、樂受才生愛——它把三受一概接到愛上,連捨也不放過。
這一節之細,與其前後諸支之簡形成對照:觸緣受只說「以觸受或苦、或樂、或不苦不樂」〔T32 450b15〕,愛緣取只說「以渴愛急取愛處」〔T32 450b18〕,各一句而已。十支的理由,長短不齊;長的那一支,正是這條鏈上最吃緊的接口。可核的只有這個長短本身,本編不代論文另立輕重之說。
中節:理在前,結在後
第二問問的是兩頭:「死者,陰散壞。問:何故無明緣行?何故生緣老」〔T32 450b02〕死?
答文的體例很整齊:先說道理,末了以「是故」收出那一支的緣。「續。識於有隨心非斷,是故行緣識。如除日」〔T32 450b09〕;「體住增長,如荻相猗展轉相依。是故識緣」〔T32 450b11〕名色;「故名色緣六入。餘根境界識和合起觸,是故」〔T32 450b14〕……
「是故」在本段出現十次〔T32 450b09–450b20〕,十次就是十支的收。
理在前而結在後——這與識陰那一段正好相反:那裡是先立一個「不」,再說何以竟能〔T32 448b07–448b13〕。同一部書,兩節兩種句勢,各服其所論。
中間還嵌了兩個小譬,都取自最日常的東西:一個是種在耕熟的田裡〔T32 450b06〕,一個是「如除日」〔T32 450b09〕無光明、「體住增長,如荻相猗展轉相依」〔T32 450b11〕。荻草彼此相靠才立得住——除了識就沒有名色,正如抽掉一根荻草,另一根也倒。
讀法:看譬喻鏈的頭尾接不接得上
然後是本段的主譬。
「緣老死。如穀為種緣,如是無明緣行可知。如」〔T32 450b21〕「種為牙緣,如是行緣識可知。如牙為葉」〔T32 450b22〕緣,如是識緣名色可知……一路是葉為枝緣、枝為樹緣、樹為花緣、花為汁緣、汁為米緣、米為種緣,最後「知。如種為牙緣,有如是緣生可知。如是起」〔T32 450b28〕。
十環,一環配一支。
現在看它的頭尾。第一環是穀為種緣;第九環是米為種緣;第十環是種為牙緣——而種為牙緣,正是第二環。
也就是說:這串譬走到第九環,已經回到了它的起手處;第十環一接上去,整條鏈就閉合了。穀出米,米又是種,種又發牙——這個譬本身就是一個圈。
(可核的很簡單:「如種為牙緣」這五個字全論只出現兩次,兩次都在這一段,一次是第二環、一次是第十環。)
所以下面那兩句就不是憑空加的:「如是起」〔T32 450b28〕「種種相續,如是前際不可知、後際亦不可」〔T32 450b29〕「知」〔T32 450c01〕。前際不可知、後際亦不可知——圈本來就沒有頭尾。
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:遇到一串譬喻鏈,先看它的頭尾接不接得上。接得上的,那個譬要說的就不只是「一個生一個」,是「沒有起點」;接不上的,才是一條直線。這一步不看,讀者就會把這十環讀成十件並列的比方,而漏掉論文真正要用它說的那件事。
而論文還把這句話重說了一遍:「知。如是生無明為初因緣相續,其前際不可」〔T32 450c01〕「知、後際亦不可知」〔T32 450c02〕。同樣的話連下兩句——即使以無明為初,前際後際仍然不可知。重言在此不是囉唆,是把「以無明為初」和「有一個起點」這兩件事分開。
無明的緣,與一處引據
第三問更直接:無明以什麼為緣?
答文先給一句迴環:「知、後際亦不可知。問:無明何緣?答:唯無明為」〔T32 450c02〕「無明緣,使為纏緣、纏為使緣,初為初、後為後」〔T32 450c03〕。使與纏互為緣,初自為初、後自為後——又是一個不設起點的講法。
留意這一句與十環之譬是同一件事的兩種寫法:譬用的是形(圈),這一句用的是詞(互為緣)。一段之內,形與詞各說一遍,而所說者一。
然後是本段唯一一處引據:「復次一切諸煩惱成無明緣。如佛所說:從」〔T32 450c04〕「漏集起無明集」〔T32 450c05〕。
這一處值得記著。本品從第一單元講到這裡,引據只出現過一次——11-02 引的是尊者之語〔T32 446a01〕。以「如佛所說」領起的,本品到這一段才第一次出現。而所引的那一句「從漏集起無明集」全論也只出現這一次。
論文不出其經名,也不標引文到哪裡為止。引文的界,論文不標,我們就不能替它畫。本編照錄。
停一下:同一組十二因緣,兩種時間
現在停在最後一段。
「漏集起無明集。復次如一心法,以眼見色,癡」〔T32 450c05〕人起愛——論文換了一個尺度重講一遍。
眼見色而心癡,這是無明;思著是無明緣行;心著是行緣識;知相應心數法及所造色是識緣名色;從受生喜、諸根清淨是名色緣六入……一路走到「起,是有緣生。住已是老,念散壞是死。如是於」〔T32 450c12〕「一剎那成十二因緣」〔T32 450c13〕。
十二支,在一個剎那裡走完。
而就在同一段的上半,論文才說過這條鏈「前際不可知、後際亦不可知」——那是相續之說,說的是無始無終的長度。
停下來問一句:這是同一個十二因緣嗎?
一個要用無量的時間才走得完,一個在一剎那裡就成了。論文把兩說並排放著,一句會通的話也不說。
可核的只有三件:前節作相續而重言前際後際不可知〔T32 450b29·450c01〕;末節作「一剎那成十二因緣」〔T32 450c13〕,此語全論唯此一見;二節之間唯以一個「復次」相接〔T32 450c05〕。
本編照錄不代會通,也不由此推論其時分之說。
一條校記,落在譬鏈的環名上
末了記一件字面上的事。
十環之譬裡那個「牙」字,宋、元、明、宮四本作「芽」〔T32 450b22〕。而這個字在本段出現兩次——正是繞回去的那一環的名字。異讀所改,兩處都及。並錄不判,本文從底本。
另有兩條也該記著:「如是起種種相續」的那個「種」字,四本無之〔T32 450b29〕——而它的上一句方以種為牙緣收譬,這個字恰在其間;「從受生喜」的「受」,四本作「愛」〔T32 450c08〕——若從四本,其所承的那一支就換了。二處並錄不判,本文從底本。
帶走三件:一個所見——十環之譬走到第九環(米為種緣)之後,第十環復作「如種為牙緣」而與第二環同句〔T32 450b21·450b28〕,其列自相接而成環;隨後之「前際不可知、後際亦不可知」不是加上去的斷言,是譬自身之形。一個讀法——遇譬喻鏈先看頭尾接不接得上:接得上的,說的是無起點;接不上的,才是一條直線。一處停問——同一組十二因緣,前節以相續說(前際後際皆不可知),末節以「一剎那成十二因緣」〔T32 450c13〕說:這是同一個十二因緣嗎? 二說並列而論文一句會通不說,本編照錄不代會通。
還有三件小事該記著:標列十二支而逐釋出十三目(老、死各一釋);中節十見「是故」,理在前而結在後,與識陰段之句勢正相反;本段引據一處以「如佛所說」領起〔T32 450c04〕,為本品此式之首見,而引文之界論文不標,本編不代畫。
The fourth gate has opened—this one is the largest, and it will take three units to close it.
Put the observation first: When the ten-link simile at the end of this passage reaches its ninth link, it loops back to its own second link. The treatise then says, “The past limit cannot be known, nor can the future limit be known”—that is not an assertion added afterward; the shape of the simile itself makes it manifest.
Two Series, Not One Sentence Missing
The answer begins with eleven statements in forward order: “Question: What is the method concerning conditionality? Answer: Ignorance conditions formations; formations condition consciousness; consciousness” 〔T32 450a17〕 “conditions name-and-form; name-and-form conditions the six bases; the six bases condition contact; contact conditions feeling; feeling” 〔T32 450a18〕 conditions craving; craving conditions grasping; grasping conditions becoming; becoming conditions birth; “birth conditions aging, death, sorrow” 〔T32 450a19〕, lamentation, pain, and distress.
Immediately afterward come eleven statements in reverse order: “Lamentation, pain, and distress: thus the whole aggregate of suffering arises. Only with the cessation of ignorance, formations then cease,” 〔T32 450a20〕 “with the cessation of formations consciousness then ceases; with the cessation of consciousness name-and-form then ceases; with name-and-form” 〔T32 450a21〕 ceasing, the six bases then cease; with the cessation of the six bases contact then ceases; with the cessation of contact feeling then ceases; with the cessation of feeling craving then ceases; with the cessation of craving grasping then ceases; with the cessation of grasping becoming then ceases; with the cessation of becoming birth then ceases; and with the cessation of birth, aging, death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, and distress then cease.
The two series correspond sentence by sentence, with not one sentence missing. Every forward sentence has “conditions” at its center; every reverse sentence uses “with” to introduce the cessation of the preceding factor and “then” to introduce the cessation of the following factor. It is the same chain, written once forward and once backward.
There is one count to make carefully in the definitions of the individual factors. The final factor in the heading list is “aging, death, sorrow, lamentation, pain, and distress,” treated as one name; but the individual explanations say, “gives rise to sensual, form, and formless becoming. Birth is the arising of aggregates within becoming. Aging is the maturation of the aggregates” 〔T32 450b01〕 and “Death is the disintegration of the aggregates” 〔T32 450b02〕—aging and death each receive their own explanation.
The heading list has twelve factors; the individual explanations have thirteen items. This edition records them as they stand and does not combine them.
A Crucial Sentence Hidden among the Definitions of Each Factor
Most of the thirteen definitions are very short: ignorance is not knowing the four truths; formations are bodily, verbal, and mental karma; the six bases are the six internal bases; contact is the sixfold body of contact; feeling is the sixfold body of feeling; craving is the sixfold body of craving; and grasping is fourfold. One sentence for each item, with no added explanation.
Yet two items suddenly become concrete: “is not knowing the four truths. Formations are bodily, verbal, and mental karma. Consciousness is one mind-moment entering the womb” 〔T32 450a26〕; “that mind-moment is called consciousness” 〔T32 450a27〕—consciousness is that one mind-moment entering the womb; “that mind-moment is called consciousness. Name-and-form consists of mental factors arisen together with the continuing mind, and jia-” 〔T32 450a27〕 “luoluo form” 〔T32 450a28〕—name-and-form consists of the mental factors arisen with the continuing mind, together with jialuoluo form.
Jialuoluo is the earliest stage of conception. Here the treatise plainly pins consciousness and name-and-form to the moment of entering the womb.
Keep this point in mind, because it bears on the question at the end of the passage: if this chain is counted from entry into the womb, it extends across lives; yet the final paragraph says that it is completed in one moment. The tension between these two scales is already planted here, in the definitions of the individual factors.
(The three-character transcription “jialuoluo” occurs only twice in the entire treatise, once in this passage; the treatise does not explain its meaning here, and this edition does not supply an explanation.)
Three Feelings, Three Routes, All Leading to Craving
The middle section gives a reason for each factor. The reason for feeling conditioning craving is the most detailed and deserves to be read on its own.
“What is contacted; therefore contact conditions feeling. The deluded ordinary person, receiving pleasure, becomes attached and again” 〔T32 450b16〕 “seeks. Receiving pain, he seeks pleasure as its remedy. If he receives feeling that is neither painful nor pleasant, he receives equanimity; therefore” 〔T32 450b17〕 “feeling conditions craving” 〔T32 450b18〕.
Three feelings, three routes: with pleasant feeling, attachment forms and one seeks further; with painful feeling, one seeks pleasure as its remedy; with feeling that is neither painful nor pleasant, one receives equanimity.
The three routes differ, yet all three count as “feeling conditions craving.” The treatise does not say that painful feeling produces only aversion while pleasant feeling alone produces craving—it connects all three feelings to craving, without letting even equanimity go.
The detail here contrasts with the brevity of the surrounding factors: contact conditioning feeling says only, “Through contact, one feels pain, pleasure, or neither pain nor pleasure” 〔T32 450b15〕, while craving conditioning grasping says only, “Through thirsty craving, one urgently grasps the object of craving” 〔T32 450b18〕, one sentence each. The reasons for the ten factors vary in length; the longest is precisely the chain’s most crucial junction. Only that difference in length can be verified; this edition does not establish a further hierarchy on the treatise’s behalf.
The Middle Section: Reason First, Conclusion Afterward
The second question asks about the two ends: “Death is the disintegration of the aggregates. Question: Why does ignorance condition formations? Why does birth condition aging” 〔T32 450b02〕 and death?
The answer follows a regular form: it first gives the reason, then closes with “therefore” to state the conditioning relation. “Continuity. Consciousness follows mind within becoming without interruption; therefore formations condition consciousness. As when the sun is removed” 〔T32 450b09〕; “a body stands and grows, like reeds leaning upon one another in mutual dependence. Therefore consciousness conditions” 〔T32 450b11〕 name-and-form; “Therefore name-and-form conditions the six bases. The other faculties, their domains, and consciousness unite to give rise to contact; therefore” 〔T32 450b14〕 …
“Therefore” occurs ten times in this passage 〔T32 450b09–450b20〕, and the ten occurrences close the ten factors.
Reason comes first and conclusion afterward—the exact reverse of the passage on the consciousness aggregate, where a “does not” is established first and only then does the text explain how the act can nevertheless be performed 〔T32 448b07–448b13〕. Within the same work, two sections use two kinds of sentence movement, each serving what it discusses.
Two small similes are embedded in the middle, both drawn from the most ordinary things: one is a seed in well-cultivated ground 〔T32 450b06〕; another is “as when the sun is removed” 〔T32 450b09〕 and there is no light, and “a body stands and grows, like reeds leaning upon one another in mutual dependence” 〔T32 450b11〕. Reeds can stand only by leaning against one another—without consciousness there is no name-and-form, just as pulling away one reed makes the other fall.
Reading Practice: Ask Whether the Ends of a Simile-Chain Join
Then comes the principal simile of the passage.
“Conditions aging and death. As grain conditions seed, so ignorance conditions formations, it should be known. As” 〔T32 450b21〕 “seed conditions sprout, so formations condition consciousness, it should be known. As sprout conditions leaf” 〔T32 450b22〕, so consciousness conditions name-and-form, it should be known … The sequence runs through leaf conditioning branch, branch conditioning tree, tree conditioning flower, flower conditioning sap, sap conditioning rice, and rice conditioning seed, and ends: “It should be known. As seed conditions sprout, so it may be known that becoming conditions birth. Thus arises” 〔T32 450b28〕.
Ten links, each paired with one factor.
Now look at its beginning and end. The first link is grain conditioning seed; the ninth is rice conditioning seed; the tenth is seed conditioning sprout—and seed conditioning sprout is exactly the second link.
In other words, by the time this chain of similes reaches its ninth link, it has returned to where it began; once the tenth is joined, the whole chain closes. Grain yields rice, rice is seed again, and seed sprouts again—the simile itself is a circle.
(The check is simple: the five Chinese characters rendered “as seed conditions sprout” occur only twice in the entire treatise, both in this passage—once as the second link and once as the tenth.)
The next two statements are therefore not added out of nowhere: “Thus arises” 〔T32 450b28〕 “continuity of many kinds; thus the past limit cannot be known, and the future limit also cannot be” 〔T32 450b29〕 “known” 〔T32 450c01〕. The past limit cannot be known, nor can the future limit be known—a circle has no beginning or end.
Here is the reading practice this passage gives us: when you meet a chain of similes, first ask whether its beginning and end join. If they join, the simile is saying not merely “one gives rise to another” but “there is no starting point”; only if they do not join is it a straight line. Without this step, a reader will take the ten links as ten parallel comparisons and miss what the treatise actually uses their form to say.
The treatise then states the point once more: “Be known. Thus, in the continuity of birth, ignorance is the first condition; its past limit cannot” 〔T32 450c01〕 “be known, nor can its future limit be known” 〔T32 450c02〕. The same statement follows twice in succession—even with ignorance taken as first, the past and future limits remain unknowable. The repetition is not verbosity; it separates “taking ignorance as first” from “having a starting point.”
The Condition for Ignorance and One Citation
The third question is more direct: what conditions ignorance?
The answer first gives a circular statement: “Be known, nor can its future limit be known. Question: What conditions ignorance? Answer: Only ignorance is” 〔T32 450c02〕 “the condition for ignorance; the underlying tendency conditions entanglement, and entanglement conditions the underlying tendency; the initial is initial and the later is later” 〔T32 450c03〕. The underlying tendency and entanglement condition each other; the initial is itself initial and the later itself later—again, a way of speaking that posits no starting point.
Notice that this statement and the ten-link simile write the same thing in two ways: the simile uses a shape, a circle; this statement uses words, mutual conditioning. Within one passage, shape and words each say it once, and what they say is one.
Then comes the passage’s only citation: “Again, all defilements become conditions for ignorance. As the Buddha said: From” 〔T32 450c04〕 “the accumulation of influxes arises the accumulation of ignorance” 〔T32 450c05〕.
This is worth remembering. From the first unit of this chapter to this point, only one citation has appeared—11-02 cites the words of a venerable 〔T32 446a01〕. A citation introduced by “as the Buddha said” appears here for the first time in this chapter. And the quoted sentence “from the accumulation of influxes arises the accumulation of ignorance” occurs only once in the entire treatise.
The treatise does not name the scripture, nor does it mark where the quotation ends. When the treatise does not mark a quotation’s boundary, we cannot draw it on the treatise’s behalf. This edition records it as it stands.
Pause: One Twelvefold Chain, Two Measures of Time
Now pause at the final paragraph.
“The accumulation of influxes gives rise to the accumulation of ignorance. Again, as a single mental event, when the eye sees form, a deluded” 〔T32 450c05〕 person arouses craving—the treatise retells the chain on another scale.
Seeing form with the eye while the mind is deluded is ignorance; attached intention is the formation conditioned by ignorance; the attached mind is consciousness conditioned by formation; knowing the associated mental factors and the form they produce is name-and-form conditioned by consciousness; joy arises from feeling and the faculties are purified, which is the six bases conditioned by name-and-form. The account then passes through contact, feeling, craving, grasping, and becoming, until “arising is birth conditioned by becoming. Having remained is aging; the dissolution of the thought is death. Thus, in” 〔T32 450c12〕 “one moment, twelve conditions are completed” 〔T32 450c13〕.
The twelve factors run their whole course in a single moment.
Yet in the first half of this same passage, the treatise has just said that the chain’s “past limit cannot be known, nor can its future limit be known”—that is an account of continuity, speaking of a length without beginning or end.
Pause and ask: is this the same twelvefold conditionality?
One takes immeasurable time to complete; the other is completed in a single moment. The treatise places the two accounts side by side and does not say one word to reconcile them.
Only three things can be verified: the earlier section speaks of continuity and twice says that the past and future limits cannot be known 〔T32 450b29·450c01〕; the final section says, “in one moment, twelve conditions are completed” 〔T32 450c13〕, a phrase that occurs nowhere else in the treatise; and the two sections are joined only by a single “again” 〔T32 450c05〕.
This edition records the two without reconciling them and draws no conclusion from them about the measure of time.
One Variant Falls on the Returning Link
Finally, note one matter of the written text.
The character “牙” in the ten-link simile is read as “芽” by the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses 〔T32 450b22〕. This character occurs twice in the passage—it is the name of the very link that loops back. The variant affects both occurrences. Both readings are recorded without adjudication; the text follows the base.
Two further notes should be remembered. The character “種” in “thus arises continuity of many kinds” is absent from all four witnesses 〔T32 450b29〕—the preceding sentence has just closed the simile with seed conditioning sprout, and this character stands precisely between them. In “joy arises from feeling,” the character “受” (feeling) is read as “愛” (craving) by all four witnesses 〔T32 450c08〕—if their reading is followed, the factor carried forward changes. Both are recorded without adjudication; the text follows the base.
Take away three things. One observation: after the ten-link simile reaches the ninth link, rice conditioning seed, the tenth again says “as seed conditions sprout,” in the same words as the second 〔T32 450b21·450b28〕, and the series joins back onto itself to form a circle; the following “the past limit cannot be known, nor can the future limit be known” is not an assertion added afterward but the shape of the simile itself. One reading practice: when you meet a chain of similes, first ask whether its beginning and end join: if they join, it speaks of no starting point; only if they do not join is it a straight line. One place to pause: the same twelvefold conditionality is presented first as continuity, whose past and future limits cannot be known, and finally as “in one moment, twelve conditions are completed” 〔T32 450c13〕: is this the same twelvefold conditionality? The treatise places the two accounts side by side without one word of reconciliation; this edition records them and does not reconcile them on its behalf.
Remember three smaller things as well: the heading list has twelve factors but the individual explanations have thirteen items, because aging and death each receive their own explanation; the middle section has ten occurrences of “therefore,” with reason first and conclusion afterward, the reverse of the sentence movement in the passage on the consciousness aggregate; and the passage’s one citation is introduced by “as the Buddha said” 〔T32 450c04〕, the first occurrence of this formula in the chapter, while the treatise does not mark the quotation’s boundary and this edition does not draw it.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Sequential and Momentary Conditionality · Exposition · Summer 2026
因緣分類、三節與有生節Classifying Conditionality: Three Junctures and the Becoming-Birth Juncture
全文五層 →Full five layers →先把所見說在前頭:本段一口氣連下十二個問句,是全論問得最密的一處;而答文之中三次出現「不應說」。問得最密的地方,恰恰也是最多次說「這不該說」的地方。
一密一止,是同一段裡的兩面。
十二問
設問是這樣的:「一剎那成十二因緣。問:彼十二因緣分,幾名」〔T32 450c13〕「煩惱?幾名業?幾果報?幾過去?幾未來?幾現在?」〔T32 450c14〕「幾因緣?幾已起?云何因緣?云何因緣法?此」〔T32 450c15〕「二何差別?何因緣染性?」〔T32 450c16〕
一個「問:」之下,十二個問句連下來。其中八個以「幾」發問,兩個以「云何」發問,末二各別。
這是本論問得最密的一處。別處的設問多是一問一答、至多三四問並舉;這裡是十二個。
先數對得上的:兩組十二
答文起手先答數目。
第一組:「二何差別?何因緣染性?答:三煩惱,無明、愛、」〔T32 450c16〕「取。二業,行、有。餘七,果報」〔T32 450c17〕——三加二加七,正得十二。
第二組:「色事。煩惱令起,有緣得生,如種種色。二過去,」〔T32 450c19〕「無明及行。二未來,生、老死。餘八現在」〔T32 450c20〕——二加二加八,也正得十二(末支「老死」算作一)。
兩組都對得上。這一點值得記著,因為本段末尾有一處就對不上了(見後)。
而三分那一組,論文還配了三個譬,三個都取畫師:煩惱如畫師的色,其事不自生如畫師所畫的色事,煩惱令起有緣得生如種種色。一事三譬而三譬同取一象——「畫師」二字全論只出現這兩次,都在這一句裡。
然後是三次「不應說」
接下來畫風一轉。
「以取三時,無始生死相續可知。十二分因緣」〔T32 450c21〕「者不應說,除十二因緣亦不應說」〔T32 450c22〕——說十二分就是因緣,不應說;說離開十二因緣另有因緣,也不應說。
兩面都堵住。
再往下,講因緣與因緣法的差別時又來一次:「者諸行異,非成就不可說,或有為或無為」〔T32 450c25〕「不應說」〔T32 450c26〕。
本段「不應說」三見,而全論不過十一見。四分之一強擠在這一段裡。
這就是本段的形:問得最密的地方,止得也最多。十二個問句排下去,答文一一應了,可是應到最吃緊的兩處,它說的是「這不該說」。本編照錄不代判,也不由此推論其立場。
讀法:遇連問,先數問、再數答
本段交出的讀法很實用:遇到一串連問,先數問句有幾個,再看答文應了幾個、以什麼次序應、有哪一個是被擱下的。
照這個做法看本段:十二問,答文大體依序應之——先三分(一至三),次三時(四至六),到第七、第八問(幾因緣、幾已起)那裡,答的是兩句「不應說」與一句「起十二因緣分,已起法」〔T32 450c24〕;第九、第十問各得一釋;第十一問(此二何差別)有專答;第十二問(何因緣染性)也有專答並以「此謂因緣染性」收。
應與不應,都在同一份答文裡。若不先把問句數清楚,就看不出哪一處是論文自己按住不說的。
因緣與因緣法:一個差在「已成就」
被問到「此二何差別」的那兩個名,論文答得很短,值得抄出來看。
因緣,是「因緣?此十二法如次第展轉因故,此謂因緣」〔T32 450c23〕——十二法依次互為因,這個「依次互為因」本身叫因緣。因緣法,是「起十二因緣分,已起法」〔T32 450c24〕——把十二因緣分生起來的那個已起之法。
差別在哪裡?「以起因緣法行,已成就有為,此二」〔T32 450c26〕「法差別」〔T32 450c27〕。一個尚在「非成就」而不可說有為無為,一個已成就有為。
換句話說:因緣是關係,因緣法是東西。關係不是有為也不是無為(論文說這不應說),東西則已經成就為有為。本編只把這一層照文說出,不代論文再往下推。
一個消失了又回來的體例
七行的總標在這裡出現:「以慧明通達。如是一切,此謂因緣染性。復」〔T32 450c29〕「次此因緣,以七行可知。如是以三節、以四略、」〔T32 451a01〕「以二十行、以輪、以牽、以分別、以相攝」〔T32 451a02〕。
這個式子讀者應該眼熟:陰方便四行、入方便五行,先報門數、次列門名、後逐門設問。而界方便那一段把它整個省了。到因緣方便,它又回來了。
不過回來的樣子稍有不同:陰、入二處作「以四行所勝可知」「以五行所勝可知」,這裡作「以七行可知」——少了「所勝」二字。照錄不代補。
還有一件對得上的事:七個名目在這裡是逐一以頓號分開的,一無夾雜;論文自報七行,數一數也正是七。而本品前面兩處同樣的總標,一處被斷句拆散(入攝、界攝諦、攝),一處連寫不斷(以境界以緣)。同一個式子,三處三種寫法;這一處是寫得最乾淨的。
三節:同一件事,兩個座標
七行的第一行是三節。
論文先以支名說一遍:「以三節?諸行及識,其間第一節;受及愛,彼」〔T32 451a03〕「間第二節;有及生,彼間第三節」〔T32 451a04〕。
隨即以三時再說一遍:「於過去以業」〔T32 451a04〕「煩惱緣現在果報,是第一節;以現在果報」〔T32 451a05〕「緣現在煩惱,第二節;以現在煩惱緣未來果」〔T32 451a06〕「報,第三節」〔T32 451a07〕。
同一組分節,兩個座標各說一次:一次落在十二支的名上,一次落在過去、現在、未來上。兩遍並排,那三個「節」落在哪裡就看得很清楚了。
然後論文給這三節分類:「報,第三節。第一及第三因果節及有節,第二」〔T32 451a07〕「節果因節非有節」〔T32 451a08〕。一、三是因果節而且是有節;二是果因節而不是有節。
四個名字並出,而論文一個界說也不給。只有「有節」被問了一句。
停一下:問的是「有節」,收的是「有生節」
現在停在這一句上。
「節果因節非有節。有節者何義?答:終無間未」〔T32 451a08〕「度陰入界,以初業煩惱緣故。於諸趣更有生,」〔T32 451a09〕「此謂有生節」〔T32 451a10〕。
問的名字是三個字:有節。收的名字是四個字:有生節。
而「有生節」這三字之名,全論只出現這一次。
停下來問一句:這是同一個名嗎?
若是同一個,那麼論文在一問一答之間把名字加了一個字;若不是,那麼被問的那個「有節」至今沒有得到它自己的收語。可核的只有兩件:問處作「有節者何義」;答處作「此謂有生節」。本編照錄不代齊,也不代擇一為正。
命終那一段,與一處對不上的加法
第二問是「此謂有生節。問:云何成?答:彼入無明愛相」〔T32 451a10〕應。答文寫的是一個人怎麼死、怎麼再生。
先是身相的敗壞:意念與智退,身的勇猛退,諸根漸漸失,「成退,諸根漸漸失。從身或上或下,命根失、」〔T32 451a14〕「燥失,如多羅葉燥」〔T32 451a15〕。多羅葉枯乾——全論只用過這一個譬。
接著是「以葉四」〔T32 451a15〕「法起業、業相、趣、趣相」〔T32 451a16〕,四法逐一出釋:業是所造的功德非功德,業相是造業之處所起的伴侶,趣是善惡二趣之起,趣相是所生之處的樣子——或宮殿、或坐處、或山、或樹、或江。
然後是那一串心:速心現起而滅,命根滅而成終;終心無間,速心又起;「趣或取相作事。果報心處度於後有,如燈」〔T32 451a28〕「燃燈,如從火珠出火」〔T32 451a29〕。
這裡連下兩個譬——燈燃燈、火珠出火。二譬並下而論文不說它們何以並用,也不說二譬所取的是同一件事還是兩件。二譬全論各只出現這一次。本編照錄不代會通。
最後是入胎之色。「於母腹依父母不淨,三十色業所成成起,處」〔T32 451b01〕「身有十」〔T32 451b02〕;到老剎那無心過節,四十六色成起;到老剎那共第二心,五十四色成起。
三個數依次遞增:三十、四十六、五十四。
而它們底下所列的目,照底本的斷句加一加:「起。業所造三十食節所成二色及八無心過」〔T32 451b03〕節色——三十加二加八,得四十,而標作四十六;「所成三十食時所成三色及八如是起,識緣」〔T32 451b05〕——三十加三加八,得四十一,而標作五十四。
兩處都對不上。
這和本段開頭那兩組十二(三加二加七、二加二加八)恰成對照:同一段之內,前面的加法一算就合,後面的加法一算就不合。論文於此不出其算法,本編照錄不代算、也不代加標點——因為此處的目與數之間,正是本品一路遇到的那種連寫,而這一次連上下文都補不出來。
末句是「名色、名色緣識。如是成有節,於是以三節」〔T32 451b06〕「可知」〔T32 451b07〕。七行之第一行,到此走完。
帶走三件:一個所見——本段一口氣連下十二個問句(八「幾」、二「云何」、末二各別),為全論問得最密之一處;而答文之中「不應說」三見〔T32 450c22(二見)·450c26〕,全論不過十一見。問得最密的地方,止得也最多。 一個讀法——遇連問,先數問、再數答:數清問句有幾個,才看得出答文應了哪些、擱下了哪些。一處停問——問處作「有節者何義」而收處作「此謂有生節」〔T32 451a08·451a10〕,問之名三字而收之名四字(「有生節」全論唯此一見):這是同一個名嗎?本編照錄不代齊。
還有三件小事該記著:三分十二與三時十二兩組加法皆合,而末尾入胎之色數兩處皆不合(三十加二加八得四十而標四十六,三十加三加八得四十一而標五十四),論文不出其算法;總標式於界方便闕而至本段復出,惟作「以七行可知」而少「所勝」二字,且七名逐一分開為本品三處同標之中寫得最乾淨的一處;命終處連下燈燃燈與火珠出火二譬,全論各唯一見而論文不會通。
Let the observation be stated first: This passage sets down twelve questions in one breath, making it the densest stretch of questioning in the entire treatise; and “should not be said” appears three times in the answer. The place where questioning is densest is precisely also the place that most often says, “this should not be said.”
One is density and one is restraint: the two sides of the same passage.
Twelve Questions
The questions are posed like this: “In a single moment the twelve factors of conditionality are formed. Question: Of those twelve factors, how many are called” 〔T32 450c13〕 “defilements? How many are called karma? How many are results? How many are past? How many are future? How many are present?” 〔T32 450c14〕 “How many are conditions? How many have arisen? What is conditionality? What is a conditioned dhamma? How do” 〔T32 450c15〕 “the two differ? What is the defiled nature of conditionality?” 〔T32 450c16〕
Under a single “Question:” come twelve questions in succession. Eight ask “how many,” two ask “what,” and the final two each take a different form.
This is the densest stretch of questioning in the entire treatise. Elsewhere, questions usually come one question and one answer at a time, with at most three or four asked together; here there are twelve.
First Count What Adds Up: Two Sets of Twelve
The answer begins with the numbers.
The first set: “the two differ? What is the defiled nature of conditionality? Answer: Three are defilements—ignorance, craving, and” 〔T32 450c16〕 “grasping. Two are karma—formations and becoming. The remaining seven are result” 〔T32 450c17〕—three plus two plus seven gives exactly twelve.
The second set: “the painted object. Defilement brings it forth; with conditions it comes to birth, like varied colors. Two are past—” 〔T32 450c19〕 “ignorance and formations. Two are future—birth and aging-and-death. The remaining eight are present” 〔T32 450c20〕—two plus two plus eight also gives exactly twelve, with the final factor, “aging-and-death,” counted as one.
Both sets add up. This is worth remembering, because near the end of this passage there is a place that does not add up (see below).
For the threefold division, the treatise also provides three similes, all using a painter: defilement is like a painter’s colors; the object does not arise by itself, like the object painted by the painter; defilement brings it forth, and with conditions it comes to birth, like varied colors. One matter, three similes, and all three draw on the same image—the source term “painter,” written with two characters, appears only these two times in the entire treatise, both in this one sentence.
Then Three Occurrences of “Should Not Be Said”
The tone then suddenly changes.
“With this taking of the three times, beginningless continuity through birth and death can be known. That the twelve factors are conditionality” 〔T32 450c21〕 “should not be said; that apart from the twelvefold conditionality there is conditionality also should not be said” 〔T32 450c22〕—it should not be said that the twelve factors themselves are conditionality; it should also not be said that another conditionality exists apart from the twelvefold conditionality.
Both sides are blocked.
A third comes further on, when the difference between conditionality and conditioned dhamma is explained: “conditionality differs among formations; not accomplished, it cannot be stated; whether conditioned or unconditioned” 〔T32 450c25〕 “should not be said” 〔T32 450c26〕.
In this passage, “should not be said” appears three times; in the entire treatise it appears only eleven times. More than a quarter of them are crowded into this passage.
This is the shape of the passage: where questioning is densest, restraint is most frequent. Twelve questions line up, and the answer responds to them one by one; yet when it reaches the two most pressing points, what it says is “this should not be said.” This edition records the text as it stands and does not decide the matter for it, nor does it infer a position from this.
Reading Practice: When Questions Come in a Series, Count the Questions, Then the Answers
This passage offers a very practical reading method: when you meet a series of questions, first count how many questions there are; then see how many the answer addresses, in what order it addresses them, and which one it leaves aside.
Applied here: there are twelve questions, and the answer responds roughly in order—first the three divisions (one through three), then the three times (four through six). At the seventh and eighth questions (“How many are conditions?” and “How many have arisen?”), the answer consists of two “should not be said” clauses and the statement “What brings the twelve factors of conditionality into arising is an arisen dhamma” 〔T32 450c24〕; the ninth and tenth questions each receive an explanation; the eleventh (“How do the two differ?”) receives a dedicated answer; and the twelfth (“What is the defiled nature of conditionality?”) also receives a dedicated answer and closes with “This is called the defiled nature of conditionality.”
What is answered and what should not be said both appear in the same answer. Unless one first counts the questions clearly, one cannot see where the treatise itself holds back from speaking.
Conditionality and Conditioned Dhamma: The Difference Is “Accomplished”
The two terms asked about in “How do the two differ?” receive a very short answer. It is worth copying them out and looking at them.
Conditionality is: “Conditionality? Because these twelve dhammas, in sequence, turn about as causes for one another, this is called conditionality” 〔T32 450c23〕—the twelve dhammas serve as causes for one another in sequence, and this “serving as causes for one another in sequence” itself is called conditionality. A conditioned dhamma is: “What brings the twelve factors of conditionality into arising is an arisen dhamma” 〔T32 450c24〕—the arisen dhamma that brings the twelve factors of conditionality into arising.
Where is the difference? “A formation that gives rise to a conditioned dhamma has become accomplished and conditioned; these two” 〔T32 450c26〕 “dhammas differ” 〔T32 450c27〕. One remains “unaccomplished,” so it should not be said to be conditioned or unconditioned; the other has become accomplished and conditioned.
Put another way: conditionality is a relation; a conditioned dhamma is a thing. As for the relation, it should not be called either conditioned or unconditioned (the treatise says this should not be said), while the thing has already become accomplished and conditioned. This edition states only this much according to the text and does not press the treatise further.
A Structural Form That Disappeared and Then Returned
The seven-approach master heading appears here: “penetrates it with luminous understanding. All this is called the defiled nature of conditionality. Again” 〔T32 450c29〕 “this conditionality can be known through seven approaches: through the three junctures, through the four summaries,” 〔T32 451a01〕 “through twenty modes, through wheel, through drawing, through analysis, and through mutual inclusion” 〔T32 451a02〕.
The reader should recognize this pattern: in the aggregate method, four approaches; in the sense-base method, five approaches—first announce the number of approaches, next list their names, and then pose questions under each in turn. The element-method passage omits the entire pattern. In the conditionality method, it returns.
Yet it returns in a slightly different form: the aggregate and sense-base passages contain the expressions “can be surpassed through four approaches” and “can be surpassed through five approaches,” whereas here it says “can be known through seven approaches”—the two-character expression “can be surpassed” is absent. This edition records the wording as it stands and does not supply it.
There is one more point that does add up: the seven names here are separated one by one with enumeration marks, with nothing run together; the treatise announces seven approaches, and counting gives exactly seven. In the two earlier master headings of the same kind in this chapter, one is broken apart by punctuation (“base inclusion, element inclusion truth, inclusion”), while the other is written continuously without breaks (“through domain through condition”). The same pattern has three forms in three places; this is the cleanest written of the three.
Three Junctures: The Same Thing in Two Coordinate Systems
The first of the seven approaches is the three junctures.
The treatise first states them through the factor-names: “How are they known through three junctures? Between formations and consciousness is the first juncture; between feeling and craving is the” 〔T32 451a03〕 “second juncture; between becoming and birth is the third juncture” 〔T32 451a04〕.
It immediately states them again through the three times: “In the past, karma” 〔T32 451a04〕 “and defilement condition present result; this is the first juncture. Present result” 〔T32 451a05〕 “conditions present defilement; this is the second juncture. Present defilement conditions future” 〔T32 451a06〕 “result; this is the third juncture” 〔T32 451a07〕.
The same division is stated once in each of two coordinate systems: once in terms of the names of the twelve factors, and once in terms of past, present, and future. Set the two accounts side by side, and it becomes very clear where the three “junctures” fall.
Then the treatise classifies the three junctures: “result, the third juncture. The first and third are cause-result junctures and becoming junctures; the second” 〔T32 451a07〕 “juncture is a result-cause juncture and not a becoming juncture” 〔T32 451a08〕. The first and third are cause-result junctures and also becoming junctures; the second is a result-cause juncture and not a becoming juncture.
Four names appear together, and the treatise gives not one of them a definition. Only the “becoming juncture” receives a question.
Pause: The Question Says “Becoming Juncture,” the Close Says “Becoming-Birth Juncture”
Now pause at this sentence.
“the juncture is a result-cause juncture and not a becoming juncture. What does ‘becoming juncture’ mean? Answer: Immediately after death, before” 〔T32 451a08〕 “passing beyond the aggregates, bases, and elements; because of initial karma and defilement as conditions, there is renewed birth in the various destinations;” 〔T32 451a09〕 “this is called the becoming-birth juncture” 〔T32 451a10〕.
In the source, the name in the question has three characters: 有節. The name at the close has four characters: 有生節.
And the three-character name “有生節” occurs only once in the entire treatise.
Pause and ask: Are these the same name?
If they are the same, then between the question and the answer the treatise has added one character to the name. If they are not, then the “becoming juncture” that was asked about has still not received its own closing formula. Only two things can be verified: the question reads “What does ‘becoming juncture’ mean?”; the answer closes “This is called the becoming-birth juncture.” This edition records both as they stand and does not make them match, nor does it choose one as correct.
The Passage on Death and an Addition That Does Not Add Up
The second question is answered by “This is called the becoming-birth juncture. Question: How does it occur? Answer: That person enters into association with ignorance and craving” 〔T32 451a10〕. The answer describes how a person dies and how a person is reborn.
First comes the breakdown of the bodily signs: intention and knowing decline, bodily vigor declines, and the faculties gradually fail—“decline; the faculties gradually fail. From the body, whether above or below, the life faculty is lost, and” 〔T32 451a14〕 “moisture is lost, as a palmyra leaf dries” 〔T32 451a15〕. The palmyra leaf dries—this is the only time this simile is used in the entire treatise.
Next come “through the leaf, four” 〔T32 451a15〕 “dhammas arise: karma, karma-sign, destination, and destination-sign” 〔T32 451a16〕. The four dhammas are explained one by one: karma is the meritorious or unmeritorious deed that was done; karma-sign is the companion that arises at the place where karma was done; destination is the arising of one of the two destinations, good or bad; destination-sign is the appearance of the place where birth will occur—a palace, a seat, a mountain, a tree, or a river.
Then comes the series of minds: rapid mind arises and ceases; the life faculty ceases and the end is completed; immediately after the final mind, rapid mind arises again; “destination or a grasped sign performs its function. At the locus of resultant mind it crosses into later becoming, as one lamp” 〔T32 451a28〕 “lights another, as fire issues from a fire-jewel” 〔T32 451a29〕.
Here two similes follow one another—a lamp lighting another lamp, and fire issuing from a fire-jewel. The two similes are placed side by side, yet the treatise does not say why they are used together, nor whether the two similes make the same point or two different points. Each simile occurs only once in the entire treatise. This edition records them as they stand and does not reconcile them.
Last comes form at conception. “In the mother’s womb, dependent on the parents’ impure substances, thirty forms made by karma arise, locus” 〔T32 451b01〕 “body has ten” 〔T32 451b02〕; at the aging moment, across a mindless juncture, forty-six forms arise; at the aging moment together with the second mind, fifty-four forms arise.
The three numbers rise in sequence: thirty, forty-six, fifty-four.
But if the items listed beneath them are added according to the base text’s punctuation: “arise. Thirty made by karma, two forms made at the food juncture, and eight mindless-juncture” 〔T32 451b03〕 forms—thirty plus two plus eight gives forty, yet it is labeled forty-six; “thirty are formed, three forms are made at the time of food, and eight; thus they arise, consciousness conditions” 〔T32 451b05〕—thirty plus three plus eight gives forty-one, yet it is labeled fifty-four.
Neither one adds up.
This forms an exact contrast with the two sets of twelve at the beginning of the passage (three plus two plus seven; two plus two plus eight): within the same passage, the earlier additions agree as soon as they are calculated, while the later additions do not. The treatise gives no method of calculation here. This edition records the numbers as they stand; it does not repair the arithmetic, and it does not add punctuation on the treatise’s behalf—because the items and numbers here present precisely the same sort of run-on writing encountered throughout this chapter, and this time even the context cannot supply what is missing.
The final sentence is “name-and-form; name-and-form conditions consciousness. Thus the becoming juncture is formed; in this way, through the three junctures” 〔T32 451b06〕 “it can be known” 〔T32 451b07〕. The first of the seven approaches is complete here.
Carry away three things: one observation—this passage sets down twelve questions in one breath (eight “how many,” two “what,” and the final two each distinct), making it one of the densest stretches of questioning in the entire treatise; and “should not be said” appears three times in the answer 〔T32 450c22(二見)·450c26〕, while it occurs only eleven times in the entire treatise. Where questioning is densest, restraint is most frequent. One reading method—when questions come in a series, first count the questions, then count the answers: only after counting the questions clearly can you see which ones the answer addresses and which it leaves aside. One place to pause—the question reads “What does ‘becoming juncture’ mean?” while the close reads “This is called the becoming-birth juncture” 〔T32 451a08·451a10〕; the name in the question has three source characters, while the name at the close has four (the source name “有生節” occurs only once in the entire treatise): are these the same name? This edition records them as they stand and does not make them match.
Three smaller points should also be remembered: the two sets of twelve—the threefold division and the three times—both add up, while the two totals for form at conception near the end do not (thirty plus two plus eight is forty, though the total is given as forty-six; thirty plus three plus eight is forty-one, though the total is given as fifty-four), and the treatise supplies no method of calculation; the master-heading pattern is absent from the element method and returns in this passage, but it reads only “can be known through seven approaches,” lacking the two-character expression “can be surpassed,” while its seven names are individually separated, the cleanest of the three such headings in this chapter; at death the similes of one lamp lighting another and fire issuing from a fire-jewel are given one after the other, each occurs only once in the entire treatise, and the treatise does not reconcile them.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Classifications, Junctures, and Rebirth · Exposition · Summer 2026
四略、二十行、輪與牽Four Summaries, Twenty Modes, Wheel, and Drawing
全文五層 →Full five layers →七行走完了第一行(三節),這一段一口氣走完第二到第五行。
先把所見說在前頭:四門之中最短的是「輪」,只有三句;而那三句做的事,是把鏈的末端認回頭端——「於此皆苦陰無知,此謂無明」。上一單元用一個譬的形顯出這個圈,這裡是用一句話直說它。
讀法:看每一門是怎麼重切十二支的
本段連下四門,每一門都在處理同一批十二支。讀法就在這裡:看每一門是用什麼刀重切一次。
四略是切成四組。「可知。問:云何以四略?答:無明、行於過去業煩」〔T32 451b07〕「惱略,識、名色、六入、觸、受於現在果報略,愛、」〔T32 451b08〕「取、有於現在業煩惱略,生、老死於未來果報」〔T32 451b09〕略。
過去業煩惱、現在果報、現在業煩惱、未來果報——四把尺,兩兩交錯(三時×業煩惱與果報)。數一數:二、五、三、二,正得十二。切得乾淨,數也對得上。
二十行是切成六句。六句一律以「成所取」收〔T32 451b11–451b16〕,每一句取幾支、以什麼相(煩惱相·業相·果報相)成其所取。
輪不切。它把首尾接起來。
牽只取兩端。十二支之中只管無明與老死那兩頭。
四門四刀。同一批東西,看你從哪裡下手,得出的形就不同——這是本段整個的教法,而它不說一句,只做四遍給人看。
輪:三句話就接上了
輪門是四門裡最短的:「十行可知。云何以輪?無明緣行,行緣識,乃」〔T32 451b24〕「至生緣老死,如是皆苦陰起。於此皆苦陰無」〔T32 451b25〕「知,此謂無明。無明緣行者,復如是以輪可知」〔T32 451b26〕。
三句。第一句是那條鏈(略去中間,以「乃至」帶過)。第二句是關鍵:在這一整堆苦陰上的無知,就是無明。第三句只說五個字:無明緣行者,復如是。
看清楚它做了什麼。鏈走到末端是「皆苦陰起」;而對這一整堆苦陰的無知——那正是鏈的第一支。於是末端生出的東西,本身就是頭端。不必另外造一個圈,鏈自己就合攏了。
上一單元讀者已經見過這個圈:穀、種、牙、葉、枝、樹、花、汁、米、種,第十環與第二環同句,列自相接〔T32 450b21·450b28〕。那一次是用譬的形顯出來,這一次是用一句話直說。一顯一說,所指是同一件事。
而這一句直說,比那個譬更狠一點:譬只說「這串接得上」,這一句說的是「接得上的地方在無知」。圈之所以是圈,不在事物本身首尾相銜,在於對這一整堆的不知。
本編照文說到此為止,不代論文再往下推。
牽:只管兩頭,而兩頭各有兩種說法
牽門更短:「云何以牽?二牽,所謂無明所初及老死所初」〔T32 451b27〕「於是」〔T32 451b28〕。
只有兩個:以無明為初、以老死為初。
而這兩個各得兩次解釋。第一次:「於是。問:云何無明所初?答:是說次第。云何老」〔T32 451b28〕「死所初:是度次第」〔T32 451b29〕——一個是說的次第,一個是度的次第。
第二次:「復次無明所初,是有邊」〔T32 451b29〕「際面未來知道。老死所初者,初邊際面過去」〔T32 451c01〕「知道」〔T32 451c02〕——一個是站在有的邊際上朝未來知道,一個是站在初的邊際上朝過去知道。
同一組二牽,兩次解釋。兩次所用的座標不同:前一次分的是說與度,後一次分的是朝向未來與朝向過去。論文把二釋並排放著,不作會通。照錄不代會通。
(「二牽」「說次第」「度次第」三語,全論各只出現這一次。)
停一下:自報二十四,數出來二十三
現在停在二十行那一節。
六句列完之後,論文自己報了一個數:「六入觸受成所取。此二十四法,以取其成就」〔T32 451b16〕「成二十」〔T32 451b17〕。
二十四法,取其成就而成二十。
照著六句逐目數一數:第一句無明、愛、取(三);第二句行、有(二);第三句識、名色、六入、觸、受、生、老死(七);第四句愛、取(二);第五句有、行(二);第六句生、老死、識、名色、六入、觸、受(七)。
合計二十三。
而論文說二十四。差一。
再者:二十四如何「取其成就」而成二十——減掉四個,減的是哪四個?論文不出其算法。
停下來問一句:這個數該怎麼數?
本段答不了。可核的只有三件:論文自報二十四;依底本所列逐目數之得二十三;「成二十」之減法論文不出。本編照錄不代算、不代加標點。
而這一處與同一段裡另外兩處恰成對照:四略那一組(二、五、三、二)一算就合十二;阿毘曇所引那三組(五、五、二)也一算就合十二。同一段之內,兩處合、一處不合。上一個單元末尾入胎之色數,也是一處不合。
數對得上,從來不是理所當然的。這也正是本品一路要一次一次去核的原因。
一處引據,權據換了
二十行那一節裡還有一件該記的事。
「成二十。如阿毘曇所說:於初業有癡是無明,」〔T32 451b17〕——論文在這裡引了阿毘曇。
所引的是三組:初業有五法(癡是無明、聚是行、著是愛、覓是取、思是有),此業有五法(同五名而所繫之有不同),未來生有二法(觸、受)。五、五、二,合十二。
值得記著的是權據換了。上上一個單元(11-11)論文引的是「如佛所說」〔T32 450c04〕;本段引的是「如阿毘曇所說」。本品的引據到此二見,而所據不同——一為佛語,一為論藏;再加上 11-02 稱引尊者〔T32 446a01〕,本品三處引據,三種來源。
而兩處都一樣:不出經名品目,也不標引文到哪裡為止。引文的界,論文不標,本編也不代畫。
帶走三件:一個所見——輪門只有三句,而它做的事是把鏈的末端認回頭端:「於此皆苦陰無」〔T32 451b25〕「知,此謂無明」〔T32 451b26〕。上一單元以穀種十環之譬顯此圈之形,本段以一句直說其為輪;且這一句更進一步——圈之所以是圈,不在事物首尾相銜,在於對這一整堆的不知。 一個讀法——看每一門是怎麼重切十二支的:四略切四組、二十行切六句、輪不切而接首尾、牽只取兩端。同一批東西,下刀處不同則所得之形不同。一處停問——二十行自報「此二十四法,以取其成就成二十」〔T32 451b16–451b17〕,而依所列逐目數之得二十三,且「成二十」之減法論文不出:這個數該怎麼數? 本編照錄不代算。
還有兩件小事該記著:二牽各得二釋(說次第/度次第·面未來/面過去)而論文不會通;本段引據以「如阿毘曇所說」領起〔T32 451b17〕,與 11-11 之「如佛所說」〔T32 450c04〕權據不同,而二處同樣不標引文之界。
The seven approaches have completed their first approach—the three junctures. This passage completes the second through fifth approaches in one sweep.
Let us put the central observation first: Among the four approaches, the shortest is “wheel,” with only three sentences; and what those three sentences do is recognize the chain’s end as its beginning—“Not knowing this entire aggregate of suffering is called ignorance.” The preceding unit revealed the shape of this circle through a simile; here one sentence states it directly.
Reading Practice: See How Each Approach Recuts the Twelve
This passage sets out four approaches in succession, each handling the same twelve factors. Here is the reading practice: see what blade each approach uses to recut them.
Four summaries cut them into four groups. “It can be understood. Question: How through four summaries? Answer: ignorance and formations are summarized under past karma and defilements” 〔T32 451b07〕 “consciousness, name-and-form, the six bases, contact, and feeling under present result; craving and” 〔T32 451b08〕 “grasping and becoming under present karma and defilements; birth and aging-and-death under future result” 〔T32 451b09〕 in summary.
Past karma and defilements, present result, present karma and defilements, future result—four measures, interlaced two by two (three times × karma and defilements versus result). Count them: two, five, three, and two, making exactly twelve. The cut is clean, and the count agrees.
Twenty modes cut them into six clauses. All six close with “become what is taken” 〔T32 451b11–451b16〕; each clause states how many factors are taken and under what character—defilement, karma, or result—they become what is taken.
Wheel does not cut. It joins the beginning and end.
Drawing takes only the two ends. Of the twelve factors, it attends only to the ends of ignorance and aging-and-death.
Four approaches, four blades. With the same set of things, the resulting shape differs according to where the cut is made—this is the teaching of the entire passage, yet it never states that teaching in a sentence. It simply performs the operation four times for the reader to see.
Wheel: Three Sentences Close the Chain
The wheel approach is the shortest of the four: “The twenty modes can be understood. How through the wheel? Ignorance conditions formations, formations condition consciousness, and” 〔T32 451b24〕 “so on until birth conditions aging-and-death; in this way the entire aggregate of suffering arises. Regarding this entire aggregate of suffering, not” 〔T32 451b25〕 “knowing it is called ignorance. As for ignorance conditioning formations, it is again so; in this way it can be understood through the wheel” 〔T32 451b26〕.
Three sentences. The first is the chain, with the middle omitted and carried by “and so on.” The second is the key: Not knowing this entire aggregate of suffering is ignorance. The third says only five words: as for ignorance conditioning formations, it is again so.
Look closely at what it has done. The chain reaches its end with “the entire aggregate of suffering arises”; not knowing this entire aggregate is precisely the chain’s first factor. Thus what arises at the end is itself the beginning. No separate circle needs to be constructed; the chain closes by itself.
The preceding unit already showed the reader this circle: grain, seed, sprout, leaf, branch, tree, flower, sap, rice, seed—the tenth link repeats the same sentence as the second, so the list joins back onto itself 〔T32 450b21·450b28〕. There the shape of the circle was revealed through a simile; here it is stated directly in one sentence.
And this direct statement goes further than the simile: the simile says only, “this sequence joins up”; this sentence says, “the point where it joins is ignorance.” The circle is a circle not because things themselves meet end to beginning, but because this entire mass is not known.
This edition states only this much according to the text and does not press the treatise further.
Drawing: Only the Two Ends, Each Explained Twice
Drawing is shorter still: “How through drawing? Two drawings, namely, beginning from ignorance and beginning from aging-and-death” 〔T32 451b27〕 “on this point” 〔T32 451b28〕.
There are only two: beginning from ignorance and beginning from aging-and-death.
Each of these is explained twice. The first time: “On this point. Question: What begins from ignorance? Answer: It is the sequence of exposition. What begins from aging-and-death?” 〔T32 451b28〕 “It is the sequence of crossing” 〔T32 451b29〕—one is the sequence of exposition, the other the sequence of crossing.
The second time: “Further, beginning from ignorance is at the boundary of becoming” 〔T32 451b29〕 “facing the future and knowing. Beginning from aging-and-death is at the initial boundary facing the past” 〔T32 451c01〕 “and knowing” 〔T32 451c02〕—one stands at the boundary of becoming and knows toward the future; the other stands at the initial boundary and knows toward the past.
The same pair of drawings receives two explanations. The two explanations use different coordinates: the first distinguishes exposition from crossing, while the second distinguishes facing the future from facing the past. The treatise places them side by side without reconciling them. They are recorded as they stand; this edition does not reconcile them.
(The three expressions “two drawings,” “sequence of exposition,” and “sequence of crossing” each occur only once in the whole treatise.)
Pause: The Text Announces Twenty-Four; the List Gives Twenty-Three
Now pause at the section on twenty modes.
After the six clauses have been listed, the treatise announces a number: “the six bases, contact, and feeling become what is taken. These twenty-four dhammas, by taking their accomplishment” 〔T32 451b16〕 “become twenty” 〔T32 451b17〕.
Twenty-four dhammas become twenty by taking their accomplishment.
Count the six clauses item by item: the first has ignorance, craving, and grasping—three; the second, formations and becoming—two; the third, consciousness, name-and-form, the six bases, contact, feeling, birth, and aging-and-death—seven; the fourth, craving and grasping—two; the fifth, becoming and formations—two; the sixth, birth, aging-and-death, consciousness, name-and-form, the six bases, contact, and feeling—seven.
The total is twenty-three.
Yet the treatise says twenty-four. The difference is one.
Further, how do twenty-four “by taking their accomplishment” become twenty? Four must be subtracted, but which four? The treatise does not provide its calculation.
Pause and ask one question: how should this number be counted?
This passage cannot answer. Only three things can be verified: the treatise announces twenty-four; counting the items transmitted in the base text gives twenty-three; and the treatise does not provide the subtraction by which they “become twenty.” This edition records these facts without calculating or adding punctuation on the text’s behalf.
This case contrasts with two others in the same passage: the four-summary groups (two, five, three, two) add to twelve, and the three groups cited from the Abhidhamma (five, five, two) also add to twelve. Within one passage, two totals agree and one does not. The count of forms at conception at the end of the preceding unit is another place where the figures fail to agree.
That the numbers agree is never something to take for granted. This is precisely why the chapter checks them again and again.
One Citation with a Changed Authority
There is one more matter to record in the section on twenty modes.
“They become twenty. As the Abhidhamma says: in initial karmic becoming, delusion is ignorance,” 〔T32 451b17〕—here the treatise cites the Abhidhamma.
The citation contains three groups: initial karmic becoming has five dhammas—delusion is ignorance, gathering is formation, attachment is craving, seeking is grasping, and intention is becoming; this karmic becoming has five dhammas—the same five names, though the becoming to which they are attached differs; and future birth becoming has two dhammas—contact and feeling. Five, five, and two make twelve.
What deserves notice is that the authority has changed. Two units back, in 11-11, the treatise cited “as the Buddha said” 〔T32 450c04〕; here it cites “as the Abhidhamma says.” The chapter has now presented two citations, and their authorities differ—one is a Buddha-saying and one the Abhidhamma. Add the citation of the Venerable in 11-02 〔T32 446a01〕, and the chapter has three citations from three kinds of source.
Both citations are alike in one respect: neither gives the name of the scripture or its section, nor marks where the quotation ends. The treatise does not mark the quotation’s boundary, and this edition does not draw it on the treatise’s behalf.
Take away three things. One observation—the wheel approach has only three sentences, and what it does is recognize the chain’s end as its beginning: “Regarding this entire aggregate of suffering, not” 〔T32 451b25〕 “knowing it is called ignorance” 〔T32 451b26〕. The preceding unit used the ten-link grain-and-seed simile to reveal the shape of this circle; this passage states it directly in one sentence. And that sentence goes further—the circle is a circle not because things meet end to beginning, but because this entire mass is not known. One reading practice—see how each approach recuts the twelve factors: four summaries cut four groups, twenty modes cut six clauses, wheel does not cut but joins beginning and end, and drawing takes only the two ends. With the same things, a different place of cutting yields a different shape. One place to pause—twenty modes announces, “These twenty-four dhammas, by taking their accomplishment, become twenty” 〔T32 451b16–451b17〕, yet counting the listed items gives twenty-three, and the treatise does not provide the subtraction by which they “become twenty”: How should this number be counted? This edition records it without calculating on the treatise’s behalf.
Remember two smaller matters as well: the two drawings each receive two explanations—sequence of exposition versus sequence of crossing, and facing the future versus facing the past—without the treatise reconciling them; and this passage introduces its citation with “as the Abhidhamma says” 〔T32 451b17〕, under an authority different from 11-11’s “as the Buddha said” 〔T32 450c04〕, while neither passage marks where its quotation ends.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Four Summaries, Twenty Modes, Wheel, and Drawing · Exposition · Summer 2026
世間、出世因緣與相攝Mundane and Supramundane Conditions and Inclusion
全文五層 →Full five layers →卷第十走到最後一段。因緣方便七行,這裡畢其末二;門一關,這一卷也就盡了。
先把所見說在前頭:本段有兩處可與本品前文相形。其一,攝門作「四種相攝」而非「三種攝」:陰、入、聖諦三方便各列另外三類,本段則列陰、入、界、諦四類;四處字面相形如此,論文不明說其所以。其二,「如世尊說偈」這一引標接在一則異說之後,論文不標它是誰引的。
讀法:看一段的攝門用幾種
先說第一處破例,因為它給出的是一把可以帶走的尺。
陰方便的攝門作「三種攝,入攝、界攝諦、攝」〔T32 448c09〕,入方便作「三種攝,陰攝、界攝、諦攝」〔T32 449c17〕,聖諦方便作三種攝陰、入、界〔T32 453b23〕。三處都是三種。
而本段作「如是分別可知。問:云何以相攝?答:四種相攝,」〔T32 451c16〕「陰相攝、入相攝、界相攝、諦相攝」〔T32 451c17〕——四種。
(可核的很簡單:「四種相攝」四字全論只出現這一次。)
把四處並排,可見字面上的配列:陰方便列入、界、諦,入方便列陰、界、諦,聖諦方便列陰、入、界;本段所論因緣,不在陰、入、界、諦四名之內,而四者俱列。
本段交出的讀法是:把所論對象與攝門所列之名並排,先記它列了什麼、略了什麼。前三處各略去與所論同名的一類,本段則四類俱列。
本編只記這層可核的相形,不代論文說其故。
出世因緣:十一目,十目同形而末目破格
第六行是分別,先分二種因緣:世間與出世。世間的很短——「初,是世因緣」〔T32 451c04〕,就是無明所初,承上一單元的牽門。
(順帶記著一處小小的不齊:標名作「世間因緣」〔T32 451c03〕而其下作「世因緣」,一名二形。照錄不代齊。)
出世因緣則連下十一目:「初,是世因緣。問:云何出世因緣?答:苦依苦、信」〔T32 451c04〕「依信、喜依喜、踊躍依踊躍、倚依倚、樂依」〔T32 451c05〕「樂、定依定、如實知見依如實知見、厭患依厭」〔T32 451c06〕「患、無欲依無欲、解脫依解脫滅智,此謂出」〔T32 451c07〕世因緣。
十一目,每目都是同一個名重出、中間繫一個「依」字。十目一律如此,唯末目破格——作「解脫依解脫滅智」,後半多出「滅智」二字。
(「依」字在本段出現十一次,正是十一目。)
苦、信、喜、踊躍、倚、樂、定、如實知見、厭患、無欲、解脫——這一列與世間那一條鏈正好對著看:一條從無明起而落在苦上,一條從苦起而落在解脫上。同一個「依」字,一路把人往下帶,也一路把人往上帶。本編只記二列之相形,不代論文另立說。
四種因緣,與一則直接說「沒有」的別說
接著是四種因緣:「世因緣。復說四種因緣:業煩惱為因,種為」〔T32 451c08〕「因,有作、共業為因」〔T32 451c09〕。
四個名,四問四答,逐一相對,一項不缺:業煩惱為因是無明所初;「明所初。云何種為因?如種牙相續。云何有」〔T32 451c10〕「作?如化色。云何共業為因?如地雪山海日月」〔T32 451c11〕。
三個譬各繫一因(種牙相續、化色、地雪山海日月),而首因無譬。照錄不代補。
然後是本品第三則異說:「復有說:非此共業因,是諸色心法,時節為因,」〔T32 451c12〕「無有共業」〔T32 451c13〕。
這一則說得最直接:沒有共業。它不是修正,是把上面剛立的第四因整個否掉。
本品的異說到此三則——11-08 境界門有兩則救眼、救耳,本段有這一則。三則之中,論文一則也不裁。
停一下:那首偈是誰引的
異說說完,緊接著就是:「無有共業。如世尊說偈:」〔T32 451c13〕
業不與他共,是藏他不偷,
人所作功德,其自得善報。〔T32 451c14–451c15〕
「如世尊說偈」五字全論只出現這一次,偈文「業不與他共」也只出現這一次。但本論此前已有其他引偈與偈文;唯此一見的是這個引標,不是偈頌這一形式。
而它落在哪裡?緊接在異說之後,其間沒有一個「復次」、沒有一句「答」,什麼另起的標記都沒有。
停下來問一句:這首偈是誰引的?
若屬異說,那就是那一則別說引世尊之語以自證——而偈文說「業不與他共」,與別說的「無有共業」正相順。若屬論主,那就是論主在別說之後自引一偈,其意或許是為別說作結,或許另有所向。
論文不標。
可核的只有三件:偈緊接異說之後而無另起之標;偈文與異說之語相順;「如世尊說偈」全論唯此一見。這三件仍不足以指定引者,本編照錄不代判。
相攝:四欄逐一,與兩處難讀
第七行是相攝,四欄逐一列去。
陰欄:「觸、愛、取、有,行陰所攝。識,識陰所攝。名色,四陰」〔T32 451c18〕所攝,六入歸二陰,受歸受陰,「陰所攝及行陰所攝」〔T32 451c20〕——生、老死兼歸色、行二陰。
入欄與界欄同式而換框。這兩欄各有一處連寫:「老死法,入所攝。識意,入所攝。名色,五內入所」〔T32 451c21〕、「老死,法界所攝。識意,識界所攝。名色,五界所」〔T32 451c23〕——「識」與「意」二字相連而不斷。依上下的對稱,兩處各是一目(識歸意入、識歸意識界)。照原字錄,不代加標點。
諦欄這裡有一處更難:「攝。六入,十二諦所攝。無明、愛、取,十諦所攝。餘」〔T32 451c24〕「九苦諦所攝」〔T32 451c25〕。
本論所立唯有四諦。而這裡出了「十二諦」與「十諦」兩個語,兩個全論都只出現這一次,論文一句也不釋。
可核的只有一件對得上的事:「無明、愛、取」三,加上「餘九」的九,正得十二——與十二支之數相合。至於那兩個語該怎麼讀,本編照原字錄,不代改、不代加標點。
末了兩目把段首的伏筆收了:「九苦諦所攝。出世因緣,道分,道諦所攝。因緣」〔T32 451c25〕「滅,滅諦所攝」〔T32 451c26〕。段首立了二種因緣,世間的那一種一路被分被攝,出世的那一種到這裡才得到它的歸屬。
門關了,卷也盡了
最後一句:「滅,滅諦所攝。如是以相攝可知。如是以行因」〔T32 451c26〕「緣方便可知。此謂因緣方便(因緣方便已竟)」〔T32 451c27〕。
第四扇門關上了。五個「已竟」,這是第四個。
而其後緊接的是「解脫道論卷第十」——本段是這一卷的末段。五方便還剩一個聖諦方便,在下一卷。
帶走三件:一個所見——本段攝門作「四種相攝」〔T32 451c16,全論唯一見〕而非三種;另有「如世尊說偈」〔T32 451c13,全論唯此一見〕緊接一則異說,其間無另起之標。一個讀法——把所論對象與攝門所列之名並排:前三處各略去與所論同名的一類,本段四類俱列;四處字面相形如此,論文不明說其所以。 一處停問——偈文「業不與他共」與異說之「無有共業」相順:這首偈是誰引的? 論文不標,本編照錄不代判。
還有三件小事該記著:出世因緣十一目,十目一律同名重出而中繫「依」字,唯末目作「解脫依解脫滅智」而破格;相攝諦欄之「十二諦」「十諦」二語全論各唯一見而論文不釋,惟「無明愛取」三加「餘九」九正得十二;本品異說三則(11-08 二則·本段一則),論文一則也不裁。
Fascicle ten has reached its final passage. Of the seven approaches in the method concerning conditionality, the last two are completed here; when the gate closes, the fascicle itself comes to an end.
Let us state the observation first: This passage offers two points of contrast with earlier parts of the chapter. First, its inclusion approach has “four kinds of mutual inclusion,” not “three kinds of inclusion”: the methods concerning aggregates, bases, and noble truths each list the other three categories, whereas this passage lists aggregates, bases, elements, and truths, four categories. This is the visible wording across the four passages, and the treatise does not state why. Second, the introductory formula “as the Blessed One spoke in verse” follows an alternative account, and the treatise does not mark who cites it.
Reading Practice: See How Many Kinds Each Inclusion Passage Uses
First consider the first departure from the pattern, because it provides a measure one can carry away.
The aggregate method’s inclusion approach says, “three kinds of inclusion: base inclusion, element inclusion, truth inclusion” 〔T32 448c09〕; the base method says, “three kinds of inclusion: aggregate inclusion, element inclusion, truth inclusion” 〔T32 449c17〕; and the noble-truth method uses three kinds of inclusion—aggregates, bases, and elements 〔T32 453b23〕. All three have three kinds.
This passage, however, says, “Thus it can be known through analysis. Question: How through mutual inclusion? Answer: four kinds of mutual inclusion” 〔T32 451c16〕, followed by “aggregate inclusion, base inclusion, element inclusion, and truth inclusion” 〔T32 451c17〕—four kinds.
(What can be checked is simple: the four-character source phrase “four kinds of mutual inclusion” occurs only once in the entire treatise.)
Placed side by side, the four passages show this distribution in their wording: the aggregate method lists bases, elements, and truths; the base method lists aggregates, elements, and truths; the noble-truth method lists aggregates, bases, and elements. Conditionality, the subject of this passage, is not one of the four names—aggregate, base, element, or truth—and all four are listed.
The reading practice this passage gives us is this: place the subject under discussion beside the names listed in its inclusion approach, and first record what it lists and what it omits. The first three passages each omit the category with the same name as their subject; this passage lists all four categories.
This edition records only this verifiable textual contrast and does not state the treatise’s reason on its behalf.
Supramundane Conditionality: Eleven Items, Ten in One Form and the Last Irregular
The sixth approach is analysis. It first distinguishes two kinds of conditionality: mundane and supramundane. The mundane form is very brief—“the beginning; this is mundane conditionality” 〔T32 451c04〕—namely, beginning from ignorance; it carries forward the drawing approach of the preceding unit.
(Also keep in mind a small unevenness: the label has “mundane conditionality” 〔T32 451c03〕, whereas the line below uses the shorter “mundane condition”—one name in two forms. They are reproduced as they stand, without being made uniform.)
Supramundane conditionality then runs through eleven items: “Beginning, this is mundane conditionality. Question: What is supramundane conditionality? Answer: suffering depends on suffering; confidence” 〔T32 451c04〕; “depends on confidence; joy depends on joy; exhilaration depends on exhilaration; repose depends on repose; pleasure depends” 〔T32 451c05〕; “on pleasure; concentration depends on concentration; knowledge-and-vision according to reality depends on knowledge-and-vision according to reality; disenchantment depends on disen-” 〔T32 451c06〕; “chantment; dispassion depends on dispassion; liberation depends on knowledge of cessation through liberation; this is supra-” 〔T32 451c07〕mundane conditionality.
There are eleven items. In each, the same name appears twice with one “depends on” between them. Ten have exactly this form, and only the last breaks the pattern—it reads “liberation depends on knowledge of cessation through liberation,” with the two-character expression “knowledge of cessation” added in the latter half.
(The character meaning “depends on” occurs eleven times in this passage, exactly once for each of the eleven items.)
Suffering, confidence, joy, exhilaration, repose, pleasure, concentration, knowledge-and-vision according to reality, disenchantment, dispassion, and liberation—this series can be read directly against the mundane chain. One begins with ignorance and comes down into suffering; the other begins with suffering and comes to rest in liberation. The same “depends on” carries a person downward along one path and upward along the other. This edition records only the contrast between the two series and does not formulate another teaching on the treatise’s behalf.
Four Kinds of Condition, and an Alternative That Directly Says “There Is None”
Next come four kinds of condition: “supramundane conditionality. Further, four kinds of condition are stated: karma-and-defilement as cause; seed as” 〔T32 451c08〕; “cause; produced activity; shared karma as cause” 〔T32 451c09〕.
There are four names and four question-and-answer pairs, corresponding one by one, with not a single item missing: karma-and-defilement as cause begins from ignorance; “ignorance is the beginning. What is seed as cause? It is like the continuity of seed and sprout. What is produced” 〔T32 451c10〕; “activity? It is like transformed form. What is shared karma as cause? It is like earth, Snow Mountain, sea, sun, and moon” 〔T32 451c11〕.
Three similes are each tied to one cause—seed-and-sprout continuity, transformed form, and earth, Snow Mountain, sea, sun, and moon—while the first cause has no simile. It is reproduced without supplying one.
Then comes the chapter’s third alternative account: “Further, another says: these do not have shared karma as cause; for material and mental dhammas, season is cause” 〔T32 451c12〕; “there is no shared karma” 〔T32 451c13〕.
This account speaks most directly: there is no shared karma. It is not a correction; it rejects in its entirety the fourth cause just established above.
The chapter has now presented three alternative accounts—two in 11-08 under the object approach, one defending the eye and one defending the ear, and this one here. The treatise decides none of the three.
Pause Here: Who Cites That Verse?
Immediately after the alternative comes: “there is no shared karma. As the Blessed One spoke in verse:” 〔T32 451c13〕
Karma is not shared with another; it is a store that another cannot steal,
The merit a person makes brings that person its wholesome result. 〔T32 451c14–451c15〕
The five-character formula “as the Blessed One spoke in verse” occurs only once in the entire treatise, and the verse line “karma is not shared with another” also occurs only once. But the treatise has already included other cited verses and verse texts; what is unique here is this introductory formula, not verse as a form.
And where does it fall? Immediately after the alternative, with no “further,” no “answer,” and no marker of any kind opening a new passage.
Pause and ask: who cites this verse?
If it belongs to the alternative account, then that other speaker cites the Blessed One’s words in support of the position—and the verse’s “karma is not shared with another” accords directly with the alternative’s “there is no shared karma.” If it belongs to the author of the treatise, then the author cites a verse after the alternative; perhaps it concludes the alternative, or perhaps it points elsewhere.
The treatise does not mark this.
Only three things can be verified: the verse immediately follows the alternative with no new introductory marker; its words accord with those of the alternative; and “as the Blessed One spoke in verse” occurs nowhere else in the treatise. These three points are still insufficient to identify the citer. This edition reproduces the passage without deciding.
Mutual Inclusion: Four Columns in Order, and Two Difficult Readings
The seventh approach is mutual inclusion, and it sets out four columns in order.
Aggregate column: “Contact, craving, grasping, and becoming are included in the aggregate of formations. Consciousness is included in the aggregate of consciousness. Name-and-form is included in four aggregates” 〔T32 451c18〕; the six bases belong to two aggregates, feeling to the aggregate of feeling, and “included in the aggregate and in the aggregate of formations” 〔T32 451c20〕—birth and aging-and-death belong jointly to the aggregates of form and formations.
The base and element columns have the same form with a different frame. Each contains one run-together expression: “aging-and-death is included in the dhamma base. Consciousness-mind is included in the base. Name-and-form is included in five internal bases” 〔T32 451c21〕; and “aging-and-death is included in the dhamma element. Consciousness-mind is included in the consciousness element. Name-and-form is included in five elements” 〔T32 451c23〕. The two source characters for “consciousness” and “mind” run together without a break. By the symmetry of what comes before and after, each place is one item—consciousness belongs to the mind base, and consciousness to the mind-consciousness element. The source wording is reproduced without adding punctuation.
The truth column has an even more difficult place: “included. The six bases are included in twelve truths. Ignorance, craving, and grasping are included in ten truths. The remaining” 〔T32 451c24〕; “nine are included in the truth of suffering” 〔T32 451c25〕.
The treatise establishes only four truths. Yet “twelve truths” and “ten truths” appear here; each phrase occurs only once in the entire treatise, and not one sentence explains either.
Only one verifiable point adds up: the three—ignorance, craving, and grasping—plus the “remaining nine” make twelve, matching the number of the twelve links. As for how the two phrases are to be read, this edition records the original wording without changing it or adding punctuation.
The final two items pick up what was planted at the passage’s beginning: “the nine are included in the truth of suffering. Supramundane conditionality and the path factor are included in the path truth. Conditionality” 〔T32 451c25〕; “cessation is included in the cessation truth” 〔T32 451c26〕. The passage began by establishing two kinds of conditionality. The mundane kind is analyzed and included throughout; only here does the supramundane kind receive its place.
The Method Closes, and So Does the Fascicle
The last sentence reads: “cessation is included in the cessation truth. Thus mutual inclusion can be known. Thus, through the approaches, the conditionality” 〔T32 451c26〕; “method can be known. This is called the method concerning conditionality (the method concerning conditionality is complete)” 〔T32 451c27〕.
The fourth gate has closed. Of the five occurrences of “is complete,” this is the fourth.
What follows immediately is “The Path of Freedom, Fascicle Ten”—this passage is the final passage of the fascicle. Of the five methods, one remains: the method concerning the noble truths, in the next fascicle.
Carry away three things: one observation—this passage uses “four kinds of mutual inclusion” 〔T32 451c16, sole occurrence in the treatise〕 rather than three; it also has “as the Blessed One spoke in verse” 〔T32 451c13, sole occurrence in the treatise〕 immediately following an alternative account, with no new introductory marker between them. One reading practice—place the subject under discussion beside the names listed in its inclusion approach: the first three passages each omit the category with the same name as their subject, whereas this passage lists all four; this is the visible wording across the four passages, and the treatise does not state why. One place to pause—the verse “karma is not shared with another” accords with the alternative’s “there is no shared karma”: who cites this verse? The treatise does not mark the citer; this edition reproduces the passage without deciding.
Remember three smaller points as well: supramundane conditionality has eleven items; ten repeat the same name on both sides of “depends on,” while only the last, “liberation depends on knowledge of cessation through liberation,” breaks the pattern; in the truth column of mutual inclusion, “twelve truths” and “ten truths” each occur only once in the entire treatise and are left unexplained, while the three of “ignorance, craving, and grasping” plus the nine of “the remaining nine” do make twelve; the chapter has three alternative accounts—two in 11-08 and one here—and the treatise decides none of them.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Mundane and Supramundane Conditions and Inclusion · Exposition · Summer 2026
四聖諦總說General Account of the Four Noble Truths
全文五層 →Full five layers →第五扇門開了——五方便的最後一個。卷第十已經關上四扇,這一扇要走四個單元。
先把所見說在前頭:這一段做了兩次數目功夫。一次嚴絲合縫:三十七菩提法配進八正道,逐項點名共二十九目,加八正分道之八,正得三十七。另一次卻留了缺口:標列十苦,到二種苦之分只收其八——老苦與苦苦落在分外。同一段之內,一處算得分毫不差,一處數目對不上。
十苦:一目一釋,一律以「義」收
苦聖諦的答文先列十苦:「答:生苦、老苦、死苦、憂苦、憂悲苦、惱苦、苦苦、怨」〔T32 452a09〕「憎會苦、愛別離苦、求不得苦,以略五受陰苦」〔T32 452a10〕。
然後逐一而釋,而每一釋都收在一個「義」字上:「生苦者,於眾生種類諸陰起,此一切苦集義」〔T32 452a11〕——一切苦集義;老是失力色諸根念慧義,死是作畏怖義,憂是內燒義,憂悲是內外燒義,苦苦是因苦身義,惱是因苦心義,怨憎會是作苦義,愛別離是作憂苦義,求不得是失樂義。
十釋,十個「義」字。(可核的很簡單:本段「義」字在這一節出現十次,一釋一次。)
而第十一釋破了格:「樂義。已略說五受陰苦者,不離五受陰苦,是」〔T32 452a20〕「故以略五受陰苦」〔T32 452a21〕——它不以「義」收,而是把話繞回來說一遍。
十個一律,末一破格。這種形本品已經見過幾次;照錄不代齊。
讀法:重新分類,就把新舊二列並排點名
十苦講完,論文立刻把同一批東西重分一次。
先分二種:「說,如是可知。於是二種苦,處苦、自性苦。於是」〔T32 452a23〕「生苦、死苦、怨憎會苦、愛別離苦、求不得苦,以」〔T32 452a24〕「略五受陰苦,此謂處苦。憂苦、憂悲苦、惱苦,」〔T32 452a25〕「此謂自性苦」〔T32 452a26〕。
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:凡遇重新分類,不要只讀新名,要把新舊二列並排點名——看誰沒被收進去。
照著點:處苦收生、死、怨憎會、愛別離、求不得,五個,加上「以略五受陰苦」;自性苦收憂、憂悲、惱,三個。五加三得八。
而標列是十個。老苦與苦苦,二種苦之分一個也沒收。
接著論文另立三種苦:「此謂自性苦。三種苦者,苦苦、壞苦、行苦。於是」〔T32 452a26〕「身苦心苦,是謂苦苦。有漏樂受彼處壞,是謂」〔T32 452a27〕「壞苦。五受陰行苦,此謂苦聖諦」〔T32 452a28〕。
這一組把苦苦接住了——可是它的取名之準與二種苦不同:二種苦是從十苦裡挑名,三種苦是另立三個新名(苦苦是身心之苦,壞苦是有漏樂受之壞,行苦是五受陰)。兩張分類表不在同一個座標上。
至於老苦,二分三分都沒有它。
可核的只有這幾件:標列十苦;處苦五、自性苦三,合八;三種苦別立三名;老苦不見於任何一組。本編照錄不代補,也不由此推論論主之意。
並排點名這一步不做,讀者會以為二種苦與三種苦是把十苦分完了。其實沒有。
集諦:先立三句,再逐句解,末以遮遣收
集諦一節的體例值得先認一下,不然容易讀成一團。
答文起手是三個短句:「聖諦?答:愛令復生,與欲共起,處處起如是欲」〔T32 452a29〕「愛、有愛、不有愛」〔T32 452b01〕——愛令復生、與欲共起、處處起,然後才列三愛之名。
隨後論文逐句回頭解。解第一句:「愛、有愛、不有愛。此愛令復生者,有愛多成令」〔T32 452b01〕「有生愛」〔T32 452b02〕。解第二句:「起者,唯愛令歡喜名起,令染名染」——見〔T32 452b03〕。先立句,後逐句解,與苦諦十苦之「先列名、後逐釋」是同一個手法,只是所列的不是名目而是短句。
中間還插了一句別的:「有生愛。苦集者,唯愛不共,故說苦集」〔T32 452b02〕——苦集之所以叫苦集,是因為唯有愛而不與他共。這一句不在三短句之列,是論文順手回答「為什麼這一諦以愛為體」。
而三愛的界說,末了用的是一句遮遣:「色,是處歡喜。如是欲愛、有愛、非有愛,除有愛」〔T32 452b05〕「及不有愛,餘愛是欲愛」〔T32 452b06〕——除掉有愛與不有愛,剩下的愛就是欲愛。
這一手讀者應該眼熟。行陰之界說是「除受想一切心數法」,意識界是「除此六識,餘心」,十八界那邊是「除法界六識界,餘心意識界」。本品此前幾處都以遮遣界定較寬的一目:不正面列盡,只說除掉別的,剩下的就是。到欲愛這裡又用了一次。
而其餘兩目則正面說:有愛與常見共起,非有愛與斷見共起。三目之中二目正立、一目遮遣——照錄不代齊。
三愛:同一個目,兩個寫法
苦集聖諦一節短,而有一處字面該記。
三愛第一次出現作「愛、有愛、不有愛」〔T32 452b01〕,第二次作「色,是處歡喜。如是欲愛、有愛、非有愛,除有愛」〔T32 452b05〕,第三次又作「及不有愛,餘愛是欲愛。有愛者,與常見共起」〔T32 452b06〕,第四次作「非有愛者,與斷見共起。此謂苦集聖諦。問:云」〔T32 452b07〕。
「不有愛」二見、「非有愛」二見,四見都在這一節,交替而出。同一個目,兩個寫法。照錄不代齊。
停一下:論文為什麼在這裡反對自己
苦滅聖諦的答文只有一句:「處,此謂苦滅聖諦」〔T32 452b09〕之前那一串——唯愛滅無餘、捨、遠離、解脫、無處。
答完,緊接著就是:「處,此謂苦滅聖諦。問:不然。此亦集滅,何故」〔T32 452b09〕「世尊說苦因滅?」〔T32 452b10〕
「問:不然。」——不是「問:云何」,是先說「不對」。這既然是愛滅,那就是集滅;世尊為什麼說苦因滅?
(「不然」二字全論只出現三次,這是其中一次。本論的設問幾乎一律是「問:云何」或「問:何故」,以「不然」起手的難,是罕見的形。)
而答文更值得看:「世尊說苦因滅?答:苦因滅故成不生滅,應」〔T32 452b10〕「作證義,是故集滅,世尊說苦滅」〔T32 452b11〕。
論文沒有收回前說。它承認這確是集滅——末句就明說「是故集滅」——只是苦因滅了才成不生滅,那是應作證的義,所以世尊從苦這一邊說。
停下來問一句:為什麼要在這裡立這一難?
本段答不了。可核的只有三件:難以「不然」起;難所針對的是自己剛出的答;答文不改前說而只出其所以。
而這一難擺的位置是耐人尋味的——四諦之中,唯獨苦滅諦之後立一難。前面苦諦、集諦講得那麼長,一句反對也沒有;到滅諦這句最短的答文之後,論文自己站出來說「不對」。本編只記這個分布,不代論文另立說。
三十七:這一次一個不差
道諦分兩層講。
第一層是八正分道各出其法數:「諦智。正思惟者,是三善思惟。正語者,離四惡」〔T32 452b14〕行——正見是四諦智,正思惟是三善思惟,正語是離四惡行,正業是離三惡行,正命是離邪命,正精進是四正勤,正念是四念處,正定是四禪。
第二層換一個座標,全部繫到泥洹上:「禪。復次若修行聖道,於泥洹知見此謂正」〔T32 452b17〕「見,唯於泥洹覺是正思惟,彼斷邪語是正語,」〔T32 452b18〕——在泥洹上知見是正見,在泥洹上覺是正思惟,在泥洹上念是正念,在泥洹上專心是正定;而語、業、命、精進四者則作「斷邪」。
八目,兩副眼睛。與前面十苦之二度重分是同一種手法:不添新名,換座標再看一遍。
然後是最後一段,也是這一段最值得核的一段:「正定。於是慧根、慧力、慧如意足、擇法覺分,」〔T32 452b21〕「成入內正見」〔T32 452b22〕——慧一類的四目歸正見;精進一類的「精進根、精進力、精進如意足、欲」〔T32 452b22〕「如意足、精進覺分、四正勤」〔T32 452b23〕歸正精進;念一類的「根、念力、念覺分、四念處」〔T32 452b24〕歸正念;定一類的「力、心如意足、信根、信力、定覺分、喜覺分、猗」〔T32 452b25〕「覺分、捨覺分」〔T32 452b26〕歸正定。
末句:「覺分、捨覺分,成入內正定。如是三十七菩提」〔T32 452b26〕「法,成入八正道內」〔T32 452b27〕。
現在數。正見組四目。精進組五個單名加「四正勤」之四,得九。正念組三個單名加「四念處」之四,得七。正定組九目。四組合計二十九。
再加八正分道自身之八——正得三十七。
一個不多,一個不少。
(「三十七菩提法」六字全論只出現這一次。)
把它和本段前半那一處放在一起看,對照就很清楚了:同一段裡,論文一處把數配得分毫不差,一處把十個分成八個而不作交代。可核的是這個落差本身。本編不由此推論何者為疏、何者為密——只把「哪裡合、哪裡不合」如實記下,讓讀者知道這部論的數目不是處處可以照單全收的。
帶走三件:一個所見——同一段兩次數目功夫,一處分毫不差(三十七菩提法:四組二十九目+八正分道之八〔T32 452b21–452b27〕),一處留了缺口(標列十苦而二種苦之分只收其八,老苦與苦苦不在其列〔T32 452a23–452a26〕)。一個讀法——凡遇重新分類,把新舊二列並排點名,看誰沒被收進去:這一步不做,就會以為二種苦與三種苦已把十苦分完。一處停問——「問:不然」〔T32 452b09〕:四諦之中唯獨苦滅諦之後立一難,而答文不改前說、只出其所以。為什麼在這裡反對自己? 本編只記其分布,不代論文立說。
還有兩件小事該記著:十苦之釋一律以「義」字收(十見),唯第十一釋破格;三愛之第三目「不有愛」與「非有愛」二形交出,四見皆在本節。
The fifth door opens—the last of the five means. Fascicle ten has already closed four doors; this one will take four units to pass through.
Here is the central observation: this passage performs two acts of counting. One fits with complete exactness: the thirty-seven awakening dhammas are assigned to the eightfold path, with twenty-nine items named one by one, plus the eight factors of the path itself, yielding exactly thirty-seven. The other leaves a gap: ten sufferings are listed, yet the twofold division of suffering gathers only eight—aging and pain-as-pain fall outside the division. Within the same passage, one count is exact to the last detail, while the other does not add up.
Ten Sufferings: One Explanation Each, All Closing with “Meaning”
The answer on the noble truth of suffering first lists ten sufferings: “Answer: birth, aging, death, grief, lamenting grief, distress, pain-as-pain, meeting” 〔T32 452a09〕 “the hated, separation from the loved, not obtaining what is sought, summarized as the suffering of the five appropriated aggregates” 〔T32 452a10〕.
It then explains them one by one, and every explanation closes on the single word “meaning”: “As for birth, aggregates arise among the classes of beings; this is the meaning of the gathering of all suffering” 〔T32 452a11〕—aging is the meaning of losing strength, complexion, the faculties, mindfulness, and understanding; death is the meaning of producing fear; grief is the meaning of inner burning; lamenting grief is the meaning of inner and outer burning; pain-as-pain is the meaning of a suffering body; distress is the meaning of a suffering mind; meeting the hated is the meaning of producing pain; separation from the loved is the meaning of producing grief and pain; and not obtaining what is sought is the meaning of losing pleasure.
Ten explanations, ten instances of “meaning.” (The check is simple: the character 義 appears ten times in this section, once in each explanation.)
The eleventh explanation then breaks the pattern: “the meaning of pleasure. ‘The suffering of the five appropriated aggregates has been stated in summary’ means that these sufferings do not leave the suffering of the five appropriated aggregates; this” 〔T32 452a20〕 “is why the suffering of the five appropriated aggregates was stated in summary” 〔T32 452a21〕—it does not close with “meaning,” but circles back and states the point once more.
Ten follow one pattern; the last breaks it. This form has already appeared several times in this chapter; this edition records it without making it uniform.
Reading Practice: Name the Old and New Lists Side by Side When Reclassifying
Once the ten sufferings have been explained, the treatise immediately reclassifies the same material.
First comes a twofold division: “As explained, so it may be understood. Here there are two kinds of suffering: suffering of situation and suffering by intrinsic nature. Here” 〔T32 452a23〕 “birth, death, meeting the hated, separation from the loved, and not obtaining what is sought, together with” 〔T32 452a24〕 “the summary of the suffering of the five appropriated aggregates, are called suffering of situation. Grief, lamenting grief, and distress” 〔T32 452a25〕 “are called suffering by intrinsic nature” 〔T32 452a26〕.
The reading practice offered by this passage lies here: whenever you meet a reclassification, do not read only the new names. Name the old and new lists side by side and see who has not been taken in.
Count them off. Suffering of situation gathers birth, death, meeting the hated, separation from the loved, and not obtaining what is sought—five—plus the phrase “summarized as the suffering of the five appropriated aggregates.” Suffering by intrinsic nature gathers grief, lamenting grief, and distress—three. Five plus three makes eight.
But ten were listed. Neither aging nor pain-as-pain is included anywhere in the twofold division.
The treatise then separately establishes three kinds of suffering: “This is called suffering by intrinsic nature. The three kinds of suffering are pain-as-pain, suffering through change, and suffering through formations. Here” 〔T32 452a26〕 “bodily and mental pain are called pain-as-pain. When tainted pleasant feeling breaks up there, this is called” 〔T32 452a27〕 “suffering through change. The five appropriated aggregates are suffering through formations. This is called the noble truth of suffering” 〔T32 452a28〕.
This group takes up pain-as-pain, but its naming criterion differs from that of the twofold division. The twofold division selects names from the ten sufferings; the threefold division establishes three new names—pain-as-pain is bodily and mental pain, suffering through change is the breaking up of tainted pleasant feeling, and suffering through formations is the five appropriated aggregates. The two classificatory tables do not use the same coordinate.
As for aging, neither the twofold nor the threefold division includes it.
Only these points can be verified: ten sufferings are listed; suffering of situation has five and suffering by intrinsic nature three, totaling eight; the threefold division separately establishes three names; aging appears in none of the groups. This edition records the text without supplying what is absent and draws no inference from it about the treatise author’s intention.
Without this side-by-side naming, a reader will think that the twofold and threefold divisions exhaust the ten sufferings. They do not.
Arising: Three Statements First, Then Each Explained, Ending with Exclusion
It is worth recognizing the form of the section on arising before reading it, or its parts can easily blur together.
The answer opens with three short clauses: “Noble truth? Answer: craving causes renewed birth, arises together with desire, and arises here and there; such sensual” 〔T32 452a29〕 “craving, craving for becoming, and craving for not-becoming” 〔T32 452b01〕—craving causes renewed birth, arises together with desire, and arises here and there; only then are the three cravings named.
The treatise then returns to explain each clause. It explains the first: “Craving, craving for becoming, and craving for not-becoming. ‘This craving causes renewed birth’ means that abundant craving for becoming produces” 〔T32 452b01〕 “craving for birth in becoming” 〔T32 452b02〕. It explains the second: “‘Arises’ means that craving alone causes delight, called arising, and causes defilement, called defilement”—see 〔T32 452b03〕. It first states the clauses, then explains them one by one. This is the same method used for the ten sufferings under the truth of suffering, except that what is first listed here consists of short statements rather than names.
Another sentence is inserted between them: “craving for birth in becoming. As for the arising of suffering, craving alone, without a companion, is why it is called the arising of suffering” 〔T32 452b02〕—the arising of suffering is called the arising of suffering because craving alone is involved, not something shared with another. This sentence is not among the three short clauses; the treatise answers in passing why this truth takes craving as its essence.
The definitions of the three cravings end with a statement by exclusion: “form is delighted in there. Thus sensual craving, craving for becoming, and craving for non-becoming: excluding craving for becoming” 〔T32 452b05〕 “and craving for not-becoming, the remaining craving is sensual craving” 〔T32 452b06〕—remove craving for becoming and craving for not-becoming, and the craving that remains is sensual craving.
This move should already be familiar. The formations aggregate is defined as “all mental factors apart from feeling and perception”; the mind-consciousness element as “mind remaining apart from these six consciousnesses”; and, in the eighteen elements, “apart from the dharma element and the six consciousness elements, the remaining mind is the mind-consciousness element.” Earlier in this chapter, several broader items are defined by exclusion: instead of positively listing everything, the text says to remove the others and take what remains. It does so again here with sensual craving.
The other two are stated positively: craving for becoming arises together with an eternalist view, and craving for non-becoming arises together with an annihilationist view. Among the three, two are stated positively and one by exclusion—recorded without making them uniform.
Three Cravings: One Item, Two Written Forms
The section on the noble truth of arising is short, but one feature of its wording should be recorded.
The three cravings first appear as “craving, craving for becoming, and craving for not-becoming” 〔T32 452b01〕. The second occurrence reads “form is delighted in there. Thus sensual craving, craving for becoming, and craving for non-becoming: excluding craving for becoming” 〔T32 452b05〕. The third reads “and craving for not-becoming, the remaining craving is sensual craving. Craving for becoming arises together with an eternalist view” 〔T32 452b06〕. The fourth reads “Craving for non-becoming arises together with an annihilationist view. This is called the noble truth of the arising of suffering. Question: How” 〔T32 452b07〕.
“Craving for not-becoming” occurs twice, and “craving for non-becoming” occurs twice; all four occurrences lie in this section and alternate with one another. One item has two written forms. This edition records them without making them uniform.
Pause: Why Does the Treatise Object to Itself Here?
The answer on the noble truth of cessation consists of only one sentence—the string ending just before “locus; this is called the noble truth of the cessation of suffering” 〔T32 452b09〕: craving alone ceases without remainder, is relinquished, distanced, liberated, and has no locus.
Once the answer ends, this follows immediately: “locus; this is called the noble truth of the cessation of suffering. Question: No. This too is cessation of arising; why” 〔T32 452b09〕 “does the Blessed One speak of cessation of the cause of suffering?” 〔T32 452b10〕
“Question: No.” It does not say “Question: How?” but first declares, “No.” Since this is the cessation of craving, it is the cessation of arising; why does the Blessed One speak of the cessation of suffering’s cause?
(“No” appears only three times in the entire treatise, and this is one of them. Questions in this treatise almost always begin “Question: How?” or “Question: Why?”; an objection that opens with “No” is rare in form.)
The answer is even more worth examining: “does the Blessed One speak of cessation of the cause of suffering? Answer: because the cause of suffering ceases, non-arising cessation is accomplished; it is what should” 〔T32 452b10〕 “be realized. Therefore, though it is cessation of arising, the Blessed One speaks of cessation of suffering” 〔T32 452b11〕.
The treatise does not withdraw what it said before. It acknowledges that this truly is cessation of arising—the final clause expressly says “therefore, cessation of arising.” It says only that when the cause of suffering ceases, non-arising cessation is accomplished; this is what should be realized, and so the Blessed One speaks from the side of suffering.
Pause and ask: why does the treatise establish this objection here?
This passage cannot answer. Only three things can be verified: the objection begins with “No”; it is directed at the answer the treatise has just given; and the reply does not alter that answer but explains its reason.
The placement of this objection is striking. Among the four truths, only the noble truth of cessation is followed by an objection. The preceding accounts of suffering and arising are so long, yet not one objection appears; after this shortest answer on cessation, the treatise itself steps forward and says “No.” This edition records only that distribution and does not formulate another position on the treatise’s behalf.
Thirty-Seven: This Time Not One Is Missing
The truth of the path is explained on two levels.
The first level gives each of the eight factors its corresponding count: “knowledge of the truths. Right intention is the three wholesome intentions. Right speech is abstention from the four bad” 〔T32 452b14〕 actions—right view is knowledge of the four truths, right intention is the three wholesome intentions, right speech is abstention from four bad actions, right action is abstention from three bad actions, right livelihood is abstention from wrong livelihood, right effort is the four right strivings, right mindfulness is the four establishments of mindfulness, and right concentration is the four meditations.
The second level shifts coordinates and ties everything to Nibbāna: “meditations. Again, if one cultivates the noble path, knowledge-and-vision of Nibbāna is called right” 〔T32 452b17〕 “view; awakening only to Nibbāna is right intention; abandoning wrong speech is right speech,” 〔T32 452b18〕—knowledge-and-vision of Nibbāna is right view, awakening to Nibbāna is right intention, mindfulness of Nibbāna is right mindfulness, and one-pointedness upon Nibbāna is right concentration; speech, action, livelihood, and effort are each expressed as “abandoning the wrong.”
Eight items, two pairs of eyes. As with the earlier reclassification of the ten sufferings, no new names are added; the coordinate changes, and the same list is viewed again.
Then comes the final paragraph, the one in this passage most worth checking: “Right concentration. Here the faculty of wisdom, power of wisdom, wisdom basis of success, and investigation-of-dhammas awakening factor” 〔T32 452b21〕 “come within right view” 〔T32 452b22〕—the four wisdom items enter right view; the energy class—“faculty of energy, power of energy, energy basis of success, desire” 〔T32 452b22〕 “basis of success, energy awakening factor, and four right strivings” 〔T32 452b23〕—enters right effort; the mindfulness class—its “faculty, power of mindfulness, mindfulness awakening factor, and four establishments of mindfulness” 〔T32 452b24〕—enters right mindfulness; and the concentration class—its “power, mind basis of success, faculty of confidence, power of confidence, concentration awakening factor, joy awakening factor, repose” 〔T32 452b25〕 “awakening factor, and equanimity awakening factor” 〔T32 452b26〕—enters right concentration.
The final sentence reads: “Thus these thirty-seven awakening” 〔T32 452b26〕 “dhammas enter within the eightfold path” 〔T32 452b27〕.
Now count. The right-view group has four items. The energy group has five individually named items plus the four right strivings as four, making nine. The mindfulness group has three individually named items plus the four establishments of mindfulness as four, making seven. The concentration group has nine items. The four groups total twenty-nine.
Add the eight factors of the eightfold path itself—exactly thirty-seven.
Not one more, not one less.
(“Thirty-seven awakening dhammas” occurs only once in the entire treatise.)
Set this beside the count in the first half of the passage, and the contrast becomes plain: within the same passage, the treatise makes one count exact to the last detail and elsewhere divides ten into eight without explanation. The verifiable fact is the contrast itself. This edition does not infer from it which passage is sparse or which is exacting; it simply records where the numbers agree and where they do not, so readers know that the treatise’s numbers cannot everywhere be accepted without counting them.
Take away three things. One observation—the same passage performs two acts of counting: one is exact to the last detail—the thirty-seven awakening dhammas consist of twenty-nine items in four groups plus the eight factors of the eightfold path 〔T32 452b21–452b27〕—while the other leaves a gap—ten sufferings are listed, but the twofold division gathers only eight, leaving aging and pain-as-pain outside it 〔T32 452a23–452a26〕. One reading practice—whenever you meet a reclassification, name the old and new lists side by side and see who has not been taken in. Without this step, one will think that the twofold and threefold divisions have exhausted the ten sufferings. One place to pause—“Question: No” 〔T32 452b09〕: among the four truths, only the noble truth of cessation is followed by an objection, and the reply does not alter what came before but explains its reason. Why does the treatise object to itself here? This edition records only the distribution and does not formulate a position on the treatise’s behalf.
Two smaller details should also be remembered: the explanations of the ten sufferings all close with the character “meaning”—ten occurrences—while the eleventh explanation breaks the pattern; and the third of the three cravings appears in the two forms “craving for not-becoming” and “craving for non-becoming,” with all four occurrences in this section.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · General Account of the Four Noble Truths · Exposition · Summer 2026
四諦所以與前四門Why Four Truths and the First Four Approaches
全文五層 →Full five layers →先把所見說在前頭:這一段一起手就問:「何故說四聖諦,不三不五?」本論此前已有「何故十不淨不多不少」〔T32 426b10–426b11〕,所以這不是全論唯一一次為數目設問;本段可核的特點,是明以三、五夾問四諦之數,並連出兩個理由。
而更值得看的是它怎麼答:不是訴諸權威,是給了兩個彼此獨立的理由。
兩個理由
第一個理由在果因上:「疑。為世間出世間果因故成四。問:云何?世」〔T32 452b29〕「諦果苦,集世諦因,果滅,出世諦果。道,出世諦」〔T32 452c01〕「因。是故四,不三不五」〔T32 452c02〕。
苦是世諦的果,集是世諦的因;滅是出世諦的果,道是出世諦的因。二諦各出一果一因,二乘二正得四。
第二個理由在行上:「因。是故四,不三不五。復次應知、應斷、應證、應」〔T32 452c02〕「修,以四句故成四」〔T32 452c03〕。
應知、應斷、應證、應修——四種該做的事,所以是四。
一個從結構說(果因交叉),一個從工夫說(四種所應)。兩個理由都不引經、不稱佛說,就在四諦自身的形上立。本編照文說到此為止,不代論文另立說。
(順帶記著一處字面:這裡作「應知、應斷、應證、應修」;而三個單元之後的種種門作「苦諦可知,集諦可斷,滅諦可證,道諦應修」〔T32 453b05–453b06〕——前三個字換成了「可」,末一個仍是「應」。同一組四行,二處字面不齊。照錄不代齊。)
總標:第三種寫法,與一處要靠後文還原的斷句
理由給完,論文出總標:「修,以四句故成四。此四聖諦,以十一行可勝」〔T32 452c03〕「可知」〔T32 452c04〕。
十一行。這個數是本品最大的一個——陰四行、入五行、界闕、因緣七行,到聖諦是十一。
而這個總標的措辭又換了一次。陰、入二處作「所勝可知」,因緣處作「以七行可知」,這裡作「可勝可知」。同一個式子,三種寫法(「可勝可知」四字全論只出現這一次〔T32 452c03–04〕)。照錄不代齊。
十一個名接著列:「可知。如是以句義、以相、以次第、以略、以譬喻、」〔T32 452c04〕「以分別、以數、以一、以種種、以次第,廣以相攝」〔T32 452c05〕。
照字面數一數:句義、相、次第、略、譬喻、分別、數、一、種種、次第、廣以相攝——「次第」出現了兩次,而末一項作「廣以相攝」,看去像一個名。
還原的憑據在後文。三個單元之後,論文自己設問:「云何以次第廣」〔T32 453b07〕。「次第廣」是一個門的名字。
所以這一句的斷句該是:以次第廣、以相攝。如此則十一行為句義、相、次第、略、譬喻、分別、數、一、種種、次第廣、相攝——正得十一,與自報之數相合。
本品這一路,靠後文還原斷句的地方已經出現多次;這一處與 11-16 之前那些一樣,憑據不在字面,在論文自己後來怎麼設問。照原字錄,不代改斷句。
讀法:「復次」是換一副尺的記號
本段兩個「復次」都不是單添一點,而是轉換觀察的尺度:在這一段,可把「復次」讀作「換一副尺再量一遍」。
本段「復次」兩見,兩次都是這個用法。
第一次在四之所以:果因那一副尺量完,「復次」一來,換成應知應斷應證應修那一副再量一遍,得數仍是四〔T32 452c02〕。
第二次在相門。前一輪一諦一相:「以相?答:苦者過患相,集者因相,滅者不生」〔T32 452c10〕「相,道者方便相」〔T32 452c11〕——四相。「復次」一來,換成一諦四相:「復次苦者逼惱相、憂相、有為」〔T32 452c11〕「相、有邊相,集者聚相、因緣相、和合相、著相,滅」〔T32 452c12〕「者出離相、寂寂相、無為相、醍醐相,道者乘相、」〔T32 452c13〕「令到相、見相、依相」〔T32 452c14〕——十六相。
前輪四、後輪十六,合二十相。兩輪不是一粗一細的重複,是兩種粒度:第一輪給的是一諦一個總相,第二輪給的是一諦四個面。
上一個單元的道諦也是這樣(八正分先出法數、再繫泥洹),十苦也是這樣(先二種、再三種)。認出「復次」這個記號,本論的層次就自己分開了。
句義門:問四而答六
句義門有一處該數。
問的是四諦的句義,而答文起手先解了兩個不在四諦之列的名:「問:云何以句義?答:聖諦者,聖人所說名聖」〔T32 452c06〕「諦,通達彼故成聖諦。諦者,如是義、不異義、自」〔T32 452c07〕「相不異義」〔T32 452c08〕——先解「聖諦」,再解「諦」,然後才是苦、集、滅、道四目。
四目而出六。
這已經是本品第三次了:五陰的句義門多出一個「陰者種類集義」〔T32 448b28〕;十二入的句義門末了給「入」字三個義〔T32 449a12〕;這裡是先出「聖諦」與「諦」兩個總名。
三處手法相同而位置各異:一處殿後,一處殿後而量加倍,一處居前。可核的只有這個分布本身,本編照錄不代刪、不代說明。
醫的四件事
次第門的後半是一個譬,而它的體例值得看:「便為實滅,第四說道。如明了醫,初見病源,」〔T32 452c17〕「後問病緣,為滅病故,如病說藥」〔T32 452c18〕。
明了的醫做四件事:先見病源,再問病緣,為了滅病,照病說藥。
然後逐一對回去:「如是病,如苦」〔T32 452c18〕「可知。如是病因緣,如集可知。如是病盡,如脫」〔T32 452c19〕「滅可知。如是藥,如道可知」〔T32 452c20〕。
四事四配,一項不缺。這個譬的做法與本品前面兩個大譬同體:11-09 的王與菴羅果十一配,11-11 的穀種十環十配——譬不作一次總比,作逐項分比。(「明了醫」三字全論只出現這一次。)
停一下:這四道門,是打開還是關上
略門三組,每組四目,逐組逐目相對。
第一組:生是苦,令生是集,苦止是滅,令止是道。第二組:煩惱處是苦,煩惱是集,斷煩惱是滅,斷的方便是道。
第三組換了個講法:「是滅,斷方便是道。苦能起開身見門,集能」〔T32 452c23〕「起開斷見門,滅能起開常見門,道能起開」〔T32 452c24〕邪見門。
苦能起開身見門,集能起開斷見門,滅能起開常見門,道能起開邪見門。
而校記正落在這個「開」字上:宋、元、明、宮四本作「關」。
停下來問一句:這四道門,是打開還是關上?
二讀所指恰恰相反。從底本,四諦各能「開」一道見門;從四本,各能「關」一道見門。而「能起開」這三個字在本段出現四次,異讀所改及於四處——不是一處小異,是整整一組的讀法翻面。
可核的只有兩件:底本作開、四本作關;四處一致。至於哪一讀更合本論之意,本段自身不足以判——上下文既沒有再解釋這四道門,也沒有別處用過同樣的句式。
本編照錄不代判,本文從底本。而這正是「並錄不判」最該用的一種場合:不是兩讀差別小到可以不管,是差別大到不能替論文選。
帶走三件:一個所見——本段明問「何故說四聖諦,不三不五?」〔T32 452b28〕,答以二理(果因交叉故成四·四種所應故成四),二理皆就四諦自身之形而立,不引經、不稱佛說;本論此前已有「何故十不淨不多不少」〔T32 426b10–426b11〕,故不稱全論唯一。一個讀法——本段兩個「復次」都換一副尺:一換量「四」之尺(果因→四句),一換量「相」之尺(四相→十六相)。一處停問——略門第三組之「開」,四本作「關」〔T32 452c23〕,二讀所指恰恰相反(開此四見門/關此四見門),且異讀及於四處:這四道門是打開還是關上? 本編照錄不代判。
還有三件小事該記著:總標作「可勝可知」〔T32 452c03–04〕,為本品總標式之第三形(餘二為「所勝可知」與「以七行可知」);十一行之末二名為斷句所離,其還原之憑據在後文之設問「云何以次第廣」〔T32 453b07〕;句義門問四而答六(先出聖諦、諦二總名),為本品同一手法之第三見。
Let the central observation be stated first: this passage opens by asking, “Why are four noble truths taught, not three and not five?” Earlier in the treatise there is already the question “Why are there ten forms of foulness, neither more nor fewer?” 〔T32 426b10–426b11〕, so this is not the treatise’s only instance of asking why a number is what it is. What can be verified as distinctive here is that it explicitly sets three and five on either side of the number of the four truths, then gives two reasons in succession.
Still more worth seeing is how it answers: it does not appeal to authority, but gives two reasons independent of each other.
Two Reasons
The first reason is stated in terms of result and cause: “Doubts. Because the worldly and supramundane comprise result and cause, they are four. Question: How so? The worldly” 〔T32 452b29〕 “truth has suffering as its result, and arising is the cause of the worldly truth. Cessation is the result, the result of the supramundane truth. The path is the supramundane” 〔T32 452c01〕 “cause. Therefore there are four, not three or five” 〔T32 452c02〕.
Suffering is the result of the worldly truth and arising its cause; cessation is the result of the supramundane truth and path its cause. Each of the two truths supplies one result and one cause; two times two gives exactly four.
The second reason is stated in terms of practice: “cause. Therefore there are four, not three or five. Again, they are to be known, to be abandoned, to be realized, and to be” 〔T32 452c02〕 “cultivated; because there are four statements, they are four” 〔T32 452c03〕.
To be known, to be abandoned, to be realized, to be cultivated—four things that ought to be done, and so there are four.
One reason speaks from structure, crossing result with cause; the other speaks from practice, through the four things to be done. Neither cites scripture or says that the Buddha taught it. Each is established from the configuration of the four truths themselves. This edition says only what the text says here and does not establish another explanation on the treatise’s behalf.
(Keep in mind in passing one point of wording: here it reads “to be known, to be abandoned, to be realized, to be cultivated”; three units later, the approach of diversity reads “the truth of suffering can be known, the truth of arising can be abandoned, the truth of cessation can be realized, and the truth of the path should be cultivated” 〔T32 453b05–453b06〕—the first three auxiliaries change to “can,” while the last remains “should.” The wording of the same four practices is not uniform in the two places. They are recorded as they stand and are not made uniform.)
Master Heading: A Third Formula and Punctuation Restored by a Later Question
Once the reasons have been given, the treatise states the master heading: “cultivated; because there are four statements, they are four. These four noble truths, through eleven approaches, may be mastered” 〔T32 452c03〕 “and known” 〔T32 452c04〕.
Eleven approaches. This is the largest number in the chapter—the aggregates have four approaches, the sense bases five, no number is supplied for the elements, conditionality has seven, and the noble truths have eleven.
The wording of this master heading changes once again. For the aggregates and sense bases it reads “what may be mastered may be known”; for conditionality it reads “may be known through seven approaches”; here it reads “may be mastered and known.” One formula, three wordings (the four-character source expression rendered “may be mastered and known” occurs only once in the entire treatise 〔T32 452c03–04〕). They are recorded as they stand and are not made uniform.
The eleven names are then listed: “and known. Thus by phrase-meaning, by character, by sequence, by summary, by simile,” 〔T32 452c04〕 “by analysis, by number, by unity, by diversity, by sequence, extensively through mutual inclusion” 〔T32 452c05〕.
Count the wording as it stands: phrase-meaning, character, sequence, summary, simile, analysis, number, unity, diversity, sequence, extensively through mutual inclusion—“sequence” appears twice, while the final item reads “extensively through mutual inclusion,” which looks like a single name.
The basis for restoring the division lies later in the text. Three units later, the treatise itself asks: “How by extended sequence?” 〔T32 453b07〕. “Extended sequence” is the name of one approach.
The sentence should therefore be divided: by extended sequence; by mutual inclusion. The eleven approaches are then phrase-meaning, character, sequence, summary, simile, analysis, number, unity, diversity, extended sequence, and mutual inclusion—exactly eleven, agreeing with the number the treatise itself reports.
This way of recovering punctuation from what comes later has already appeared several times along the course of this chapter. Here, as at those earlier places before 11-16, the evidence is not in the wording itself, but in the question the treatise later asks. The original wording is recorded as it stands; this edition does not repunctuate it on the treatise’s behalf.
Reading Practice: “Again” Signals a New Measuring Rule
The two occurrences of “again” in this passage do not merely add one more point. Each changes the scale of observation: in this passage, read “again” as “take up a different ruler and measure once more.”
“Again” occurs twice in this passage, and both times it works in this way.
The first comes in the explanation of why there are four. Once the ruler of result and cause has finished measuring, “again” brings in another ruler, that of what is to be known, abandoned, realized, and cultivated; the number still comes to four 〔T32 452c02〕.
The second comes in the approach of character. The first round gives one character to each truth: “How by character? Answer: suffering has the character of danger, arising the character of cause, and cessation non-arising” 〔T32 452c10〕 “as its character; path has method as its character” 〔T32 452c11〕—four characters. When “again” appears, the ruler changes to four characters for each truth: “Again, suffering has the characters of oppression, grief, and conditionedness” 〔T32 452c11〕 “and boundedness; arising has the characters of gathering, condition, conjunction, and attachment; cessation” 〔T32 452c12〕 “has the characters of release, profound peace, unconditionedness, and ghee; path has the characters of a vehicle,” 〔T32 452c13〕 “bringing-to, seeing, and support” 〔T32 452c14〕—sixteen characters.
The first round has four and the second sixteen, making twenty characters altogether. The two rounds are not the same account repeated once broadly and once in detail; they use two different scales: the first gives one general character for each truth, while the second gives four aspects of each.
The path truth in the preceding unit works in the same way—the factors of the eightfold path are first set out as numbered practices, then linked to Nibbāna—and so do the ten forms of suffering, first as two kinds and then as three. Once we recognize “again” as this signal, the treatise’s layers separate themselves.
Phrase-Meaning: Four Asked, Six Answered
There is one count to make in the approach of phrase-meaning.
The question asks for the phrase-meaning of the four truths, but the answer begins by explaining two names that are not among the four truths: “Question: How by phrase-meaning? Answer: ‘Noble truth’—what noble persons speak is called a noble” 〔T32 452c06〕 “truth; through penetrating it one becomes noble, and so it is a noble truth. ‘Truth’ means the meaning of thusness, the meaning of non-difference, and the non-difference of its own” 〔T32 452c07〕 “character” 〔T32 452c08〕—first “noble truth,” then “truth,” and only then the four items suffering, arising, cessation, and path.
Four items are asked for; six are given.
This is already the third time in this chapter: the phrase-meaning approach for the five aggregates adds “aggregate means the meaning of a collection of kinds” 〔T32 448b28〕; the phrase-meaning approach for the twelve sense bases ends by giving three meanings of the word “base” 〔T32 449a12〕; here the two collective names “noble truth” and “truth” come first.
The same method appears in three places, but in a different position each time: in one it comes at the end; in another it comes at the end with twice the quantity; in one it comes at the beginning. Only this distribution itself can be verified. This edition records it without deleting anything or supplying an explanation.
Four Acts of the Physician
The latter half of the sequence approach is a simile, and the way it is built deserves attention: “This method brings true cessation, and the path is taught fourth. Like a discerning physician, he first sees the source of the disease” 〔T32 452c17〕 “and afterward asks the condition of the disease, then, in order to end the disease, prescribes medicine according to the disease” 〔T32 452c18〕.
The discerning physician does four things: first he sees the source of the disease, then asks its condition, seeks to end the disease, and prescribes medicine according to the disease.
It then matches them back one by one: “Thus disease is like suffering” 〔T32 452c18〕 “and should be known as such. Thus the condition of disease is like arising and should be known as such. Thus the exhaustion of disease is like release” 〔T32 452c19〕 “and cessation and should be known as such. Thus medicine is like the path and should be known as such” 〔T32 452c20〕.
Four acts, four correspondences, not one omitted. This simile is built in the same way as the two major similes earlier in the chapter: the king and mango in 11-09 has eleven correspondences, and the grain seed in 11-11 has ten links and ten correspondences—the simile is not a single overall comparison; each item is compared separately. (The three-character source expression rendered “discerning physician” occurs only once in the entire treatise.)
Pause: Do These Four Doors Open or Close?
The summary approach has three groups, each with four items, matched group by group and item by item.
First group: birth is suffering; what brings forth birth is arising; the stopping of suffering is cessation; what brings it to a stop is path. Second group: the locus of defilements is suffering; defilements are arising; abandoning defilements is cessation; the method for abandoning them is path.
The third group changes its manner of expression: “is cessation, and the method of abandoning is path. Suffering can initiate the opening of the personality-view door; arising can” 〔T32 452c23〕 “initiate the opening of the annihilation-view door; cessation can initiate the opening of the eternalist-view door; path can initiate the opening of the” 〔T32 452c24〕 wrong-view door.
Suffering can initiate the opening of the personality-view door; arising can initiate the opening of the annihilation-view door; cessation can initiate the opening of the eternalist-view door; path can initiate the opening of the wrong-view door.
But the critical note falls precisely on the word “open”: the Song, Yuan, Ming, and Palace witnesses read “close.”
Pause and ask one question: do these four doors open or close?
The two readings point in exactly opposite directions. According to the base text, each of the four truths can “open” a view-door; according to the four witnesses, each can “close” one. The three-character expression “can initiate opening” occurs four times in this passage, and the variant changes all four—this is not a small difference at one place, but the reversal of an entire group’s reading.
Only two things can be verified: the base reads “open,” and the four witnesses read “close”; all four occurrences are consistent. Which reading better fits the treatise’s meaning cannot be decided from this passage itself—the surrounding text gives no further explanation of these four doors, and the same sentence pattern is not used elsewhere.
This edition records both readings without adjudicating between them and follows the base text in the body. This is precisely the kind of case for which “record both without adjudicating” is most needed: not because the difference is too small to matter, but because it is too great for us to choose on the treatise’s behalf.
Carry away three things: one observation—the passage explicitly asks, “Why are four noble truths taught, not three and not five?” 〔T32 452b28〕 and answers with two reasons: the crossing of result and cause gives four, and the four things to be done give four. Both reasons are established from the configuration of the four truths themselves; neither cites scripture nor says that the Buddha taught it. Earlier in the treatise there is already “Why are there ten forms of foulness, neither more nor fewer?” 〔T32 426b10–426b11〕, so this is not called unique in the whole treatise. One reading practice—both occurrences of “again” in this passage bring out a different ruler: one changes the ruler for measuring “four,” from result and cause to four statements; the other changes the ruler for measuring “character,” from four characters to sixteen. One place to pause—in the third group of the summary approach the base text reads “open,” while four witnesses read “close” 〔T32 452c23〕. The two readings point in exactly opposite directions—opening these four view-doors or closing these four view-doors—and the variant affects all four occurrences: do these four doors open or close? This edition records both readings without adjudicating between them.
Three smaller points should also be remembered: the master heading reads “may be mastered and known” 〔T32 452c03–04〕, the third form of the master-heading formula in this chapter, the other two being “what may be mastered may be known” and “may be known through seven approaches”; the final two names among the eleven approaches are separated by the transmitted punctuation, and the evidence for restoring them lies in the later question “How by extended sequence?” 〔T32 453b07〕; the phrase-meaning approach asks about four but answers with six, placing the two collective names “noble truth” and “truth” first, the third occurrence of the same method in this chapter.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Why Four Truths and the First Four Approaches · Exposition · Summer 2026
四諦譬喻、分別、數與一Simile, Analysis, Number, and Unity of the Four Truths
全文五層 →Full five layers →先把所見說在前頭:譬喻門連下三組,每組四譬配四諦。而三組的取象不是隨手排的——第一組在身外(毒樹、種、燒種、火),第二組在所處之境(此岸、流、彼岸、船),第三組落在自己身上(擔擔、取擔、置擔、置擔的方便)。三組十二譬,一組比一組近;末一組落在自己肩上。
三組十二配
第一組:「毒樹,如是苦可知。如種,如是集可知。如是燒」〔T32 452c26〕「種,如是滅可知。如火,如是道可知」〔T32 452c27〕。
苦如毒樹,集如種,滅如燒種,道如火。四譬同出一個場面——樹、種、燒、火,是一件事的四個環節。
第二組:「種,如是滅可知。如火,如是道可知。如此岸有」〔T32 452c27〕「苦有怖畏,如是苦可知。如流,如是集可知」〔T32 452c28〕;「如彼岸無苦無怖畏,如是滅可知。如船能」〔T32 452c29〕「渡,如是道可知」〔T32 453a01〕。
苦如此岸,集如流,滅如彼岸,道如能渡的船。這一組把人放進去了——第一組是看一棵樹,這一組是站在岸上。
第三組:「渡,如是道可知。如擔擔,如是苦可知。如取」〔T32 453a01〕「擔,如是集可知。如置擔,如是滅可知。如置擔」〔T32 453a02〕「方便,如是道可知」〔T32 453a03〕。
苦如擔著擔子,集如取起擔子,滅如放下擔子,道如放下擔子的方法。這一組連岸也沒有了,只剩肩上那副擔子。
三組同一個構造,而所取之象步步向內。可核的只有這三類象本身——論文不說它是由遠而近排的,本編也不代論文立說;只把三組並排放著,讓讀者自己看那個方向。
(順帶記一件字面上的小事:十二譬之標一律以「如」領其象,唯第三譬作「如是燒種」而多一個「是」字〔T32 452c26〕。照錄不代齊。又:本段第一問之「答」字後,底本的標點作問號而不作冒號〔T32 452c25〕。照錄不代改。)
讀法:一名二義要當心
分別門一起手就出一個要當心的名:「以分別可知?答:四種諦,語諦、各各諦、第一」〔T32 453a04〕「義諦、聖諦」〔T32 453a05〕。
「四種諦」——又是四,可是這個四不是那個四。
本品從頭到這裡講的四諦是苦、集、滅、道;而這裡的四種諦是語諦、各各諦、第一義諦、聖諦。二者同名為「四」而所指全不相干。
更該當心的是:「聖諦」在這一組裡只是四種之一。論文一路稱苦集滅道為「四聖諦」,到這一門卻把「聖諦」降為一個並列項——「是聖人所修行,是聖」〔T32 453a08〕「諦」〔T32 453a09〕。
(「四種諦」三字全論只出現這一次。)
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:遇到一個熟名忽然出現在一組陌生的並列裡,先停下來問它是不是還是原來那個意思。這一門若不先把兩個「四」分開,讀者會以為論文在給四聖諦另立四種,其實它是在給「諦」這個字分四種用法。
本編照錄不代會通。
數門:前三番擴大所除,第四番另列三地善法
數門是本段最難的一節。同一組苦集滅道,論文分四番重畫界線:前三番的「除」語依次加入愛、餘煩惱、一切不善;第四番的除語仍列這三類,不再增加,卻另把三地善法列入集諦。
第一番除愛:「答:除愛,於三地善不善無記法是苦諦;愛是」〔T32 453a11〕集諦。
第二番除愛與其餘煩惱:「愛,餘煩惱,於第三地善不善無記法是苦諦;」〔T32 453a13〕。
第三番再除一切不善:「斷彼是滅諦;道是道諦。復次除愛,餘煩惱一切不善,於三地善有」——見〔T32 453a15〕。
第四番的除語仍列愛、煩惱與一切不善:「斷彼是滅諦;道是道諦。復次除愛與煩惱及」〔T32 453a17〕「一切不善,於三地不善、於三地無記法是苦」〔T32 453a18〕諦;其後另說三地善法為集諦〔T32 453a19〕。
因此四番不能寫成四次等幅遞加:可核的是前三番擴大所除,第四番重列同三類並另納三地善法於集諦。
而論文隨後分別說明四類何以歸集:「諦;愛及餘煩惱及一切不善,於三地善此集」〔T32 453a19〕「諦;斷彼是滅諦;道是道諦。於是覓有氣味義」〔T32 453a20〕「是愛,集有結使義,餘煩惱是集;以可斷義、」〔T32 453a21〕「以令起有義,一切不善是集;以令有義,於三」〔T32 453a22〕「地善法是集」〔T32 453a23〕:覓有氣味義說愛,有結使義說餘煩惱,可斷與令起有義說一切不善,令有義說三地善法。
四類,各繫其義;不把它硬配成四輪各新增一類。
末了以相為判——而那把尺是前一單元的
四番講完,論文給了一個總判:「善於三地及善,或苦諦或集諦,逼惱、憂、有為」〔T32 453a24〕「有邊相,故成苦諦。聚因緣、著和合相故,成集」〔T32 453a25〕「諦」〔T32 453a26〕。
同一批法,或入苦諦或入集諦——判準是相:有逼惱、憂、有為、有邊之相的成苦諦,有聚、因緣、著、和合之相的成集諦。
這八個相不是這裡新立的。翻回上一個單元的相門後輪:「復次苦者逼惱相、憂相、有為」〔T32 452c11〕「相、有邊相,集者聚相、因緣相、和合相、著相」〔T32 452c12〕——一字不易。
論文在這裡逕用前一門所立的尺來判本門的難處,而不再自立。十一行不是十一件並列的事,前門立的東西後門要用。這一層若不回頭看,數門末段那八個字就會被讀成臨時湊的理由。
停一下:四番之中,有一番的字不一樣
現在停在一個字上。
四番的界說一律作「於三地」——第一番「於三地善不善無記法」〔T32 453a11〕,第三番「於三地善有記法」,第四番「於三地不善、於三地無記法」。
唯獨第二番作「於第三地」〔T32 453a13〕。
(「於第三地」四字全論只出現這一次;而「於三地」全論九見,本段就佔七見。)
停下來問一句:這是同一套算法嗎?
若「第三地」是「三地」之誤,四番在這個詞上同構;若不是,那第二番量的就是另一個範圍。
可核的只有三件:四番中唯此一番作「第三地」;此語全論一見;此處無校記。沒有校記這一點尤其要記著——校本沒有把它當作異文處理,所以我們也沒有校本可以依傍。
本編照原字錄,不代為改。
第八門明說「四行成一」
十一行走到第八門,忽然轉了個向:「諦。如是以數可知。問:云何以一可知?答:此」〔T32 453a26〕「四諦以四行成一,以諦義、以如義、以法義、以」〔T32 453a27〕「空義。如是以一可知」〔T32 453a28〕。
四諦以四行成一。以諦的義、如的義、法的義、空的義——四個角度看,這四諦是一。
前七門從句義、相、次第、略、譬喻、分別與數等不同方面觀察四諦;第八門則明說「四諦以四行成一」。
(「四行成一」四字全論只出現這一次。)
可核的是本門這一句明文,不據此推說前七門必然逐門愈細,亦不代論文說其故。
帶走三件:一個所見——譬喻門三組十二配,三組取象步步向內:第一組在身外(毒樹·種·燒種·火),第二組在所處之境(此岸·流·彼岸·船),第三組落在自己肩上(擔擔·取擔·置擔·置擔方便)。一個讀法——一名二義要當心:本段之「四種諦」〔T32 453a04〕與本品所論之四聖諦同名為四而所指不相干,且「聖諦」在此降為並列項之一;遇熟名忽入陌生之列,先停下來問它還是不是原意。一處停問——數門四番之界說,三番作「於三地」而唯第二番作「於第三地」〔T32 453a13,全論唯一見,且此處無校記〕:這是同一套算法嗎? 本編照原字錄,不代為改。
還有兩件小事該記著:數門末段以「逼惱、憂、有為、有邊相」與「聚、因緣、著、和合相」為判,而這八個相一字不易地出自上一單元的相門後輪〔T32 452c11–452c12〕——前門立的尺,後門逕拿來用;第八門一句明作「四諦以四行成一」,可核者止於此句。
Let the central observation come first: the simile approach runs through three sets, each with four similes corresponding to the four truths. The imagery of the three sets is not arranged at random—the first lies outside oneself (poisonous tree, seed, burning the seed, fire); the second lies in the setting one inhabits (this shore, current, far shore, boat); the third comes to rest on oneself (carrying a burden, taking up the burden, setting down the burden, the method for setting it down). Three sets and twelve similes: each set comes closer, and the last lands on one’s own shoulder.
Three Sets, Twelve Correspondences
The first set: “Like a poisonous tree: thus suffering may be known. Like a seed: thus arising may be known. Like this burned” 〔T32 452c26〕 “seed: thus cessation may be known. Like fire: thus the path may be known” 〔T32 452c27〕.
Suffering is like a poisonous tree, arising like a seed, cessation like burning the seed, and path like fire. All four similes come from a single scene—tree, seed, burning, and fire are four stages of one event.
The second set: “Seed: thus cessation may be known. Like fire: thus the path may be known. Like this shore, where there is” 〔T32 452c27〕 “suffering and fear: thus suffering may be known. Like a current: thus arising may be known” 〔T32 452c28〕; “like the far shore, where there is no suffering and no fear: thus cessation may be known. Like a boat that can” 〔T32 452c29〕 “carry one across: thus the path may be known” 〔T32 453a01〕.
Suffering is like this shore, arising like the current, cessation like the far shore, and path like the boat that can carry one across. This set puts the person into the scene—the first set looks at a tree; in this one, the person stands on the shore.
The third set: “Carry one across: thus the path may be known. Like carrying a burden: thus suffering may be known. Like taking up” 〔T32 453a01〕 “a burden: thus arising may be known. Like setting down a burden: thus cessation may be known. Like the” 〔T32 453a02〕 “method for setting down a burden: thus the path may be known” 〔T32 453a03〕.
Suffering is like carrying a burden, arising like taking up the burden, cessation like setting down the burden, and path like the method for setting it down. In this set even the shore has disappeared; only the burden on one’s shoulder remains.
All three sets have the same structure, but their chosen images move inward step by step. Only these three classes of image can be verified—the treatise does not say that they are arranged from far to near, and this edition does not make that claim on the treatise’s behalf. It simply places the three sets side by side and lets the reader see the direction.
(One small literal detail in passing: all twelve simile labels introduce their image with “like”; only the third reads “like this burned seed,” with one additional character translated “this” 〔T32 452c26〕. It is recorded as it stands and not made uniform. Also, after “Answer” in the first question of this passage, the base has a question mark rather than a colon 〔T32 452c25〕. It is recorded as it stands and not changed.)
Reading Practice: Beware One Familiar Name with Two Meanings
The analysis approach opens with a name that calls for care: “known through analysis? Answer: four kinds of truth: truth of speech, particular truth, ultimate” 〔T32 453a04〕 “truth, noble truth” 〔T32 453a05〕.
“Four kinds of truth”—four again, but this four is not that four.
The four truths discussed from the beginning of this chapter to this point are suffering, arising, cessation, and path. The four kinds of truth here are truth of speech, particular truth, ultimate truth, and noble truth. Both are fourfold, but they refer to entirely different things.
Still more care is needed because “noble truth” is only one of the four in this set. The treatise has called suffering, arising, cessation, and path the “four noble truths” throughout, but in this approach it places “noble truth” as one coordinate item: “What noble ones cultivate is the noble” 〔T32 453a08〕 “truth” 〔T32 453a09〕.
(The three-character phrase rendered “four kinds of truth” occurs only once in the entire treatise.)
The reading practice offered by this passage is precisely this: when a familiar name suddenly appears in an unfamiliar parallel list, stop first and ask whether it still has its original meaning. Unless the two “fours” are first kept apart in this approach, a reader may think that the treatise is giving the four noble truths another fourfold classification. In fact, it is distinguishing four uses of the word “truth.”
This edition records the wording as it stands and does not reconcile the two on the treatise’s behalf.
Number: The First Three Rounds Expand What Is Excluded; the Fourth Separately Lists Wholesome Dhammas of the Three Planes
The number approach is the most difficult section of this passage. With the same set of suffering, arising, cessation, and path, the treatise redraws the boundary in four rounds: in the first three, the formula of exclusion successively adds craving, the other defilements, and all unwholesome states; in the fourth, the exclusion still lists these same three classes and adds no further one, but it separately places wholesome dhammas of the three planes under the truth of arising.
The first round excludes craving: “Answer: excluding craving, wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate dhammas in the three planes are the truth of suffering; craving is” 〔T32 453a11〕 the truth of arising.
The second round excludes craving and the other defilements: “Craving and the other defilements: wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate dhammas in the third plane are the truth of suffering” 〔T32 453a13〕.
The third round further excludes all unwholesome states: “Their abandonment is the truth of cessation; the path is the truth of the path. Again, excluding craving, the other defilements, and all unwholesome states, wholesome and determinate dhammas in the three planes are” —see 〔T32 453a15〕.
The fourth round’s exclusion still lists craving, defilements, and all unwholesome states: “Their abandonment is the truth of cessation; the path is the truth of the path. Again, excluding craving, defilements, and” 〔T32 453a17〕 “all unwholesome states, unwholesome dhammas in the three planes and indeterminate dhammas in the three planes are the suffering” 〔T32 453a18〕 truth; afterward it separately says that wholesome dhammas in the three planes are the truth of arising 〔T32 453a19〕.
The four rounds therefore cannot be written as four equal expansions: what can be verified is that the first three expand what is excluded, while the fourth repeats the same three classes and separately includes wholesome dhammas of the three planes under the truth of arising.
The treatise then separately explains why each of four classes belongs to arising: “truth; craving, the other defilements, all unwholesome states, and wholesome dhammas in the three planes—this is the arising” 〔T32 453a19〕 “truth; their abandonment is the truth of cessation; the path is the truth of the path. Here, the meaning of seeking flavor” 〔T32 453a20〕 “is craving; arising has the meaning of having fetters, and the other defilements are arising; by the meaning of being abandonable and” 〔T32 453a21〕 “by the meaning of giving rise to becoming, all unwholesome states are arising; by the meaning of making becoming, wholesome dhammas in the three” 〔T32 453a22〕 “planes are arising” 〔T32 453a23〕. The meaning of seeking flavor explains craving; the meaning of having fetters explains the other defilements; being abandonable and giving rise to becoming explain all unwholesome states; and making becoming explains wholesome dhammas in the three planes.
Each of the four classes is tied to its own meaning; they are not to be forced into four rounds in which each round adds one new class.
Character Decides at the End—and the Ruler Comes from the Previous Unit
After the four rounds, the treatise gives a general determination: “Unwholesome states in the three planes and wholesome states may be either the suffering truth or the arising truth. Oppression, grief, and conditionedness” 〔T32 453a24〕 “and boundedness make them the suffering truth. Gathering, condition, attachment, and conjunction make them the arising” 〔T32 453a25〕 “truth” 〔T32 453a26〕.
The same body of dhammas may fall under either the truth of suffering or the truth of arising—character is the criterion: the characters of oppression, grief, conditionedness, and boundedness make them the truth of suffering; the characters of gathering, condition, attachment, and conjunction make them the truth of arising.
These eight characters are not newly established here. Turn back to the latter round of the character approach in the preceding unit: “Further, suffering has the character of oppression, the character of grief, and the character of being conditioned” 〔T32 452c11〕 “and the character of being bounded; arising has the character of gathering, the character of condition, the character of conjunction, and the character of attachment” 〔T32 452c12〕—not a single character is changed.
Here the treatise directly uses the ruler established in the preceding approach to decide the difficult point in the present one, without establishing another ruler. The eleven approaches are not eleven things merely placed side by side; what an earlier approach establishes is used by a later one. Unless one looks back, the eight characters at the end of the number approach may seem like reasons assembled for the moment.
Pause: One of the Four Rounds Uses Different Wording
Now pause over a single character.
The boundary statement in the four rounds regularly reads “in the three planes”: the first says “wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate dhammas in the three planes” 〔T32 453a11〕, the third “wholesome and determinate dhammas in the three planes,” and the fourth “unwholesome dhammas in the three planes, indeterminate dhammas in the three planes.”
Only the second round reads “in the third plane” 〔T32 453a13〕.
(The four-character expression rendered “in the third plane” occurs only once in the entire treatise, whereas “in the three planes” occurs nine times in the entire treatise, seven of them in this passage.)
Pause and ask one question: is this the same method of calculation?
If “the third plane” is an error for “the three planes,” the four rounds are structurally alike at this term. If it is not, the second round measures a different scope.
Only three things can be verified: this is the only one of the four rounds that reads “in the third plane”; the phrase occurs only once in the entire treatise; and there is no critical note here. The absence of a critical note especially needs to be remembered—the critical edition did not treat this as a variant, so there is no critical reading on which we can rely.
This edition records the original wording and does not alter it on the treatise’s behalf.
The Eighth Approach Explicitly Says “Four Approaches Become One”
When the eleven approaches reach the eighth, the direction suddenly changes: “truth. Thus it can be known through number. Question: How may it be known through unity? Answer: These” 〔T32 453a26〕 “four truths become one through four approaches: through the meaning of truth, the meaning of thusness, the meaning of dhamma, and the meaning of” 〔T32 453a27〕 “emptiness. Thus it can be known through unity” 〔T32 453a28〕.
The four truths become one through four approaches. Seen from four angles—the meaning of truth, of thusness, of dhamma, and of emptiness—the four truths are one.
The first seven approaches examine the four truths through phrase-meaning, character, sequence, summary, simile, analysis, and number. The eighth then explicitly says, “the four truths become one through four approaches.”
(The four-character phrase rendered “four approaches become one” occurs only once in the entire treatise.)
What can be verified is this explicit sentence in the present approach. It does not warrant claiming that the preceding seven approaches necessarily grow progressively more refined, nor does this edition supply the treatise’s reason for it.
Carry away three things. One observation: the simile approach has three sets and twelve correspondences, and the imagery of the three sets moves inward step by step: the first lies outside the body (poisonous tree · seed · burning the seed · fire), the second in one’s surroundings (this shore · current · far shore · boat), and the third on one’s own shoulder (carrying a burden · taking up the burden · setting down the burden · the method for setting it down). One reading practice: beware one name with two meanings. The “four kinds of truth” in this passage 〔T32 453a04〕 and the four noble truths discussed in this chapter are both called “four” but refer to different things, and “noble truth” here becomes one coordinate item; when a familiar name suddenly enters an unfamiliar list, stop first and ask whether it still has its original meaning. One place to pause: in the four boundary statements of the number approach, three read “in the three planes,” but only the second reads “in the third plane” 〔T32 453a13; the only occurrence in the entire treatise, with no critical note here〕: is this the same method of calculation? This edition records the original wording and does not alter it on the treatise’s behalf.
Remember two smaller matters as well. At the end of the number approach, the characters of “oppression, grief, conditionedness, and boundedness” and “gathering, condition, attachment, and conjunction” supply the criterion, and these eight characters come without a single change from the latter round of the character approach in the preceding unit 〔T32 452c11–452c12〕—a ruler established in an earlier approach is taken up directly by a later one. The eighth approach expressly says that “four approaches become one”; what can be verified goes no farther than that sentence.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Simile, Analysis, Number, and Unity of the Four Truths · Exposition · Summer 2026
四諦種種、次第廣與攝Diversity, Extended Sequence, and Inclusion of the Four Truths
全文五層 →Full five layers →品十一走到最後一段。十一行畢其末三,五方便的第五扇門在這裡關上——而五方便一關,這一品也就盡了。
先把所見說在前頭:次第廣門從一數到十,十輪各列苦、集、滅、道四個諦位;其中苦、集、道三位常有可數名目,滅位則作「斷彼」或「斷某」。拿自報之數核可數名目,第二輪那句掉了一格的斷句自己就糾正回來了;而第三輪的苦目卻核不出三。同一門之內,數校得出一處、校不出一處。
先看正反二列
種種門起手把四諦分成二諦:「答:二諦,世諦、出世諦」〔T32 453a29〕。
然後各繫九目,而九目逐目相對:「答:二諦,世諦、出世諦。世諦者,有漏、有結、有縛、」〔T32 453a29〕「有流、有厄、有蓋、可觸、有取、有煩惱,所謂苦及」〔T32 453b01〕「集」〔T32 453b02〕;「集。出世諦者,無漏、無結、無縛、無流、無厄、無」〔T32 453b02〕「蓋、不可觸、無取、無煩惱,所謂滅道」〔T32 453b03〕。
有漏對無漏、有結對無結、有縛對無縛、有流對無流、有厄對無厄、有蓋對無蓋、可觸對不可觸、有取對無取、有煩惱對無煩惱——九對九,一目不缺。
這一組九目不是這裡新造的。識陰的法門裡就有一串:「世間法有漏有結、有縛」〔T32 448b20〕——那裡是單列,這裡是把它翻成反面再並排。同一批目,一處正說、一處正反並說。
隨後是三組短的:三諦有為而滅諦無為;三諦無色而苦諦有色無色;集諦不善、道諦善、滅諦無記、苦諦通三性。
末了一組是四行:「善,道諦善,滅諦無記,苦諦善、不善、無記。苦諦」〔T32 453b05〕「可知,集諦可斷,滅諦可證,道諦應修」〔T32 453b06〕。
這裡有一處字面該記。四行之中前三作「可」而末一作「應」;而三個單元之前,論文為四諦之數作辯時說的是「復次應知、應斷、應證、應」〔T32 452c02〕「修」〔T32 452c03〕——四個字全作「應」。
同一組四行,兩處字面不齊。照錄不代齊。
讀法:遇「以若干種」,逐項數一數
次第廣門是本品最長的一列:從一種數到十種,每一輪列苦、集、滅、道四個諦位——十輪四十個諦位。
本段交出的讀法就在這裡:遇到「以若干種」領起的列,不要只讀它說了什麼,先逐項數一數可數名目是不是正得其數。
照這個去核,四種至十種七輪一個不差:「道。以四種成:四身性處是苦,四顛倒是集,」〔T32 453b12〕斷顛倒是滅、四念處是道——四、四、四;五趣、五蓋、五根;「成:六觸入是苦,六愛身是集,斷愛身是滅,」〔T32 453b15〕六出離法是道;七識住、七使、七菩提分;八世間法、八邪邊、八正分;九眾生居、九愛根法、九正作意根法;「是滅,十想是道」〔T32 453b22〕之十方行、十結使、十想。
七輪二十一個可數名目,數與名一一相符。滅位在各輪另以「斷彼」或「斷某」表出,不是帶數的名目。
第二輪:數自己把斷句糾正回來
現在看第二輪。
底本作:「識身是苦,集我慢,斷彼是滅,身念是道。以二」〔T32 453b08〕「種,名色是苦、是無明,有愛是集,斷彼是滅,」〔T32 453b09〕「奢摩他、毘婆舍那是道」〔T32 453b10〕。
照字面讀:苦是「名色、是無明」,集是「有愛」。可是這一輪自報是二種。
拿數去核:名色本來就是二(名與色);奢摩他與毘婆舍那也是二;那麼集目若是「無明、有愛」,正好也是二。三個位置各得二,一格不差。
反過來按底本的斷句:苦目得三(名、色、無明),集目得一(有愛),道目得二——與「二種」不合。
所以這一句的「是無明」該屬下不屬上。還原的憑據不是文意,是這一輪自報的那個「二」。本編照原字錄、不代加標點,只把這一層可核的還原記下。
本品這一路,靠自報之數還原斷句的地方已經出現多次——十二入的總標、緣門的四項、二十行的目。這一處是同一把工具的又一次使用。
第三輪:同一把工具,這一次核不出來
而緊接著的第三輪就核不出來了。
「奢摩他、毘婆舍那是道。以三種成,所謂苦苦」〔T32 453b10〕「是苦諦,三不善根是集,斷彼是滅,戒定慧是」〔T32 453b11〕「道」〔T32 453b12〕。
集目是「三不善根」——三。道目是「戒定慧」——三。而苦目是「苦苦」〔T32 453b10〕,這兩個字裡看不出三。
停下來問一句:這一輪的苦目,數在哪裡?
本段答不了。可核的只有三件:三不善根與戒定慧各得三;苦目作「苦苦」;此處無校記。
沒有校記這一點尤其要記著——校本沒有把它當作異文處理。所以與第二輪不同:那裡我們可以用數把斷句還原,這裡數只能告訴我們「對不上」,卻補不出對上的那個讀法。
本編照錄不代補。
(順帶記一件字面:十輪之標,首二輪作「以一種」「以二種」而無「成」字,其後八輪一律在數之後加一個「成」。同一個模子,開頭兩下沒扣上。照錄不代齊。)
攝門:三種,所列不含諦
第十一門也是最後一門:「以攝?答:三種攝,陰攝、入攝、界攝。於是苦諦」〔T32 453b23〕。
三種攝——陰、入、界。
把本品四處攝門並排一看,這條暗線就完整了:陰方便攝入、界、諦;入方便攝陰、界、諦;本段攝陰、入、界;而因緣方便獨作「四種相攝」,陰入界諦四者俱取〔T32 451c16〕。
可核的字面是:前三個「三種攝」各略去與所論同名的一類;因緣方便所論不名陰、入、界、諦,而四類俱列。
本段所列不含「諦」,與其所論為聖諦形成對應。
四處字面相形如此;論文不明說三種與四種之所以。本編只記可核的相形,不代論文立因果。
五個「已竟」,最後一個
末了三層收語:「知。以此行於聖諦知令起,此謂聖諦方便(聖諦方便」〔T32 453b27〕「已竟)」〔T32 453b28〕——先收攝門,次收聖諦方便,末繫一行夾註。
第五扇門關上了。
而這一關,五方便就全收了:陰竟於 448c24,入竟於 449c24,界竟於 450a16,因緣竟於 451c27,聖諦竟於 453b27。品首列了五個名字,品中就有五個「已竟」與之相對,一個不多一個不少。
從 445c13 那句「於五處當起方便」到這裡,這一品走完了。
帶走三件:一個所見——次第廣門十輪各列四個諦位;拿自報之數核苦、集、道三位的可數名目,第二輪掉了一格的斷句自己就糾正回來(名色二·無明與有愛二·奢摩他毘婆舍那二〔T32 453b09〕),而第三輪之苦目「苦苦」核不出三〔T32 453b10〕:同一門之內,數校得出一處、校不出一處。一個讀法——遇「以若干種」領起之列,先數可數名目是不是正得其數:本品靠自報之數還原斷句,這已是又一次使用。一處停問——第三輪之苦目數在哪裡?且此處無校記,故與第二輪不同:那裡數能還原,這裡數只能告訴我們對不上。本編照錄不代補。
還有三件小事該記著:種種門末之四行前三作「可」而末一作「應」,與 11-16 之四字皆作「應」〔T32 452c02–452c03〕不齊;十輪之標首二輪無「成」字而其後八輪有之;攝門四處相形,前三處各略去與所論同名的一類,本段所列不含「諦」,因緣方便則四類俱列——字面如此,論文不明說其所以。
Chapter Eleven has reached its final passage. The last three of its eleven approaches are now completed, and the fifth doorway of the five methods closes here—when the five methods close, the chapter itself also comes to an end.
State the finding first: In extended sequence, the count runs from one to ten, and each of the ten rounds lists four truth-positions: suffering, arising, cessation, and path. The positions for suffering, arising, and path regularly have countable names, while the cessation position says “abandoning that” or “abandoning the named cause.” When the announced number is checked against those countable names, the punctuation displaced by one place in the second round corrects itself; yet the suffering member of the third round cannot be counted to three. Within the same approach, counting resolves one place and cannot resolve another.
First, Read the Positive and Negative Lists
The diversity approach begins by dividing the four truths into two truths: “Answer: two truths, worldly truth and supramundane truth” 〔T32 453a29〕.
Then nine items are attached to each, and the nine correspond item for item: “Answer: two truths, worldly truth and supramundane truth. Worldly truth is affected by influxes, fettered, bound,” 〔T32 453a29〕 “caught in currents, subject to peril, covered, touchable, grasped, and afflicted by defilements, namely suffering and” 〔T32 453b01〕 “arising” 〔T32 453b02〕; “arising. Supramundane truth is free from influxes, unfettered, unbound, free from currents, free from peril, free from” 〔T32 453b02〕 “coverings, not touchable, free from grasping, free from defilements, namely cessation and path” 〔T32 453b03〕.
Affected by influxes is paired with free from influxes; fettered with unfettered; bound with unbound; caught in currents with free from currents; subject to peril with free from peril; covered with uncovered; touchable with not touchable; grasped with free from grasping; afflicted by defilements with free from defilements—nine against nine, without a single item missing.
This set of nine was not newly made here. The method concerning the consciousness aggregate already has the series “worldly dhammas are affected by influxes, fettered, bound” 〔T32 448b20〕—there it appears as a single list; here it is turned into its negative and placed beside itself. The same set of items is stated positively in one place and in positive-and-negative pairs in the other.
Then come three shorter groups: three truths are conditioned while cessation is unconditioned; three truths are immaterial while suffering is both material and immaterial; arising is unwholesome, path is wholesome, cessation is indeterminate, and suffering may be wholesome, unwholesome, or indeterminate.
The last group consists of four directives: “unwholesome; path is wholesome; cessation is indeterminate; suffering is wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate. Suffering” 〔T32 453b05〕 “can be known, arising can be abandoned, cessation can be realized, and path should be cultivated” 〔T32 453b06〕.
One detail of wording must be recorded here. Of the four directives, the first three use “can,” while the last uses “should.” Yet three units earlier, when the treatise argued for the number of the four truths, it said, “Further, they should be known, should be abandoned, should be realized, should be” 〔T32 452c02〕 “cultivated” 〔T32 452c03〕—all four use “should.”
The wording of the same four directives is uneven in the two places. It is recorded as it stands, without being made uniform.
Reading Practice: When You Meet “In So Many Ways,” Count Each Item
Extended sequence is the longest list in this chapter: it counts from one way to ten ways, and each round lists the four positions of suffering, arising, cessation, and path—ten rounds and forty truth-positions.
The reading practice this passage hands us is this: When a list begins “in so many ways,” do not read only what it says; first count the countable names item by item and see whether they actually reach the announced number.
Checked in this way, every one of the seven rounds from four through ten comes out exactly: “path. Formed as four: the four body-nature loci are suffering; the four inversions are arising,” 〔T32 453b12〕 abandoning the inversions is cessation, and the four establishments of mindfulness are path—four, four, four; the five destinations, five hindrances, and five faculties; “Formed: the six contact bases are suffering; the six bodies of craving are arising; abandoning the bodies of craving is cessation,” 〔T32 453b15〕 and the six dhammas of release are path; the seven stations of consciousness, seven tendencies, and seven factors of awakening; the eight worldly dhammas, eight wrong extremes, and eight right factors; the nine abodes of beings, nine craving-root dhammas, and nine right-attention-root dhammas; and, in “is cessation; the ten perceptions are path” 〔T32 453b22〕, the ten directional courses, ten fetters, and ten perceptions.
Across the seven rounds, the twenty-one countable names match their numbers item for item. In each round, the cessation position is expressed separately as “abandoning that” or “abandoning the named cause”; it is not a numbered name.
Second Round: The Number Corrects the Punctuation Itself
Now look at the second round.
The base text reads: “the conscious body is suffering; conceit is arising; abandoning that is cessation; mindfulness of the body is path. As two” 〔T32 453b08〕 “ways, name-and-form is suffering, is ignorance; craving for becoming is arising; abandoning that is cessation,” 〔T32 453b09〕 “calm and insight are path” 〔T32 453b10〕.
Read according to its punctuation, suffering is “name-and-form, is ignorance,” while arising is “craving for becoming.” But this round announces two ways.
Check it by number: name-and-form is already two—name and form—and calm and insight are also two. If the names under arising are read as “ignorance and craving for becoming,” they too make exactly two. All three positions contain two, without one place missing.
By contrast, under the base punctuation, the suffering member yields three—name, form, and ignorance—the arising member yields one—craving for becoming—and the path member yields two—not in accord with “two ways.”
The words “is ignorance” in this sentence should therefore belong to what follows, not to what precedes. The ground for recovering the division is not an interpretation of the meaning; it is the “two” announced by this very round. This edition records the original characters as they stand and does not add punctuation on their behalf; it only notes this verifiable recovery.
Along this path through the chapter, the announced number has already restored punctuation several times—the general heading for the twelve bases, the four items of the conditionality approach, and the entries of the twenty modes. This is one more use of the same tool.
Third Round: The Same Tool Cannot Resolve It This Time
Yet the immediately following third round cannot be made to add up.
“Calm and insight are path. Formed as three, namely pain-as-pain” 〔T32 453b10〕 “is the truth of suffering; the three unwholesome roots are arising; abandoning that is cessation; morality, concentration, and wisdom are” 〔T32 453b11〕 “path” 〔T32 453b12〕.
The arising member is “the three unwholesome roots”—three. The path member is “morality, concentration, and wisdom”—three. But the suffering member is “pain-as-pain” 〔T32 453b10〕, and those two characters do not reveal three.
Pause and ask: where is the number in the suffering member of this round?
This passage cannot answer. Only three things can be verified: the three unwholesome roots and morality, concentration, and wisdom each yield three; the suffering member reads “pain-as-pain”; and there is no critical note here.
That there is no critical note here is especially important to remember—the critical edition does not treat this place as a variant. Thus it differs from the second round: there the number lets us recover the division; here the number can tell us only that the count does not match, but cannot supply the reading that would make it match.
This edition records the text as it stands and does not supply what is missing.
(One further detail of wording: among the markers for the ten rounds, the first two read “as one way” and “as two ways” without the word “formed,” while all eight later rounds add “formed” after the number. The same template does not click into place on its first two uses. The wording is recorded as it stands, without being made uniform.)
Inclusion: Three Kinds, with Truth Absent from the List
The eleventh approach is also the last: “Through inclusion? Answer: three kinds of inclusion—inclusion by aggregates, inclusion by bases, and inclusion by elements. Here the truth of suffering” 〔T32 453b23〕.
Three kinds of inclusion—the aggregates, bases, and elements.
Placed side by side, the chapter’s four inclusion approaches complete a thread: the aggregate method includes bases, elements, and truths; the base method includes aggregates, elements, and truths; this passage includes aggregates, bases, and elements; while the conditionality method alone speaks of “four kinds of mutual inclusion” and includes all four—aggregates, bases, elements, and truths 〔T32 451c16〕.
The verifiable wording is this: the first three instances of “three kinds of inclusion” each omit the category that bears the same name as the method under discussion. The method concerning conditionality is not itself named aggregate, base, element, or truth, and it lists all four.
The present list does not include “truth,” corresponding to the fact that its subject is the noble truths.
This is how the wording of the four passages compares; the treatise does not expressly state why there are three kinds in one case and four in the other. This edition records only the verifiable comparison and does not establish a causal explanation on the treatise’s behalf.
Five “Complete” Notices, the Last One Here
At the end come three levels of closing words: “known. Through this practice, knowledge of the noble truths is made to arise. This is called the method concerning the noble truths (the method concerning the noble truths” 〔T32 453b27〕 “is complete)” 〔T32 453b28〕—first the inclusion approach closes, next the method concerning the noble truths closes, and last a one-line parenthetical note is attached.
The fifth doorway has closed.
With this close, all five methods are complete: the aggregate method at 448c24, the base method at 449c24, the element method at 450a16, the conditionality method at 451c27, and the noble-truth method at 453b27. The chapter’s opening listed five names, and within the chapter five “complete” notices answer them—neither one more nor one fewer.
From the sentence at 445c13, “in five fields he should arouse a method,” to this point, the chapter has run its full course.
Take away three things. One finding—the extended-sequence approach lists four truth-positions in each of its ten rounds; when the announced number is checked against the countable names in the suffering, arising, and path positions, the punctuation displaced by one place in the second round corrects itself—name and form, two; ignorance and craving for becoming, two; calm and insight, two 〔T32 453b09〕—but the third round’s suffering member, “pain-as-pain,” cannot be counted to three 〔T32 453b10〕. Within the same approach, counting resolves one place and cannot resolve another. One reading practice—when a list begins “in so many ways,” first count whether its countable names precisely reach that number: the chapter’s use of an announced number to restore punctuation appears here once again. One place to pause and ask—where is the number in the third round’s suffering member? And there is no critical note here. It therefore differs from the second round: there the number can restore the division; here it can only tell us that the count does not match. This edition records the text as it stands and does not supply what is missing.
Remember three smaller matters as well: of the four directives at the end of the diversity approach, the first three use “can” and the last “should,” unlike the four uses of “should” in 11-16 〔T32 452c02–452c03〕; the first two markers in the ten rounds lack the word “formed,” while the following eight have it; and when the chapter’s four inclusion approaches are compared, the first three each omit the category bearing the same name as the method under discussion, the present passage does not include “truth,” and the conditionality method lists all four categories—this is how the wording stands, and the treatise does not expressly state why.
Shi Huijing · Waken · The Path of Freedom · Diversity, Extended Sequence, and Inclusion of the Four Truths · Exposition · Summer 2026